Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisThis second edition of Power Line Communications will show some adjustments in content including new material on PLC for home and industry, PLC for multimedia, PLC for smart grid and PLC for vehicles.Table of Contents1 List of Contributors Preface xv List of Acronyms xvii Introduction xix 1.1 What is a Name? 1 1.2 Historical Notes 2 1.3 About the Book 4 References 6 2 Channel Characterization 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Channel Modeling Fundamentals 10 2.3 Models for Low Voltage (LV) Channels: Outdoor and Indoor Case 31 2.4 Models for Medium Voltage (MV) Channels 75 2.5 Models for Outdoor Channels: High Voltage Case 86 2.6 MIMO Channels 102 2.7 Noise and Interference 122 2.8 Reference Channel Models and Software 138 2.9 Channels in other Scenarios 140 References 165 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 175 3.1 Introduction 175 3.2 Parameters for EMC Considerations 176 3.3 Electromagnetic Emission 182 3.4 Electromagnetic Susceptibility 186 3.5 EMC Coordination 188 3.6 EMC Standardization and Regulation in Europe 194 3.7 Coupling Between Power Line and other Wireline Communications Systems 203 3.8 Final Remarks 217 References 219 4 Coupling 221 4.1 Introduction 221 4.2 Coupling Networks 225 4.3 LV Coupling 245 4.4 HV Coupling 250 4.5 MV Coupling 253 4.6 Summary 255 References 256 5 Digital Transmission Techniques 259 5.1 Introduction 259 5.2 Single Carrier Modulation 260 5.3 Multicarrier Modulations 286 5.4 Current and Voltage Modulations 306 5.5 Ultra-wideband Modulation 323 5.6 Impulse Noise Mitigation 328 5.7 MIMO Transmission 341 5.8 Coding Techniques 356 References 373 6 Medium Access Control and Layers Above in PLC 383 6.1 Introduction 383 6.2 MAC Layer Concepts 384 6.3 Protocols for Different Power Line Communications Applications and Domains386 6.4 Multiple-User Resource Allocation 404 6.5 Cooperative Power Line Communications 426 References 442 7 PLC for Home and Industry Automation 449 7.1 Introduction 449 7.2 Home and Industry Automation Using PLC 450 7.3 Popular Home Automation Protocols 451 7.4 Power Line Communication Application for Refrigeration Containers Ships 455 7.5 Windowed Frequency Hopping System AMIS CX1-Profile 462 7.6 DigitalSTROM@ 468 7.7 Conclusion 470 References 471 8 Multimedia PLC Systems 473 8.1 Introduction 473 8.2 QoS Requirements for Multimedia Traffic 473 8.3 Optimizing PLC for Multimedia 477 8.3.1 Overall Design Considerations for Multimedia PLC 477 8.4 Standards on Broadband PLC-Networking Technology 479 8.5 The IEEE 1901 Broadband over Power Line Standard 479 8.6 Performance Evaluation 494 8.7 HomePlug AV2 497 8.8 ITU-T G.996x (G.hn) 499 References 508 9 PLC for Smart Grid 511 9.1 Introduction 511 9.2 Standards 519 9.3 Regulation 536 9.4 Applications 545 9.5 Conclusions 561 References 562 10 PLC for Vehicles 567 10.1 Introduction 567 10.2 Advantages of PLC 567 10.3 Studies of PLC for Vehicles 568 10.4 Challenges for PLC 573 10.5 An Experimental Implementation 578 10.5.1 Vehicle PLC Testbed 579 10.6 Alternative to and Integration of PLC 583 References 585 11 Conclusions 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book serves as a tool for any engineer who wants to learn about circuits, electrical machines and drives, power electronics, and power systems basics From time to time, engineers find they need to brush up on certain fundamentals within electrical engineering. This clear and concise book is the ideal learning tool for them to quickly learn the basics or develop an understanding of newer topics. Fundamentals of Electric Power Engineering: From Electromagnetics to Power Systems helps nonelectrical engineers amass power system information quickly by imparting tools and trade tricks for remembering basic concepts and grasping new developments. Created to provide more in-depth knowledge of fundamentalsrather than a broad range of applications onlythis comprehensive and up-to-date book: Covers topics such as circuits, electrical machines and drives, power electronics, and power system basics as well as new generation technologies AlloTable of ContentsPREFACE xv ABOUT THE AUTHORS xix PART I PRELIMINARY MATERIAL 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 The Scope of Electrical Engineering, 3 1.2 This Book’s Scope and Organization, 7 1.3 International Standards and Their Usage in This Book, 8 1.3.1 International Standardization Bodies, 8 1.3.2 The International System of Units (SI), 9 1.3.3 Graphic Symbols for Circuit Drawings, 11 1.3.4 Names, Symbols, and Units, 13 1.3.5 Other Conventions, 15 1.4 Specific Conventions and Symbols in This Book, 15 1.4.1 Boxes Around Text, 16 1.4.2 Grayed Boxes, 16 1.4.3 Terminology, 17 1.4.4 Acronyms, 17 1.4.5 Reference Designations, 18 2 The Fundamental Laws of Electromagnetism 19 2.1 Vector Fields, 20 2.2 Definition of E and B; Lorentz’s Force Law, 22 2.3 Gauss’s Law, 25 2.4 Ampère’s Law and Charge Conservation, 26 2.4.1 Magnetic Field and Matter, 31 2.5 Faraday’s Law, 32 2.6 Gauss’s Law for Magnetism, 35 2.7 Constitutive Equations of Matter, 36 2.7.1 General Considerations, 36 2.7.2 Continuous Charge Flow Across Conductors, 36 2.8 Maxwell’s Equations and Electromagnetic Waves, 38 2.9 Historical Notes, 40 2.9.1 Short Biography of Faraday, 40 2.9.2 Short Biography of Gauss, 40 2.9.3 Short Biography of Maxwell, 41 2.9.4 Short Biography of Ampère, 41 2.9.5 Short Biography of Lorentz, 41 PART II ELECTRIC CIRCUIT CONCEPT AND ANALYSIS 43 3 Circuits as Modelling Tools 45 3.1 Introduction, 46 3.2 Definitions, 48 3.3 Charge Conservation and Kirchhoff’s Current Law, 50 3.3.1 The Charge Conservation Law, 50 3.3.2 Charge Conservation and Circuits, 51 3.3.3 The Electric Current, 53 3.3.4 Formulations of Kirchhoff’s Current Law, 55 3.4 Circuit Potentials and Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law, 60 3.4.1 The Electric Field Inside Conductors, 60 3.4.2 Formulations of Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law, 64 3.5 Solution of a Circuit, 65 3.5.1 Determining Linearly Independent Kirchhoff Equations (Loop-Cuts Method), 66 3.5.2 Constitutive Equations, 68 3.5.3 Number of Variables and Equations, 70 3.6 The Substitution Principle, 73 3.7 Kirchhoff’s Laws in Comparison with Electromagnetism Laws, 75 3.8 Power in Circuits, 76 3.8.1 Tellegen’s Theorem and Energy Conservation Law in Circuits, 78 3.9 Historical Notes, 80 3.9.1 Short Biography of Kirchhoff, 80 3.9.2 Short Biography of Tellegen, 80 4 Techniques for Solving DC Circuits 83 4.1 Introduction, 84 4.2 Modelling Circuital Systems with Constant Quantities as Circuits, 84 4.2.1 The Basic Rule, 84 4.2.2 Resistors: Ohm’s Law, 87 4.2.3 Ideal and “Real” Voltage and Current Sources, 89 4.3 Solving Techniques, 91 4.3.1 Basic Usage of Combined Kirchhoff-Constitutive Equations, 92 4.3.2 Nodal Analysis, 95 4.3.3 Mesh Analysis, 98 4.3.4 Series and Parallel Resistors; Star/Delta Conversion, 99 4.3.5 Voltage and Current Division, 103 4.3.6 Linearity and Superposition, 105 4.3.7 Thévenin’s Theorem, 107 4.4 Power and Energy and Joule’s Law, 112 4.5 More Examples, 114 4.6 Resistive Circuits Operating with Variable Quantities, 120 4.7 Historical Notes, 121 4.7.1 Short Biography of Ohm, 121 4.7.2 Short Biography of Thévenin, 121 4.7.3 Short Biography of Joule, 122 4.8 Proposed Exercises, 122 5 Techniques for Solving AC Circuits 131 5.1 Introduction, 132 5.2 Energy Storage Elements, 132 5.2.1 Power in Time-Varying Circuits, 133 5.2.2 The Capacitor, 133 5.2.3 Inductors and Magnetic Circuits, 136 5.3 Modelling Time-Varying Circuital Systems as Circuits, 140 5.3.1 The Basic Rule, 140 5.3.2 Modelling Circuital Systems When Induced EMFs Between Wires Cannot Be Neglected, 145 5.3.3 Mutual Inductors and the Ideal Transformer, 146 5.3.4 Systems Containing Ideal Transformers: Magnetically Coupled Circuits, 150 5.4 Simple R–L and R–C Transients, 152 5.5 AC Circuit Analysis, 155 5.5.1 Sinusoidal Functions, 155 5.5.2 Steady-State Behaviour of Linear Circuits Using Phasors, 156 5.5.3 AC Circuit Passive Parameters, 163 5.5.4 The Phasor Circuit, 164 5.5.5 Circuits Containing Sources with Different Frequencies, 169 5.6 Power in AC Circuits, 171 5.6.1 Instantaneous, Active, Reactive, and Complex Powers, 171 5.6.2 Circuits Containing Sources Having Different Frequencies, 177 5.6.3 Conservation of Complex, Active, and Reactive Powers, 178 5.6.4 Power Factor Correction, 180 5.7 Historical Notes, 184 5.7.1 Short Biography of Boucherot, 184 5.8 Proposed Exercises, 184 6 Three-Phase Circuits 191 6.1 Introduction, 191 6.2 From Single-Phase to Three-Phase Systems, 192 6.2.1 Modelling Three-Phase Lines When Induced EMFs Between Wires Are Not Negligible, 198 6.3 The Single-Phase Equivalent of the Three-Phase Circuit, 200 6.4 Power in Three-Phase Systems, 202 6.5 Single-Phase Feeding from Three-Phase Systems, 206 6.6 Historical Notes, 209 6.6.1 Short Biography of Tesla, 209 6.7 Proposed Exercises, 209 PART III ELECTRIC MACHINES AND STATIC CONVERTERS 213 7 Magnetic Circuits and Transformers 215 7.1 Introduction, 215 7.2 Magnetic Circuits and Single-Phase Transformers, 215 7.3 Three-Phase Transformers, 225 7.4 Magnetic Hysteresis and Core Losses, 227 7.5 Open-Circuit and Short-Circuit Tests, 230 7.6 Permanent Magnets, 233 7.7 Proposed Exercises, 235 8 Fundamentals of Electronic Power Conversion 239 8.1 Introduction, 239 8.2 Power Electronic Devices, 240 8.2.1 Diodes, Thyristors, Controllable Switches, 240 8.2.2 The Branch Approximation of Thyristors and Controllable Switches, 242 8.2.3 Diodes, 243 8.2.4 Thyristors, 246 8.2.5 Insulated-Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs), 248 8.2.6 Summary of Power Electronic Devices, 250 8.3 Power Electronic Converters, 251 8.3.1 Rectifiers, 251 8.3.2 DC–DC Converters, 257 8.3.3 Inverters, 264 8.4 Analysis of Periodic Quantities, 276 8.4.1 Introduction, 276 8.4.2 Periodic Quantities and Fourier’s Series, 276 8.4.3 Properties of Periodic Quantities and Examples, 279 8.4.4 Frequency Spectrum of Periodic Signals, 280 8.5 Filtering Basics, 283 8.5.1 The Basic Principle, 283 8.6 Summary, 289 9 Principles of Electromechanical Conversion 291 9.1 Introduction, 292 9.2 Electromechanical Conversion in a Translating Bar, 292 9.3 Basic Electromechanics in Rotating Machines, 297 9.3.1 Rotating Electrical Machines and Faraday’s Law, 297 9.3.2 Generation of Torques in Rotating Machines, 301 9.3.3 Electromotive Force and Torque in Distributed Coils, 302 9.3.4 The Uniform Magnetic Field Equivalent, 304 9.4 Reluctance-Based Electromechanical Conversion, 305 10 DC Machines and Drives and Universal Motors 309 10.1 Introduction, 310 10.2 The Basic Idea and Generation of Quasi-Constant Voltage, 310 10.3 Operation of a DC Generator Under Load, 315 10.4 Different Types of DC Machines, 318 10.4.1 Generators and Motors, 318 10.4.2 Starting a DC Motor with Constant Field Current, 320 10.4.3 Independent, Shunt, PM, and Series Excitation Motors, 326 10.5 Universal Motors, 329 10.6 DC Electric Drives, 331 10.7 Proposed Exercises, 335 11 Synchronous Machines and Drives 337 11.1 The Basic Idea and Generation of EMF, 338 11.2 Operation Under Load, 345 11.2.1 The Rotating Magnetic Field, 345 11.2.2 Stator–Rotor Interaction, 348 11.2.3 The Phasor Diagram and the Single-Phase Equivalent Circuit, 350 11.3 Practical Considerations, 353 11.3.1 Power Exchanges, 353 11.3.2 Generators and Motors, 357 11.4 Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Machines, 359 11.5 Synchronous Electric Drives, 360 11.5.1 Introduction, 360 11.5.2 PM, Inverter-Fed, Synchronous Motor Drives, 361 11.5.3 Control Implementation, 366 11.6 Historical Notes, 370 11.6.1 Short Biography of Ferraris and Behn-Eschemburg, 370 11.7 Proposed Exercises, 371 12 Induction Machines and Drives 373 12.1 Induction Machine Basics, 374 12.2 Machine Model and Analysis, 378 12.3 No-Load and Blocked-Rotor Tests, 391 12.4 Induction Machine Motor Drives, 394 12.5 Single-Phase Induction Motors, 399 12.5.1 Introduction, 399 12.5.2 Different Motor Types, 402 12.6 Proposed Exercises, 404 PART IV POWER SYSTEMS BASICS 409 13 Low-Voltage Electrical Installations 411 13.1 Another Look at the Concept of the Electric Power System, 411 13.2 Electrical Installations: A Basic Introduction, 413 13.3 Loads, 418 13.4 Cables, 422 13.4.1 Maximum Permissible Current and Choice of the Cross-Sectional Area, 422 13.5 Determining Voltage Drop, 427 13.6 Overcurrents and Overcurrent Protection, 429 13.6.1 Overloads, 429 13.6.2 Short Circuits, 430 13.6.3 Breaker Characteristics and Protection Against Overcurrents, 432 13.7 Protection in Installations: A Long List, 437 14 Electric Shock and Protective Measures 439 14.1 Introduction, 439 14.2 Electricity and the Human Body, 440 14.2.1 Effects of Current on Human Beings, 440 14.2.2 The Mechanism of Current Dispersion in the Earth, 443 14.2.3 A Circuital Model for the Human Body, 444 14.2.4 The Human Body in a Live Circuit, 446 14.2.5 System Earthing: TT, TN, and IT, 448 14.3 Protection Against Electric Shock, 450 14.3.1 Direct and Indirect Contacts, 450 14.3.2 Basic Protection (Protection Against Direct Contact), 451 14.3.3 Fault Protection (Protection Against Indirect Contact), 453 14.3.4 SELV Protection System, 458 14.4 The Residual Current Device (RCD) Principle of Operation, 459 14.5 What Else?, 462 References, 462 15 Large Power Systems: Structure and Operation 465 15.1 Aggregation of Loads and Installations: The Power System, 465 15.2 Toward AC Three-Phase Systems, 466 15.3 Electricity Distribution Networks, 468 15.4 Transmission and Interconnection Grids, 470 15.5 Modern Structure of Power Systems and Distributed Generation, 473 15.6 Basics of Power System Operation, 475 15.6.1 Frequency Regulation, 478 15.6.2 Voltage Regulation, 480 15.7 Vertically Integrated Utilities and Deregulated Power Systems, 482 15.8 Recent Challenges and Smart Grids, 484 15.9 Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Storage, 486 15.9.1 Photovoltaic Plants, 486 15.9.2 Wind Power Plants, 490 15.9.3 Energy Storage, 494 Appendix: Transmission Line Modelling and Port-Based Circuits 501 A.1 Modelling Transmission Lines Through Circuits, 501 A.1.1 Issues and Solutions When Displacement Currents are Neglected, 502 A.1.2 Steady-State Analysis Considering Displacement Currents, 506 A.1.3 Practical Considerations, 509 A.2 Modelling Lines as Two-Port Components, 510 A.2.1 Port-Based Circuits, 510 A.2.2 Port-Based Circuit and Transmission Lines, 511 A.2.3 A Sample Application, 512 A.3 Final Comments, 513 SELECTED REFERENCES 515 ANSWERS TO THE PROPOSED EXERCISES 519 INDEX 529

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an insight into the key practical aspects and best practice of 4G-LTE network design, performance, and deployment Design, Deployment and Performance of 4G-LTE Networks addresses the key practical aspects and best practice of 4G networks design, performance, and deployment.Table of ContentsAuthors’ Biographies xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Abbreviations and Acronyms xxi 1 LTE Network Architecture and Protocols 1 Ayman Elnashar and Mohamed A. El-saidny 1.1 Evolution of 3GPP Standards 2 1.1.1 3GPP Release 99 3 1.1.2 3GPP Release 4 3 1.1.3 3GPP Release 5 3 1.1.4 3GPP Release 6 4 1.1.5 3GPP Release 7 4 1.1.6 3GPP Release 8 5 1.1.7 3GPP Release 9 and Beyond 5 1.2 Radio Interface Techniques in 3GPP Systems 6 1.2.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 6 1.2.2 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 6 1.2.3 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 7 1.2.4 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 7 1.3 Radio Access Mode Operations 7 1.3.1 Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) 8 1.3.2 Time Division Duplex (TDD) 8 1.4 Spectrum Allocation in UMTS and LTE 8 1.5 LTE Network Architecture 10 1.5.1 Evolved Packet System (EPS) 10 1.5.2 Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 11 1.5.3 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) 13 1.5.4 LTE User Equipment 13 1.6 EPS Interfaces 14 1.6.1 S1-MME Interface 14 1.6.2 LTE-Uu Interface 15 1.6.3 S1-U Interface 17 1.6.4 S3 Interface (SGSN-MME) 18 1.6.5 S4 (SGSN to SGW) 18 1.6.6 S5/S8 Interface 19 1.6.7 S6a (Diameter) 21 1.6.8 S6b Interface (Diameter) 21 1.6.9 S6d (Diameter) 22 1.6.10 S9 Interface (H-PCRF-VPCRF) 23 1.6.11 S10 Interface (MME-MME) 23 1.6.12 S11 Interface (MME–SGW) 23 1.6.13 S12 Interface 23 1.6.14 S13 Interface 24 1.6.15 SGs Interface 24 1.6.16 SGi Interface 25 1.6.17 Gx Interface 26 1.6.18 Gy and Gz Interfaces 27 1.6.19 DNS Interface 27 1.6.20 Gn/Gp Interface 27 1.6.21 SBc Interface 28 1.6.22 Sv Interface 28 1.7 EPS Protocols and Planes 29 1.7.1 Access and Non-Access Stratum 29 1.7.2 Control Plane 29 1.7.3 User Plane 30 1.8 EPS Procedures Overview 31 1.8.1 EPS Registration and Attach Procedures 31 1.8.2 EPS Quality of Service (QoS) 34 1.8.3 EPS Security Basics 36 1.8.4 EPS Idle and Active States 38 1.8.5 EPS Network Topology for Mobility Procedures 39 1.8.6 EPS Identifiers 44 References 44 2 LTE Air Interface and Procedures 47 Mohamed A. El-saidny 2.1 LTE Protocol Stack 47 2.2 SDU and PDU 48 2.3 LTE Radio Resource Control (RRC) 50 2.4 LTE Packet Data Convergence Protocol Layer (PDCP) 52 2.4.1 PDCP Architecture 53 2.4.2 PDCP Data and Control SDUs 53 2.4.3 PDCP Header Compression 54 2.4.4 PDCP Ciphering 54 2.4.5 PDCP In-Order Delivery 54 2.4.6 PDCP in LTE versus HSPA 55 2.5 LTE Radio Link Control (RLC) 55 2.5.1 RLC Architecture 56 2.5.2 RLC Modes 57 2.5.3 Control and Data PDUs 60 2.5.4 RLC in LTE versus HSPA 60 2.6 LTE Medium Access Control (MAC) 61 2.7 LTE Physical Layer (PHY) 61 2.7.1 HSPA(+) Channel Overview 61 2.7.2 General LTE Physical Channels 71 2.7.3 LTE Downlink Physical Channels 71 2.7.4 LTE Uplink Physical Channels 72 2.8 Channel Mapping of Protocol Layers 73 2.8.1 E-UTRAN Channel Mapping 73 2.8.2 UTRAN Channel Mapping 76 2.9 LTE Air Interface 76 2.9.1 LTE Frame Structure 76 2.9.2 LTE Frequency and Time Domains Structure 76 2.9.3 OFDM Downlink Transmission Example 80 2.9.4 Downlink Scheduling 81 2.9.5 Uplink Scheduling 88 2.9.6 LTE Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) 89 2.10 Data Flow Illustration Across the Protocol Layers 90 2.10.1 HSDPA Data Flow 90 2.10.2 LTE Data Flow 91 2.11 LTE Air Interface Procedures 92 2.11.1 Overview 92 2.11.2 Frequency Scan and Cell Identification 92 2.11.3 Reception of Master and System Information Blocks (MIB and SIB) 93 2.11.4 Random Access Procedures (RACH) 94 2.11.5 Attach and Registration 95 2.11.6 Downlink and Uplink Data Transfer 96 2.11.7 Connected Mode Mobility 96 2.11.8 Idle Mode Mobility and Paging 99 References 100 3 Analysis and Optimization of LTE System Performance 103 Mohamed A. El-saidny 3.1 Deployment Optimization Processes 104 3.1.1 Profiling Device and User Behavior in the Network 105 3.1.2 Network Deployment Optimization Processes 107 3.1.3 Measuring the Performance Targets 108 3.1.4 LTE Troubleshooting Guidelines 119 3.2 LTE Performance Analysis Based on Field Measurements 123 3.2.1 Performance Evaluation of Downlink Throughput 127 3.2.2 Performance Evaluation of Uplink Throughput 131 3.3 LTE Case Studies and Troubleshooting 134 3.3.1 Network Scheduler Implementations 135 3.3.2 LTE Downlink Throughput Case Study and Troubleshooting 136 3.3.3 LTE Uplink Throughput Case Studies and Troubleshooting 139 3.3.4 LTE Handover Case Studies 146 3.4 LTE Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 153 3.4.1 Introduction to Cell Reselection 155 3.4.2 LTE to WCDMA Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 155 3.4.3 WCDMA to LTE Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 160 3.5 Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Optimization Considerations 165 3.5.1 SIB-19 Planning Strategy for UTRAN to E-UTRAN Cell Reselection 165 3.5.2 SIB-6 Planning Strategy for E-UTRAN to UTRAN Cell Reselection 167 3.5.3 Inter-RAT Case Studies from Field Test 168 3.5.4 Parameter Setting Trade-off 174 3.6 LTE to LTE Inter-frequency Cell Reselection 177 3.6.1 LTE Inter-Frequency Cell Reselection Rules 177 3.6.2 LTE Inter-Frequency Optimization Considerations 177 3.7 LTE Inter-RAT and Inter-frequency Handover 180 3.7.1 Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover Rules 187 3.7.2 Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover Optimization Considerations 188 References 189 4 Performance Analysis and Optimization of LTE Key Features: C-DRX, CSFB, and MIMO 191 Mohamed A. El-saidny and Ayman Elnashar 4.1 LTE Connected Mode Discontinuous Reception (C-DRX) 192 4.1.1 Concepts of DRX for Battery Saving 193 4.1.2 Optimizing C-DRX Performance 195 4.2 Circuit Switch Fallback (CSFB) for LTE Voice Calls 204 4.2.1 CSFB to UTRAN Call Flow and Signaling 206 4.2.2 CSFB to UTRAN Features and Roadmap 216 4.2.3 Optimizing CSFB to UTRAN 231 4.3 Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output (MIMO) Techniques 252 4.3.1 Introduction to MIMO Concepts 252 4.3.2 3GPP MIMO Evolution 256 4.3.3 MIMO in LTE 258 4.3.4 Closed-Loop MIMO (TM4) versus Open-Loop MIMO (TM3) 261 4.3.5 MIMO Optimization Case Study 267 References 270 5 Deployment Strategy of LTE Network 273 Ayman Elnashar 5.1 Summary and Objective 273 5.2 LTE Network Topology 273 5.3 Core Network Domain 276 5.3.1 Policy Charging and Charging (PCC) Entities 280 5.3.2 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 283 5.3.3 Serving Gateway (SGW) 286 5.3.4 PDN Gateway (PGW) 287 5.3.5 Interworking with PDN (DHCP) 289 5.3.6 Usage of RADIUS on the Gi/SGi Interface 291 5.3.7 IPv6 EPC Transition Strategy 293 5.4 IPSec Gateway (IPSec GW) 294 5.4.1 IPSec GW Deployment Strategy and Redundancy Options 299 5.5 EPC Deployment and Evolution Strategy 300 5.6 Access Network Domain 303 5.6.1 E-UTRAN Overall Description 303 5.6.2 Home eNB 305 5.6.3 Relaying 307 5.6.4 End-to-End Routing of the eNB 308 5.6.5 Macro Sites Deployment Strategy 312 5.6.6 IBS Deployment Strategy 317 5.6.7 Passive Inter Modulation (PIM) 319 5.7 Spectrum Options and Guard Band 327 5.7.1 Guard Band Requirement 327 5.7.2 Spectrum Options for LTE 327 5.8 LTE Business Case and Financial Analysis 333 5.8.1 Key Financial KPIs [31] 334 5.9 Case Study: Inter-Operator Deployment Scenario 341 References 347 6 Coverage and Capacity Planning of 4G Networks 349 Ayman Elnashar 6.1 Summary and Objectives 349 6.2 LTE Network Planning and Rollout Phases 349 6.3 LTE System Foundation 351 6.3.1 LTE FDD Frame Structure 351 6.3.2 Slot Structure and Physical Resources 353 6.3.3 Reference Signal Structure 356 6.4 PCI and TA Planning 360 6.4.1 PCI Planning Introduction 360 6.4.2 PCI Planning Guidelines 361 6.4.3 Tracking Areas (TA) Planning 362 6.5 PRACH Planning 370 6.5.1 Zadoff-Chu Sequence 371 6.5.2 PRACH Planning Procedures 372 6.5.3 Practical PRACH Planning Scenarios 373 6.6 Coverage Planning 375 6.6.1 RSSI, RSRP, RSRQ, and SINR 375 6.6.2 The Channel Quality Indicator 378 6.6.3 Modulation and Coding Scheme and Link Adaptation 381 6.6.4 LTE Link Budget and Coverage Analysis 385 6.6.5 Comparative Analysis with HSPA+ 401 6.6.6 Link Budget for LTE Channels 405 6.6.7 RF Propagation Models and Model Tuning 409 6.7 LTE Throughput and Capacity Analysis 418 6.7.1 Served Physical Layer Throughput Calculation 418 6.7.2 Average Spectrum Efficiency Estimation 418 6.7.3 Average Sector Capacity 419 6.7.4 Capacity Dimensioning Process 419 6.7.5 Capacity Dimensioning Exercises 423 6.7.6 Calculation of VoIP Capacity in LTE 426 6.7.7 LTE Channels Planning 431 6.8 Case Study: LTE FDD versus LTE TDD 437 References 443 7 Voice Evolution in 4G Networks 445 Mahmoud R. Sherif 7.1 Voice over IP Basics 445 7.1.1 VoIP Protocol Stack 445 7.1.2 VoIP Signaling (Call Setup) 449 7.1.3 VoIP Bearer Traffic (Encoded Speech) 449 7.2 Voice Options for LTE 451 7.2.1 SRVCC and CSFB 451 7.2.2 Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) 452 7.3 IMS Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) 455 7.3.1 IMS Overview 456 7.3.2 VoLTE Call Flow and Interaction with IMS 460 7.3.3 Voice Call Continuity Overview 469 7.3.4 SRVCC from VoLTE to 3G/2G 471 7.3.5 Enhanced SRVCC (eSRVCC) 480 7.4 Key VoLTE Features 482 7.4.1 End-to-End QoS Support 482 7.4.2 Semi-Persistent Scheduler 486 7.4.3 TTI Bundling 488 7.4.4 Connected Mode DRX 491 7.4.5 Robust Header Compression (ROHC) 492 7.4.6 VoLTE Vocoders and De-Jitter Buffer 497 7.5 Deployment Considerations for VoLTE 503 References 505 8 4G Advanced Features and Roadmap Evolutions from LTE to LTE-A 507 Ayman Elnashar and Mohamed A. El-saidny 8.1 Performance Comparison between LTE’s UE Category 3 and 4 509 8.1.1 Trial Overview 512 8.1.2 Downlink Performance Comparison in Near and Far Cell Conditions 513 8.1.3 Downlink Performance Comparison in Mobility Conditions 515 8.2 Carrier Aggregation 516 8.2.1 Basic Definitions of LTE Carrier Aggregation 518 8.2.2 Band Types of LTE Carrier Aggregation 519 8.2.3 Impact of LTE Carrier Aggregation on Protocol Layers 520 8.3 Enhanced MIMO 520 8.3.1 Enhanced Downlink MIMO 522 8.3.2 Uplink MIMO 523 8.4 Heterogeneous Network (HetNet) and Small Cells 523 8.4.1 Wireless Backhauling Applicable to HetNet Deployment 524 8.4.2 Key Features for HetNet Deployment 528 8.5 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) 529 8.6 Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission and Reception 531 8.6.1 DL CoMP Categories 531 8.6.2 UL CoMP Categories 533 8.6.3 Performance Evaluation of CoMP 533 8.7 Self-Organizing, Self-Optimizing Networks (SON) 535 8.7.1 Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) 536 8.7.2 Mobility Robust Optimization (MRO) 537 8.7.3 Mobility Load Balancing (MLB) 539 8.7.4 SON Enhancements in LTE-A 540 8.8 LTE-A Relays and Home eNodeBs (HeNB) 540 8.9 UE Positioning and Location-Based Services in LTE 541 8.9.1 LBS Overview 541 8.9.2 LTE Positioning Architecture 543 References 544 Index 547

Read more less

Book SynopsisExtended models, methods, and applications in power system risk assessment Risk Assessment of Power Systems: Models, Methods, and Applications, Second Edition fills the gap between risk theory and real-world application. Author Wenyuan Li is a leading authority on power system risk and has more than twenty-five years of experience in risk evaluation. This book offers real-world examples to help readers learn to evaluate power system risk during planning, design, operations, and maintenance activities. Some of the new additions in the Second Edition include: New research and applied achievements in power system risk assessment A discussion of correlation models in risk evaluation How to apply risk assessment to renewable energy sources and smart grids Asset management based on condition monitoring and risk evaluation Voltage instability risk assessment and its application to system planning Table of ContentsPreface xix Preface to the First Edition xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Risk in Power Systems 1 1.2 Basic Concepts of Power System Risk Assessment 4 1.2.1 System Risk Evaluation 4 1.2.2 Data in Risk Evaluation 6 1.2.3 Unit Interruption Cost 7 1.3 Outline of the Book 9 2 Outage Models of System Components 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Models of Independent Outages 16 2.2.1 Repairable Forced Failure 17 2.2.2 Aging Failure 18 2.2.3 Nonrepairable Chance Failure 24 2.2.4 Planned Outage 24 2.2.5 Semiforced Outage 27 2.2.6 Partial Failure Mode 28 2.2.7 Multiple Failure Mode 30 2.3 Models of Dependent Outages 31 2.3.1 Common-Cause Outage 31 2.3.2 Component-Group Outage 36 2.3.3 Station-Originated Outage 37 2.3.4 Cascading Outage 39 2.3.5 Environment-Dependent Failure 40 2.4 Conclusions 42 3 Parameter Estimation in Outage Models 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Point Estimation on Mean and Variance of Failure Data 46 3.2.1 Sample Mean 46 3.2.2 Sample Variance 48 3.3 Interval Estimation on Mean and Variance of Failure Data 49 3.3.1 General Concept of Confidence Interval 49 3.3.2 Confidence Interval of Mean 50 3.3.3 Confidence Interval of Variance 53 3.4 Estimating Failure Frequency of Individual Components 54 3.4.1 Point Estimation 54 3.4.2 Interval Estimation 55 3.5 Estimating Probability from a Binomial Distribution 56 3.6 Experimental Distribution of Failure Data and its Test 57 3.6.1 Experimental Distribution of Failure Data 58 3.6.2 Test of Experimental Distribution 59 3.7 Estimating Parameters in Aging Failure Models 60 3.7.1 Mean Life and its Standard Deviation in the Normal Model 61 3.7.2 Shape and Scale Parameters in the Weibull Model 63 3.7.3 Example 66 3.8 Conclusions 70 4 Elements of Risk Evaluation Methods 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Methods for Simple Systems 74 4.2.1 Probability Convolution 74 4.2.2 Series and Parallel Networks 75 4.2.3 Minimum Cutsets 78 4.2.4 Markov Equations 79 4.2.5 Frequency-Duration Approaches 81 4.3 Methods for Complex Systems 84 4.3.1 State Enumeration 84 4.3.2 Nonsequential Monte Carlo Simulation 87 4.3.3 Sequential Monte Carlo Simulation 89 4.4 Correlation Models in Risk Evaluation 91 4.4.1 Correlation Measures 92 4.4.2 Correlation Matrix Methods 93 4.4.3 Copula Functions 95 4.5 Conclusions 102 5 Risk Evaluation Techniques for Power Systems 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Techniques Used in Generation-Demand Systems 106 5.2.1 Convolution Technique 106 5.2.2 State Sampling Method 110 5.2.3 State Duration Sampling Method 112 5.3 Techniques Used in Radial Distribution Systems 114 5.3.1 Analytical Technique 114 5.3.2 State Duration Sampling Method 117 5.4 Techniques Used in Substation Configurations 118 5.4.1 Failure Modes and Modeling 119 5.4.2 Connectivity Identification 121 5.4.3 Stratified State Enumeration Method 123 5.4.4 State Duration Sampling Method 127 5.5 Techniques Used in Composite Generation and Transmission Systems 129 5.5.1 Basic Procedure 130 5.5.2 Component Failure Models 131 5.5.3 Load Curve Models 131 5.5.4 Contingency Analysis 133 5.5.5 Optimization Models for Load Curtailments 135 5.5.6 State Enumeration Method 138 5.5.7 State Sampling Method 139 5.6 Conclusions 141 6 Application of Risk Evaluation to Transmission Development Planning 143 6.1 Introduction 143 6.2 Concept of Probabilistic Planning 144 6.2.1 Basic Procedure 144 6.2.2 Cost Analysis 145 6.2.3 Present Value 146 6.3 Risk Evaluation Approach 146 6.3.1 Risk Evaluation Procedure 147 6.3.2 Risk Cost Model 147 6.4 Example 1: Selecting the Lowest-Cost Planning Alternative 149 6.4.1 System Description 149 6.4.2 Planning Alternatives 151 6.4.3 Risk Evaluation 152 6.4.4 Overall Economic Analysis 155 6.4.5 Summary 157 6.5 Example 2: Applying Different Planning Criteria 158 6.5.1 System and Planning Alternatives 158 6.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 159 6.5.3 Risk and Risk Cost Evaluation 161 6.5.4 Overall Economic Analysis 163 6.5.5 Summary 166 6.6 Conclusions 167 7 Application of Risk Evaluation to Transmission Operation Planning 169 7.1 Introduction 169 7.2 Concept of Risk Evaluation in Operation Planning 170 7.3 Risk Evaluation Method 173 7.4 Example 1: Determining the Lowest-Risk Operation Mode 175 7.4.1 System and Study Conditions 175 7.4.2 Assessing Impacts of Load Transfer 177 7.4.3 Comparing Different Reconfigurations 177 7.4.4 Selecting Operation Mode under the N−2 Condition 179 7.4.5 Summary 181 7.5 Example 2: A Simple Case by Hand Calculation 181 7.5.1 Basic Concept 181 7.5.2 Case Description 182 7.5.3 Study Conditions and Data 183 7.5.4 Risk Evaluation 185 7.5.5 Summary 188 7.6 Conclusions 188 8 Application of Risk Evaluation to Generation Source Planning 191 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Procedure of Reliability Planning 192 8.3 Simulation of Generation and Risk Costs 193 8.3.1 Simulation Approach 193 8.3.2 Minimization Cost Model 194 8.3.3 Expected Generation and Risk Costs 195 8.4 Example 1: Selecting Location and Size of Cogenerators 196 8.4.1 Basic Concept 196 8.4.2 System and Cogeneration Candidates 197 8.4.3 Risk Sensitivity Analysis 199 8.4.4 Maximum Benefit Analysis 201 8.4.5 Summary 205 8.5 Example 2: Making a Decision to Retire a Local Generation Plant 205 8.5.1 Case Description 206 8.5.2 Risk Evaluation 206 8.5.3 Total Cost Analysis 208 8.5.4 Summary 210 8.6 Conclusions 210 9 Application of Risk Evaluation to Selecting Substation Configurations 211 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Load Curtailment Model 212 9.3 Risk Evaluation Approach 215 9.3.1 Component Failure Models 215 9.3.2 Procedure of Risk Evaluation 215 9.3.3 Economic Analysis Method 216 9.4 Example 1: Selecting Substation Configuration 217 9.4.1 Two Substation Configurations 217 9.4.2 Risk Evaluation 218 9.4.3 Economic Analysis 222 9.4.4 Summary 223 9.5 Example 2: Evaluating Effects of Substation Configuration Changes 223 9.5.1 Simplified Model for Evaluating Substation Configurations 223 9.5.2 Problem Description 224 9.5.3 Risk Evaluation 227 9.5.4 Summary 228 9.6 Example 3: Selecting Transmission Line Arrangement Associated with Substations 229 9.6.1 Description of Two Options 229 9.6.2 Risk Evaluation and Economic Analysis 230 9.6.3 Summary 233 9.7 Conclusions 233 10 Application of Risk Evaluation to Renewable Energy Systems 235 10.1 Introduction 235 10.2 Risk Evaluation of Wind Turbine Power Converter System (WTPCS) 237 10.2.1 Basic Concepts 237 10.2.2 Power Losses and Temperatures of WTPCS Components 238 10.2.3 Risk Evaluation of WTPCS 240 10.2.4 Case Study 245 10.2.5 Summary 251 10.3 Risk Evaluation of Photovoltaic Power Systems 251 10.3.1 Two Basic Structures of Photovoltaic Power Systems 251 10.3.2 Risk Parameters of Photovoltaic Inverters 254 10.3.3 Risk Evaluation of Photovoltaic Power System 258 10.3.4 Case Study 263 10.3.5 Summary 270 10.4 Conclusions 272 11 Application of Risk Evaluation to Composite Systems with Renewable Sources 275 11.1 Introduction 275 11.2 Risk Assessment of a Composite System with Wind Farms and Solar Power Stations 276 11.2.1 Probability Models of Renewable Sources and Bus Load Curves 276 11.2.2 Multiple Correlations among Renewable Sources and Bus/Regional Loads 279 11.2.3 Risk Assessment Considering Multiple Correlations 282 11.2.4 Case Study 283 11.2.5 Summary 295 11.3 Determination of Transfer Capability Required by Wind Generation 296 11.3.1 System, Conditions, and Method 296 11.3.2 Wind Generation Model 298 11.3.3 Equivalence of Wind Power in Generation Systems 299 11.3.4 Transfer Capability Required by Wind Generation 303 11.3.5 Summary 309 11.4 Conclusions 310 12 Risk Evaluation of Wide Area Measurement and Control System 313 12.1 Introduction 313 12.2 Hierarchical Structure and Failure Analysis of WAMCS 314 12.2.1 Hierarchical Structure of WAMCS 314 12.2.2 Failure Analysis Technique for WAMCS 315 12.3 Risk Evaluation of Phasor Measurement Units 317 12.3.1 Markov State Models of PMU Modules 317 12.3.2 Equivalent Two-State Model of PMU 324 12.4 Risk Evaluation of Regional Communication Networks in WAMCS 325 12.4.1 Classification of Regional Communication Networks 325 12.4.2 Survival Mechanisms of Regional Networks 328 12.4.3 Risk Evaluation in Two Survival Mechanisms 329 12.4.4 Equivalent Two-State Model of a Regional Communication Network 334 12.5 Risk Evaluation of Backbone Network in WAMCS 335 12.5.1 Equivalent Risk Model of Backbone Communication Network 336 12.5.2 Risk Evaluation of Optic Fiber System 337 12.6 Numerical Results 343 12.6.1 Risk Indices of PMU 343 12.6.2 Risk Indices of Regional Communication Networks 345 12.6.3 Risk Indices of the Backbone Communication Network 347 12.6.4 Risk Indices of Overall WAMCS 348 12.7 Conclusions 349 13 Reliability-Centered Maintenance 351 13.1 Introduction 351 13.2 Basic Tasks in RCM 352 13.2.1 Comparison between Maintenance Alternatives 352 13.2.2 Lowest-Risk Maintenance Scheduling 353 13.2.3 Predictive Maintenance versus Corrective Maintenance 353 13.2.4 Ranking Importance of Components 354 13.3 Example 1: Transmission Maintenance Scheduling 355 13.3.1 Procedure of Transmission Maintenance Planning 355 13.3.2 Description of the System and Maintenance Outage 357 13.3.3 The Lowest-Risk Schedule of the Cable Replacement 358 13.3.4 Summary 359 13.4 Example 2: Workforce Planning in Maintenance 360 13.4.1 Problem Description 360 13.4.2 Procedure 361 13.4.3 Case Study and Results 362 13.4.4 Summary 363 13.5 Example 3: A Simple Case Performed by Hand Calculations 363 13.5.1 Case Description 363 13.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 365 13.5.3 EENS Evaluation 365 13.5.4 Summary 367 13.6 Conclusions 367 14 Probabilistic Spare-Equipment Analysis 369 14.1 Introduction 369 14.2 Spare-Equipment Analysis Based on Reliability Criteria 370 14.2.1 Unavailability of Components 370 14.2.2 Group Reliability and Spare-Equipment Analysis 372 14.3 Spare-Equipment Analysis Using the Probabilistic Cost Method 373 14.3.1 Failure Cost Model 373 14.3.2 Unit Failure Cost Estimation 374 14.3.3 Annual Investment Cost Model 375 14.3.4 Present Value Approach 375 14.3.5 Procedure of Spare-Equipment Analysis 376 14.4 Example 1: Determining Number and Timing of Spare Transformers 376 14.4.1 Transformer Group and Data 376 14.4.2 Spare-Transformer Analysis Based on Group Failure Probability 377 14.4.3 Spare-Transformer Plans Based on the Probabilistic Cost Model 378 14.4.4 Summary 381 14.5 Example 2: Determining Redundancy Level of 500 kV Reactors 381 14.5.1 Problem Description 381 14.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 383 14.5.3 Redundancy Analysis 385 14.5.4 Summary 387 14.6 Conclusions 387 15 Asset Management Based on Condition Monitoring and Risk Evaluation 389 15.1 Introduction 389 15.2 Maintenance Strategy of Overhead Lines 390 15.2.1 Risk Evaluation Using Condition Monitoring Data 391 15.2.2 Overhead Line Maintenance Strategy 397 15.2.3 Case Study 399 15.2.4 Summary 401 15.3 Replacement Strategy for Aged Transformers 402 15.3.1 Transformer Aging Failure Unavailability Using Condition Monitoring Data 403 15.3.2 Transformer Replacement Strategy 407 15.3.3 Case Study 410 15.3.4 Summary 413 15.4 Conclusions 414 16 Reliability-Based Transmission-Service Pricing 417 16.1 Introduction 417 16.2 Basic Concept 418 16.2.1 Incremental Reliability Value 419 16.2.2 Impacts of Customers on System Reliability 420 16.2.3 Reliability Component in Price Design 421 16.3 Calculation Methods 422 16.3.1 Unit Incremental Reliability Value 422 16.3.2 Generation Credit for Reliability Improvement 423 16.3.3 Load Charge for Reliability Degradation 423 16.3.4 Load Charge Rate Due to Generation Credit 424 16.4 Rate Design 424 16.4.1 Charge Rate for Wheeling Customers 424 16.4.2 Charge Rate for Native Customers 425 16.4.3 Credit to Generation Customers 425 16.5 Application Example 425 16.5.1 Calculation of the UIRV 427 16.5.2 Calculation of the GCRI 427 16.5.3 Calculation of the LCRD 427 16.5.4 Calculation of the LCRGC 428 16.5.5 Calculations of Charge Rates 428 16.6 Conclusions 430 17 Voltage Instability Risk Assessment and its Application to System Planning 431 17.1 Introduction 431 17.2 Method of Assessing Voltage Instability Risk 432 17.2.1 Maximum Loadability Model for System States 432 17.2.2 Models for Identifying Weak Branches and Buses 436 17.2.3 Determination of Contingency System States 443 17.2.4 Procedure of Calculating Voltage Instability Risk Indices 444 17.3 Tracing and Locating Voltage Instability Risk for Planning Alternatives 447 17.4 Case Studies 448 17.4.1 Results of the IEEE 14-Bus System 448 17.4.2 Results of the 171-Bus Utility System 453 17.5 Conclusions 456 18 Probabilistic Transient Stability Assessment 459 18.1 Introduction 459 18.2 Probabilistic Modeling and Simulation Methods 460 18.2.1 Selection of Pre-Fault System States 460 18.2.2 Fault Models 461 18.2.3 Monte Carlo Simulation of Fault Events 463 18.2.4 Transient Stability Simulation 464 18.3 Procedure 464 18.3.1 Procedure for the First Type of Study 465 18.3.2 Procedure for the Second Type of Study 465 18.4 Examples 465 18.4.1 System Description and Data 465 18.4.2 Transfer Limit Calculation in the Columbia River System 470 18.4.3 Generation Rejection Requirement in the Peace River System 472 18.4.4 Summary 475 18.5 Conclusions 475 Appendix A Basic Probability Concepts 477 A.1 Probability Calculation Rules 477 A.1.1 Intersection 477 A.1.2 Union 477 A.1.3 Full Conditional Probability 478 A.2 Random Variable and its Distribution 478 A.3 Important Distributions in Risk Evaluation 479 A.3.1 Exponential Distribution 479 A.3.2 Normal Distribution 479 A.3.3 Log-Normal Distribution 481 A.3.4 Weibull Distribution 481 A.3.5 Gamma Distribution 482 A.3.6 Beta Distribution 483 A.4 Numerical Characteristics 483 A.4.1 Mathematical Expectation 483 A.4.2 Variance and Standard Deviation 484 A.4.3 Covariance and Correlation Coefficients 484 A.5 Nonparametric Kernel Density Estimator 485 A.5.1 Basic Concept 485 A.5.2 Determination of the Bandwidth 486 Appendix B Elements of Monte Carlo Simulation 489 B.1 General Concept 489 B.2 Random Number Generators 490 B.2.1 Multiplicative Congruent Generator 490 B.2.2 Mixed Congruent Generator 491 B.3 Inverse Transform Method of Generating Random Variates 491 B.4 Important Random Variates in Risk Evaluation 492 B.4.1 Exponential Distribution Random Variate 492 B.4.2 Normal Distribution Random Variate 493 B.4.3 Log-Normal Distribution Random Variate 494 B.4.4 Weibull Distribution Random Variate 494 B.4.5 Gamma Distribution Random Variate 495 B.4.6 Beta Distribution Random Variate 495 Appendix C Power Flow Models 497 C.1 AC Power Flow Models 497 C.1.1 Power Flow Equations 497 C.1.2 Newton–Raphson Method 497 C.1.3 Fast Decoupled Method 498 C.2 DC Power Flow Models 499 C.2.1 Basic Equation 499 C.2.2 Line Flow Equation 500 Appendix D Optimization Algorithms 503 D.1 Simplex Methods for Linear Programming 503 D.1.1 Primal Simplex Method 503 D.1.2 Dual Simplex Method 505 D.2 Interior Point Method for Nonlinear Programming 506 D.2.1 Optimality and Feasibility Conditions 506 D.2.2 Procedure of the Algorithm 508 Appendix E Three Probability Distribution Tables 511 References 515 Further Reading 523 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1Xiang Zhou and Chongjin Xie 1.1 High-Capacity Fiber Transmission Technology Evolution, 1 1.2 Fundamentals of Coherent Transmission Technology, 4 1.2.1 Concept of Coherent Detection, 4 1.2.2 Digital Signal Processing, 5 1.2.3 Key Devices, 7 1.3 Outline of this Book, 8 References, 9 2 Multidimensional Optimized Optical Modulation Formats 13Magnus Karlsson and Erik Agrell 2.1 Introduction, 13 2.2 Fundamentals of Digital Modulation, 15 2.2.1 System Models, 15 2.2.2 Channel Models, 17 2.2.3 Constellations and Their Performance Metrics, 18 2.3 Modulation Formats and Their Ideal Performance, 20 2.3.1 Format Optimizations and Comparisons, 21 2.3.2 Optimized Formats in Nonlinear Channels, 30 2.4 Combinations of Coding and Modulation, 31 2.4.1 Soft-Decision Decoding, 31 2.4.2 Hard-Decision Decoding, 37 2.4.3 Iterative Decoding, 39 2.5 Experimental Work, 40 2.5.1 Transmitter Realizations and Transmission Experiments, 40 2.5.2 Receiver Realizations and Digital Signal Processing, 45 2.5.3 Formats Overview, 49 2.5.4 Symbol Detection, 50 2.5.5 Realizing Dimensions, 51 2.6 Summary and Conclusions, 54 References, 56 3 Advances in Detection and Error Correction for Coherent Optical Communications: Regular, Irregular, and Spatially Coupled LDPC Code Designs 65Laurent Schmalen, Stephan ten Brink, and Andreas Leven 3.1 Introduction, 65 3.2 Differential Coding for Optical Communications, 67 3.2.1 Higher-Order Modulation Formats, 67 3.2.2 The Phase-Slip Channel Model, 69 3.2.3 Differential Coding and Decoding, 71 3.2.4 Maximum a Posteriori Differential Decoding, 78 3.2.5 Achievable Rates of the Differentially Coded Phase-Slip Channel, 81 3.3 LDPC-Coded Differential Modulation, 83 3.3.1 Low-Density Parity-Check (LDPC) Codes, 85 3.3.2 Code Design for Iterative Differential Decoding, 91 3.3.3 Higher-Order Modulation Formats with V < Q, 100 3.4 Coded Differential Modulation with Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes, 101 3.4.1 Protograph-Based Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes, 102 3.4.2 Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes with Iterative Demodulation, 105 3.4.3 Windowed Differential Decoding of SC-LDPC Codes, 108 3.4.4 Design of Protograph-Based SC-LDPC Codes for Differential-Coded Modulation, 108 3.5 Conclusions, 112 Appendix: LDPC-Coded Differential Modulation—Decoding Algorithms, 112 Differential Decoding, 114 LDPC Decoding, 115 References, 117 4 Spectrally Efficient Multiplexing: Nyquist-WDM 123Gabriella Bosco 4.1 Introduction, 123 4.2 Nyquist Signaling Schemes, 125 4.2.1 Ideal Nyquist-WDM (Δf = Rs), 126 4.2.2 Quasi-Nyquist-WDM (Δf > Rs), 128 4.2.3 Super-Nyquist-WDM (Δf < Rs), 130 4.3 Detection of a Nyquist-WDM Signal, 134 4.4 Practical Nyquist-WDM Transmitter Implementations, 137 4.4.1 Optical Nyquist-WDM, 139 4.4.2 Digital Nyquist-WDM, 141 4.5 Nyquist-WDM Transmission, 146 4.5.1 Optical Nyquist-WDM Transmission Experiments, 148 4.5.2 Digital Nyquist-WDM Transmission Experiments, 148 4.6 Conclusions, 149 References, 150 5 Spectrally Efficient Multiplexing – OFDM 157An Li, Di Che, Qian Hu, Xi Chen, and William Shieh 5.1 OFDM Basics, 158 5.2 Coherent Optical OFDM (CO-OFDM), 161 5.2.1 Principle of CO-OFDM, 161 5.3 Direct-Detection Optical OFDM (DDO-OFDM), 169 5.3.1 Linearly Mapped DDO-OFDM, 169 5.3.2 Nonlinearly Mapped DDO-OFDM (NLM-DDO-OFDM), 173 5.4 Self-Coherent Optical OFDM, 174 5.4.1 Single-Ended Photodetector-Based SCOH, 175 5.4.2 Balanced Receiver-Based SCOH, 177 5.4.3 Stokes Vector Direct Detection, 177 5.5 Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM System (DFT-S OFDM), 180 5.5.1 Principle of DFT-S OFDM, 180 5.5.2 Unique-Word-Assisted DFT-S OFDM (UW-DFT-S OFDM), 182 5.6 OFDM-Based Superchannel Transmissions, 183 5.6.1 No-Guard-Interval CO-OFDM (NGI-CO-OFDM) Superchannel, 184 5.6.2 Reduced-Guard-Interval CO-OFDM (RGI-CO-OFDM) Superchannel, 186 5.6.3 DFT-S OFDM Superchannel, 188 5.7 Summary, 193 References, 194 6 Polarization and Nonlinear Impairments in Fiber Communication Systems 201Chongjin Xie 6.1 Introduction, 201 6.2 Polarization of Light, 202 6.3 PMD and PDL in Optical Communication Systems, 206 6.3.1 PMD, 206 6.3.2 PDL, 208 6.4 Modeling of Nonlinear Effects in Optical Fibers, 209 6.5 Coherent Optical Communication Systems and Signal Equalization, 211 6.5.1 Coherent Optical Communication Systems, 211 6.5.2 Signal Equalization, 213 6.6 PMD and PDL Impairments in Coherent Systems, 215 6.6.1 PMD Impairment, 216 6.6.2 PDL Impairment, 222 6.7 Nonlinear Impairments in Coherent Systems, 228 6.7.1 System Model, 229 6.7.2 Homogeneous PDM-QPSK System, 230 6.7.3 Hybrid PDM-QPSK and 10-Gb/s OOK System, 233 6.7.4 Homogeneous PDM-16QAM System, 234 6.8 Summary, 240 References, 241 7 Analytical Modeling of the Impact of Fiber Non-Linear Propagation on Coherent Systems and Networks 247Pierluigi Poggiolini, Yanchao Jiang, Andrea Carena, and Fabrizio Forghieri 7.1 Why are Analytical Models Important?, 247 7.1.1 What Do Professionals Need?, 247 7.2 Background, 248 7.2.1 Modeling Approximations, 249 7.3 Introducing the GN–EGN Model Class, 260 7.3.1 Getting to the GN Model, 260 7.3.2 Towards the EGN Model, 265 7.4 Model Selection Guide, 269 7.4.1 From Model to System Performance, 269 7.4.2 Point-to-Point Links, 270 7.4.3 The Complete EGN Model, 272 7.4.4 Case Study: Determining the Optimum System Symbol Rate, 286 7.4.5 NLI Modeling for Dynamically Reconfigurable Networks, 289 7.5 Conclusion, 294 Acknowledgements, 295 Appendix, 295 A.1 The White-Noise Approximation, 295 A.1 BER Formulas for the Most Common QAM Systems, 295 A.2 The Link Function 𝜇, 296 A.3 The EGN Model Formulas for the X2-X4 and M1-M3 Islands, 297 A.4 Outline of GN–EGN Model Derivation, 299 A.5 List of Acronyms, 303 References, 305 8 Digital Equalization in Coherent Optical Transmission Systems 311Seb Savory 8.1 Introduction, 311 8.2 Primer on the Mathematics of Least Squares FIR Filters, 312 8.2.1 Finite Impulse Response Filters, 313 8.2.2 Differentiation with Respect to a Complex Vector, 314 8.2.3 Least Squares Tap Weights, 314 8.2.4 Application to Stochastic Gradient Algorithms, 316 8.2.5 Application to Wiener Filter, 317 8.2.6 Other Filtering Techniques and Design Methodologies, 318 8.3 Equalization of Chromatic Dispersion, 318 8.3.1 Nature of Chromatic Dispersion, 318 8.3.2 Modeling of Chromatic Dispersion in an Optical Fiber, 318 8.3.3 Truncated Impulse Response, 319 8.3.4 Band-Limited Impulse Response, 320 8.3.5 Least Squares FIR Filter Design, 321 8.3.6 Example Performance of the Chromatic Dispersion Compensating Filter, 321 8.4 Equalization of Polarization-Mode Dispersion, 323 8.4.1 Modeling of PMD, 324 8.4.2 Obtaining the Inverse Jones Matrix of the Channel, 325 8.4.3 Constant Modulus Update Algorithm, 325 8.4.4 Decision-Directed Equalizer Update Algorithm, 326 8.4.5 Radially Directed Equalizer Update Algorithm, 327 8.4.6 Parallel Realization of the FIR Filter, 327 8.4.7 Generalized 4 × 4 Equalizer for Mitigation of Frequency or Polarization-Dependent Loss and Receiver Skew, 328 8.4.8 Example Application to Fast Blind Equalization of PMD, 328 8.5 Concluding Remarks and Future Research Directions, 329 Acknowledgments, 330 References, 330 9 Nonlinear Compensation for Digital Coherent Transmission 333Guifang Li 9.1 Introduction, 333 9.2 Digital Backward Propagation (DBP), 334 9.2.1 How DBP Works, 334 9.2.2 Experimental Demonstration of DBP, 335 9.2.3 Computational Complexity of DBP, 336 9.3 Reducing DBP Complexity for Dispersion-Unmanaged WDM Transmission, 339 9.4 DBP for Dispersion-Managed WDM Transmission, 342 9.5 DBP for Polarization-Multiplexed Transmission, 349 9.6 Future Research, 350 References, 351 10 Timing Synchronization in Coherent Optical Transmission Systems 355Han Sun and Kuang-Tsan Wu 10.1 Introduction, 355 10.2 Overall System Environment, 357 10.3 Jitter Penalty and Jitter Sources in a Coherent System, 359 10.3.1 VCO Jitter, 359 10.3.2 Detector Jitter Definitions and Method of Numerical Evaluation, 361 10.3.3 Laser FM Noise- and Dispersion-Induced Jitter, 363 10.3.4 Coherent System Tolerance to Untracked Jitter, 366 10.4 Digital Phase Detectors, 368 10.4.1 Frequency-Domain Phase Detector, 369 10.4.2 Equivalence to the Squaring Phase Detector, 371 10.4.3 Equivalence to Godard’s Maximum Sampled Power Criterion, 373 10.4.4 Equivalence to Gardner’s Phase Detector, 374 10.4.5 Second Class of Phase Detectors, 377 10.4.6 Jitter Performance of the Phase Detectors, 378 10.4.7 Phase Detectors for Nyquist Signals, 380 10.5 The Chromatic Dispersion Problem, 383 10.6 The Polarization-Mode Dispersion Problem, 386 10.7 Timing Synchronization for Coherent Optical OFDM, 390 10.8 Future Research, 391 References, 392 11 Carrier Recovery in Coherent Optical Communication Systems 395Xiang Zhou 11.1 Introduction, 395 11.2 Optimal Carrier Recovery, 397 11.2.1 MAP-Based Frequency and Phase Estimator, 397 11.2.2 Cramér–Rao Lower Bound, 398 11.3 Hardware-Efficient Phase Recovery Algorithms, 399 11.3.1 Decision-Directed Phase-Locked Loop (PLL), 399 11.3.2 Mth-Power-Based Feedforward Algorithms, 401 11.3.3 Blind Phase Search (BPS) Feedforward Algorithms, 405 11.3.4 Multistage Carrier Phase Recovery Algorithms, 408 11.4 Hardware-Efficient Frequency Recovery Algorithms, 416 11.4.1 Coarse Auto-Frequency Control (ACF), 416 11.4.2 Mth-Power-Based Fine FO Estimation Algorithms, 418 11.4.3 Blind Frequency Search (BFS)-Based Fine FO Estimation Algorithm, 421 11.4.4 Training-Initiated Fine FO Estimation Algorithm, 423 11.5 Equalizer-Phase Noise Interaction and its Mitigation, 424 11.6 Carrier Recovery in Coherent OFDM Systems, 429 11.7 Conclusions and Future Research Directions, 430 References, 431 12 Real-Time Implementation of High-Speed Digital Coherent Transceivers 435Timo Pfau 12.1 Algorithm Constraints, 435 12.1.1 Power Constraint and Hardware Optimization, 436 12.1.2 Parallel Processing Constraint, 438 12.1.3 Feedback Latency Constraint, 440 12.2 Hardware Implementation of Digital Coherent Receivers, 442 References, 446 13 Photonic Integration 447Po Dong and Sethumadhavan Chandrasekhar 13.1 Introduction, 447 13.2 Overview of Photonic Integration Technologies, 449 13.3 Transmitters, 451 13.3.1 Dual-Polarization Transmitter Circuits, 451 13.3.2 High-Speed Modulators, 452 13.3.3 PLC Hybrid I/Q Modulator, 455 13.3.4 InP Monolithic I/Q Modulator, 455 13.3.5 Silicon Monolithic I/Q Modulator, 457 13.4 Receivers, 459 13.4.1 Polarization Diversity Receiver Circuits, 459 13.4.2 PLC Hybrid Receivers, 461 13.4.3 InP Monolithic Receivers, 462 13.4.4 Silicon Monolithic Receivers, 462 13.4.5 Coherent Receiver with 120∘ Optical Hybrids, 465 13.5 Conclusions, 467 Acknowledgments, 467 References, 467 14 Optical Performance Monitoring for Fiber-Optic Communication Networks 473Faisal N. Khan, Zhenhua Dong, Chao Lu, and Alan Pak Tao Lau 14.1 Introduction, 473 14.1.1 OPM and Their Roles in Optical Networks, 474 14.1.2 Network Functionalities Enabled by OPM, 475 14.1.3 Network Parameters Requiring OPM, 477 14.1.4 Desirable Features of OPM Techniques, 480 14.2 OPM Techniques For Direct Detection Systems, 482 14.2.1 OPM Requirements for Direct Detection Optical Networks, 482 14.2.2 Overview of OPM Techniques for Existing Direct Detection Systems, 483 14.2.3 Electronic DSP-Based Multi-Impairment Monitoring Techniques for Direct Detection Systems, 485 14.2.4 Bit Rate and Modulation Format Identification Techniques for Direct Detection Systems, 488 14.2.5 Commercially Available OPM Devices for Direct Detection Systems, 489 14.2.6 Applications of OPM in Deployed Fiber-Optic Networks, 489 14.3 OPM For Coherent Detection Systems, 490 14.3.1 Non-Data-Aided OSNR Monitoring for Digital Coherent Receivers, 491 14.3.2 Data-Aided (Pilot Symbols Based) OSNR Monitoring for Digital Coherent Receivers, 494 14.3.3 OPM at the Intermediate Network Nodes Using Low-Cost Structures, 495 14.3.4 OSNR Monitoring in the Presence of Fiber Nonlinearity, 496 14.4 Integrating OPM Functionalities in Networking, 499 14.5 Conclusions and Outlook, 499 Acknowledgments, 500 References, 500 15 Rate-Adaptable Optical Transmission and Elastic Optical Networks 507Patricia Layec, Annalisa Morea, Yvan Pointurier, and Jean-Christophe Antona 15.1 Introduction, 507 15.1.1 History of Elastic Optical Networks, 509 15.2 Key Building Blocks, 511 15.2.1 Optical Cross-Connect, 512 15.2.2 Elastic Transponder, 513 15.2.3 Elastic Aggregation, 515 15.2.4 Performance Prediction, 516 15.2.5 Resource Allocation Tools, 520 15.2.6 Control Plane for Flexible Optical Networks, 524 15.3 Practical Considerations for Elastic WDM Transmission, 527 15.3.1 Flexible Transponder Architecture, 527 15.3.2 Example of a Real-Time Energy-Proportional Prototype, 529 15.4 Opportunities for Elastic Technologies in Core Networks, 530 15.4.1 More Cost-Efficient Networks, 531 15.4.2 More Energy Efficient Network, 532 15.4.3 Filtering Issues and Superchannel Solution, 532 15.5 Long Term Opportunities, 534 15.5.1 Burst Mode Elasticity, 534 15.5.2 Elastic Passive Optical Networks, 536 15.5.3 Metro and Datacenter Networks, 537 15.6 Conclusions, 539 Acknowledgments, 539 References, 539 16 Space-Division Multiplexing and MIMO Processing 547Roland Ryf and Nicolas K. Fontaine 16.1 Space-Division Multiplexing in Optical Fibers, 547 16.2 Optical Fibers for SDM Transmission, 548 16.3 Optical Transmission in SDM Fibers with Low Crosstalk, 551 16.3.1 Digital Signal Processing Techniques for SDM Fibers with Low Crosstalk, 552 16.4 MIMO-Based Optical Transmission in SDM Fibers, 553 16.5 Impulse Response in SDM Fibers with Mode Coupling, 558 16.5.1 Multimode Fibers with no Mode Coupling, 561 16.5.2 Multimode Fibers with Weak Coupling, 561 16.5.3 Multimode Fibers with Strong Mode Coupling, 565 16.5.4 Multimode Fibers: Scaling to Large Number of Modes, 566 16.6 MIMO-Based SDM Transmission Results, 566 16.6.1 Digital Signal Processing for MIMO Transmission, 567 16.7 Optical Components for SDM Transmission, 568 16.7.1 Characterization of SDM Systems and Components, 570 16.7.2 Swept Wavelength Interferometry for Fibers with Multiple Spatial Paths, 571 16.7.3 Spatial Multiplexers, 576 16.7.4 Photonic Lanterns, 578 16.7.5 Spatial Diversity for SDM Components and Component sharing, 582 16.7.6 Wavelength-Selective Switches for SDM, 583 16.7.7 SDM Fiber Amplifiers, 590 16.8 Conclusion, 593 Acknowledgments, 593 References, 594 Index 609

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive guide to understanding and interpreting digital images in medical and functional applications. This book focuses on image understanding and semantic interpretation, with clear introductions to related concepts and in-depth theoretical analysis. It is suitable for the reader interested in biomedical image understanding.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xix Acronyms xxiii PART I INTRODUCTION 1 1 Overview of Biomedical Image Understanding Methods 3Wei Xiong, Jierong Cheng, Ying Gu, Shimiao Li and Joo Hwee Lim 1.1 Segmentation and Object Detection 5 1.1.1 Methods Based on Image Processing Techniques 6 1.1.2 Methods Using Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning Algorithms 7 1.1.3 Model and Atlas-Based Segmentation 8 1.1.4 Multispectral Segmentation 9 1.1.5 User Interactions in Interactive Segmentation Methods 10 1.1.6 Frontiers of Biomedical Image Segmentation 11 1.2 Registration 11 1.2.1 Taxonomy of Registration Methods 12 1.2.2 Frontiers of Registration for Biomedical Image Understanding 15 1.3 Object Tracking 16 1.3.1 Object Representation 17 1.3.2 Feature Selection for Tracking 18 1.3.3 Object Tracking Technique 19 1.3.4 Frontiers of Object Tracking 19 1.4 Classification 20 1.4.1 Feature Extraction and Feature Selection 21 1.4.2 Classifiers 22 1.4.3 Unsupervised Classification 23 1.4.4 Classifier Combination 24 1.4.5 Frontiers of Pattern Classification for Biomedical Image Understanding 25 1.5 Knowledge-Based Systems 26 1.5.1 Semantic Interpretation and Knowledge-Based Systems 26 1.5.2 Knowledge-Based Vision Systems 27 1.5.3 Knowledge-Based Vision Systems in Biomedical Image Analysis 28 1.5.4 Frontiers of Knowledge-Based Systems 29 References 29 PARTII SEGMENTATION AND OBJECT DETECTION 47 2 Medical Image Segmentation and its Application in Cardiac MRI 49Dong Wei, Chao Li, and Ying Sun 2.1 Introduction 50 2.2 Background 51 2.2.1 Active Contour Models 51 2.2.2 Parametric and Nonparametric Contour Representation 52 2.2.3 Graph-Based Image Segmentation 53 2.2.4 Summary 54 2.3 Parametric Active Contours – The Snakes 54 2.3.1 The Internal Spline Energy Eint 54 2.3.2 The Image-Derived Energy Eimg 55 2.3.3 The External Control Energy Econ 55 2.3.4 Extension of Snakes and Summary of Parametric Active Contours 57 2.4 Geometric Active Contours – The Level Sets 58 2.4.1 Variational Level Set Methods 58 2.4.2 Region-Based Variational Level Set Methods 60 2.4.3 Summary of Level Set Methods 64 2.5 Graph-Based Methods – The Graph Cuts 65 2.5.1 Basic Graph Cuts Formulation 65 2.5.2 Patch-Based Graph Cuts 66 2.5.3 An Example of Graph Cuts 68 2.5.4 Summary of Graph Cut Methods 72 2.6 Case Study: Cardiac Image Segmentation Using A Dual Level Sets Model 73 2.6.1 Introduction 73 2.6.2 Method 74 2.6.3 Experimental Results 79 2.6.4 Conclusion of the Case Study 81 2.7 Conclusion and Near-Future Trends 81 References 83 3 Morphometric Measurements of the Retinal Vasculature in Fundus Images With Vampire 91Emanuele Trucco, Andrea Giachetti, Lucia Ballerini, Devanjali Relan, Alessandro Cavinato, and Tom Macgillivray 3.1 Introduction 92 3.2 Assessing Vessel Width 93 3.2.1 Previous Work 93 3.2.2 Our Method 94 3.2.3 Results 95 3.2.4 Discussion 96 3.3 Artery or Vein? 98 3.3.1 Previous Work 98 3.3.2 Our Solution 99 3.3.3 Results 101 3.3.4 Discussion 103 3.4 Are My Program’s Measurements Accurate? 104 3.4.1 Discussion 106 References 107 4 Analyzing Cell and Tissue Morphologies Using Pattern Recognition Algorithms 113Hwee Kuan Lee, Yan Nei Law, Chao-Hui Huang, and Choon Kong Yap 4.1 Introduction, 113 4.2 Texture Segmentation of Endometrial Images Using the Subspace Mumford–Shah Model 115 4.2.1 Subspace Mumford–Shah Segmentation Model 116 4.2.2 Feature Weights 118 4.2.3 Once-and-For-All Approach 119 4.2.4 Results 119 4.3 Spot Clustering for Detection of Mutants in Keratinocytes 120 4.3.1 Image Analysis Framework 123 4.3.2 Results 124 4.4 Cells and Nuclei Detection 124 4.4.1 Model 125 4.4.2 Neural Cells and Breast Cancer Cells Data 127 4.4.3 Performance Evaluation 127 4.4.4 Robustness Study 127 4.4.5 Results 128 4.5 Geometric Regional Graph Spectral Feature 134 4.5.1 Conversion of Image Patches into Region Signatures 134 4.5.2 Comparing Region Signatures 135 4.5.3 Classification of Region Signatures 136 4.5.4 Random Masking and Object Detection 136 4.5.5 Results 137 4.6 Mitotic Cells in the H&E Histopathological Images of Breast Cancer Carcinoma 138 4.6.1 Mitotic Index Estimation 139 4.6.2 Mitotic Candidate Selection 140 4.6.3 Exclusive Independent Component Analysis (XICA) 140 4.6.4 Classification Using Sparse Representation 143 4.6.5 Training and Testing Over Channels 144 4.6.6 Results 146 4.7 Conclusions 147 References 147 PARTIII REGISTRATION AND MATCHING 153 5 3D Nonrigid Image Registration by Parzen-Window-Based Normalized Mutual Information and its Application on Mr-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 155Rui Xu, Yen-Wei Chen, Shigehiro Morikawa, and Yoshimasa Kurumi 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Parzen-Window-Based Normalized Mutual Information 157 5.2.1 Definition of Parzen-Window Method 157 5.2.2 Parzen-Window-Based Estimation of Joint Histogram 158 5.2.3 Normalized Mutual Information and its Derivative 160 5.3 Analysis of Kernel Selection 163 5.3.1 The Designed Kernel 163 5.3.2 Comparison in Theory 167 5.3.3 Comparison by Experiments 170 5.4 Application on MR-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 174 5.4.1 Introduction of MR-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 174 5.4.2 Nonrigid Registration by Parzen-Window-Based Mutual Information 175 5.4.3 Evaluation on Phantom Data 177 5.4.4 Evaluation on Clinical Cases 180 5.5 Conclusion 185 Acknowledgements 186 References 187 6 2D/3D Image Registration For Endovascular Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm (AAA) Repair 189Shun Miao and Rui Liao 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 Background 190 6.2.1 Image Modalities 190 6.2.2 2D/3D Registration Framework 192 6.2.3 Feature-Based Registration 194 6.2.4 Intensity-Based Registration 196 6.2.5 Number of Imaging Planes 197 6.2.6 2D/3D Registration for Endovascular AAA Repair 198 6.3 Smart Utilization of Two X-Ray Images for Rigid-Body 2D/3D Registration 199 6.3.1 2D/3D Registration: Challenges in EVAR 199 6.3.2 3D Image Processing and DRR Generation 202 6.3.3 2D Image Processing 203 6.3.4 Similarity Measure 205 6.3.5 Optimization 207 6.3.6 Validation 210 6.4 Deformable 2D/3D Registration 211 6.4.1 Problem Formulation 212 6.4.2 Graph-Based Difference Measure 213 6.4.3 Length Preserving Term 215 6.4.4 Smoothness Term 215 6.4.5 Optimization 216 6.4.6 Validation 217 6.5 Visual Check of Patient Movement Using Pelvis Boundary Detection 220 6.6 Discussion and Conclusion 222 References 223 PARTIV OBJECT TRACKING 229 7 Motion Tracking in Medical Images 231Chuqing Cao, Chao Li, and Ying Sun 7.1 Introduction 232 7.1.1 Point-Based Tracking 233 7.1.2 Silhouette-Based Tracking 233 7.1.3 Kernel-Based Tracking 233 7.2 Background 234 7.2.1 Point-Based Tracking 234 7.2.2 Silhouette-Based Tracking 236 7.2.3 Kernel-Based Tracking 237 7.2.4 Summary 238 7.3 Bayesian Tracking Methods 238 7.3.1 Kalman Filters 239 7.3.2 Particle Filters 240 7.3.3 Summary of Bayesian Tracking Methods 241 7.4 Deformable Models 241 7.4.1 Mathematical Foundations of Deformable Models 241 7.4.2 Energy-Minimizing Deformable Models 242 7.4.3 Probabilistic Deformable Models 244 7.4.4 Summary of Deformable Models 245 7.5 Motion Tracking Based on the Harmonic Phase Algorithm 246 7.5.1 HARP Imaging 246 7.5.2 HARP Tracking 248 7.5.3 Summary 249 7.6 Case Study: Pseudo Ground Truth-Based Nonrigid Registration of MRI for Tracking the Cardiac Motion 250 7.6.1 Data Fidelity Term 251 7.6.2 Spatial Smoothness Constraint 252 7.6.3 Temporal Smoothness Constraint 253 7.6.4 Energy Minimization 254 7.6.5 Preliminary Results 255 7.6.6 Nonrigid Registration of Myocardial Perfusion MRI 255 7.6.7 Experimental Results 259 7.7 Discussion 264 7.8 Conclusion and Near-Future Trends 265 References 267 PARTV CLASSIFICATION 275 8 Blood Smear Analysis, Malaria Infection Detection, and Grading from Blood Cell Images 277Wei Xiong, Sim-Heng Ong, Joo-Hwee Lim, Jierong Cheng, and Ying Gu 8.1 Introduction 278 8.2 Pattern Classification Techniques 282 8.2.1 Supervised and Nonsupervised Learning 282 8.2.2 Bayesian Decision Theory 283 8.2.3 Clustering 284 8.2.4 Support Vector Machines 286 8.3 GWA Detection 287 8.3.1 Image Analysis 288 8.3.2 Association between the Object Area and the Number of Cells Per Object 289 8.3.3 Clump Splitting 291 8.3.4 Clump Characterization 293 8.3.5 Classification 295 8.4 Dual-Model-Guided Image Segmentation and Recognition 295 8.4.1 Related Work 296 8.4.2 Strategies and Object Functions 297 8.4.3 Endpoint Adjacency Map Construction and Edge Linking 299 8.4.4 Parsing Contours and Their Convex Hulls 300 8.4.5 A Recursive and Greedy Splitting Approach 301 8.4.6 Incremental Model Updating and Bayesian Decision 301 8.5 Infection Detection and Staging 302 8.5.1 Related Work 302 8.5.2 Methodology 303 8.6 Experimental Results 305 8.6.1 GWA Classification 305 8.6.2 RBC Segmentation 310 8.6.3 RBC Classification 315 8.7 Summary 320 References 321 9 Liver Tumor Segmentation Using SVM Framework and Pathology Characterization Using Content-Based Image Retrieval 325Jiayin Zhou, Yanling Chi, Weimin Huang, Wei Xiong, Wenyu Chen, Jimin Liu, and Sudhakar K. Venkatesh 9.1 Introduction 325 9.2 Liver Tumor Segmentation Under a Hybrid SVM Framework 327 9.2.1 Fundamentals of SVM for Classification 327 9.2.2 SVM Framework for Liver Tumor Segmentation and the Problems 330 9.2.3 A Three-Stage Hybrid SVM Scheme for Liver Tumor Segmentation 331 9.2.4 Experiment 334 9.2.5 Evaluation Metrics 335 9.2.6 Results 336 9.3 Liver Tumor Characterization by Content-Based Image Retrieval 338 9.3.1 Existing Work and the Rationale of Using CBIR 339 9.3.2 Methodology Overview and Preprocessing 340 9.3.3 Tumor Feature Representation 341 9.3.4 Similarity Query and Tumor Pathological Type Prediction 343 9.3.5 Experiment 345 9.3.6 Results 346 9.4 Discussion 351 9.4.1 About Liver Tumor Segmentation Using Machine Learning 351 9.4.2 About Liver Tumor Characterization Using CBIR 353 9.5 Conclusion 356 References 357 10 Benchmarking Lymph Node Metastasis Classification for Gastric Cancer Staging 361Su Zhang, Chao Li, Shuheng Zhang, Lifang Pang, and Huan Zhang 10.1 Introduction 362 10.1.1 Introduction of GSI-CT 363 10.1.2 Imaging Findings of Gastric Cancer 366 10.2 Related Feature Selection, Metric Learning, and Classification Methods 367 10.2.1 Feature Extraction 367 10.2.2 KNN 367 10.2.3 Feature Selection 369 10.2.4 AdaBoost and EAdaBoost Algorithms 374 10.3 Preprocessing Method for GSI-CT Data 377 10.3.1 Data Acquisition for GSI-CT Data 377 10.3.2 Univariate Analysis 378 10.4 Classification Results For GSI-CT Data of Gastric Cancer 379 10.4.1 Experimental Results of mRMR-KNN 379 10.4.2 Experimental Results of SFS-KNN 383 10.4.3 Experimental Results of Metric Learning 385 10.4.4 Experiments Results of AdaBoost and EAdaBoost 385 10.4.5 Experiment Analysis 388 10.5 Conclusion and Future Work 388 Acknowledgment 388 References 388 PARTVI KNOWLEDGE-BASED SYSTEMS 393 11 The Use of Knowledge in Biomedical Image Analysis 395Florence Cloppet 11.1 Introduction 395 11.2 Data, Information, and Knowledge? 397 11.2.1 Data Versus Information 397 11.2.2 Knowledge Versus Information 398 11.3 What Kind of Information/Knowledge Can be Introduced? 399 11.4 How to Introduce Information in Computer Vision Systems? 400 11.4.1 Nature of Prior Information/Knowledge 402 11.4.2 Frameworks Allowing Prior Information Introduction 408 11.5 Conclusion 418 References 418 12 Active Shape Model for Contour Detection of Anatomical Structure 429Huiqi Li and Qing Nie 12.1 Introduction 429 12.2 Background 430 12.2.1 Free-Form Deformable Models 430 12.2.2 Parametrically Deformable Models 432 12.3 Methodology 434 12.3.1 Point Distribution Model 434 12.3.2 Active Shape Model (ASM) 436 12.3.3 A Modified ASM 438 12.4 Applications 440 12.4.1 Boundary Detection of Optic Disk 440 12.4.2 Lens Structure Detection 450 12.5 Summary 456 Acknowledgment 457 References 457 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectromagnetic modeling is essential to the design and modeling of antenna, radar, satellite, medical imaging, and other applications. In Electromagnetic Modeling and Simulation, author Levent Sevgi explains techniques for solving real-time complex physical problems using MATLAB-based short scripts and comprehensive virtual tools.Table of ContentsPreface xvii About the Author xxvii Acknowledgments xxix 1 Introduction to MODSIM 1 1.1 Models and Modeling, 2 1.2 Validation, Verifi cation, and Calibration, 5 1.3 Available Core Models, 7 1.4 Model Selection Criteria, 9 1.5 Graduate Level EM MODSIM Course, 11 1.5.1 Course Description and Plan, 11 1.5.2 Available Virtual EM Tools, 12 1.6 EM-MODSIM Lecture Flow, 12 1.7 Two Level EM Guided Wave Lecture, 17 1.8 Conclusions, 19 References, 19 2 Engineers Speak with Numbers 23 2.1 Introduction, 23 2.2 Measurement, Calculation, and Error Analysis, 24 2.3 Significant Digits, Truncation, and Round-Off Errors, 27 2.4 Error Propagation, 28 2.5 Error and Confi dence Level, 29 2.5.1 Predicting the Population’s Confidence Interval, 33 2.6 Hypothesis Testing, 36 2.6.1 Testing Population Mean, 38 2.6.2 Testing Population Proportion, 39 2.6.3 Testing Two Population Averages, 39 2.6.4 Testing Two Population Proportions, 39 2.6.5 Testing Paired Data, 40 2.7 Hypothetical Tests on Cell Phones, 41 2.8 Conclusions, 45 References, 45 3 Numerical Analysis in Electromagnetics 47 3.1 Taylor’s Expansion and Numerical Differentiation, 47 3.1.1 Taylor’s Expansion and Ordinary Differential Equations, 50 3.1.2 Poisson and Laplace Equations, 52 3.1.3 An Iterative (Finite-Difference) Solution, 53 3.2 Numerical Integration, 58 3.2.1 Rectangular Method, 58 3.3 Nonlinear Equations and Root Search, 62 3.4 Linear Systems of Equations, 64 References, 69 4 Fourier Transform and Fourier Series 71 4.1 Introduction, 71 4.2 Fourier Transform, 72 4.2.1 Fourier Transform (FT), 72 4.2.2 Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), 74 4.2.3 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT), 76 4.2.4 Aliasing, Spectral Leakage, and Scalloping Loss, 77 4.2.5 Windowing and Window Functions, 80 4.3 Basic Discretization Requirements, 81 4.4 Fourier Series Representation, 85 4.5 Rectangular Pulse and Its Harmonics, 92 4.6 Conclusions, 92 References, 94 5 Stochastic Modeling in Electromagnetics 95 5.1 Introduction, 95 5.2 Radar Signal Environment, 98 5.2.1 Random Number Generation, 98 5.2.2 Noise Generation, 101 5.2.3 Signal Generation, 108 5.2.4 Clutter Generation, 108 5.3 Total Radar Signal, 111 5.4 Decision Making and Detection, 114 5.4.1 Hypothesis Operating Characteristics (HOCs), 115 5.4.2 A Communication/Radar Receiver, 119 5.5 Conclusions, 129 References, 130 6 Electromagnetic Theory: Basic Review 133 6.1 Maxwell Equations and Reduction, 133 6.2 Waveguiding Structures, 134 6.3 Radiation Problems and Vector Potentials, 136 6.4 The Delta Dirac Function, 138 6.5 Coordinate Systems and Basic Operators, 139 6.6 The Point Source Representation, 141 6.7 Field Representation of a Point/Line Source, 142 6.8 Alternative Field Representations, 143 6.9 Transverse Electric/Magnetic Fields, 145 6.9.1 The 3D TE/TM Waves, 145 6.9.2 The 2D TE/TM Waves, 146 6.10 The TE/TM Source Injection, 151 6.11 Second-Order EM Differential Equations, 154 6.12 EM Wave–Transmission Line Analogy, 155 6.13 Time Dependence in Maxwell Equations, 157 6.14 Physical Fundamentals, 158 References, 158 7 Sturm–Liouville Equation: The Bridge between Eigenvalue and Green’s Function Problems 161 7.1 Introduction, 161 7.2 Guided Wave Scenarios, 162 7.3 The Sturm–Liouville Equation, 165 7.3.1 The Eigenvalue Problem, 167 7.3.2 The Green’s Function (GF) Problem, 168 7.3.3 Finite z-Domain Problem, 169 7.3.4 Infi nite z-Domain Problem, 170 7.3.5 Relation between Eigenvalue and Green’s Function Problems, 171 7.4 Conclusions, 172 References, 173 8 The 2D Nonpenetrable Parallel Plate Waveguide 175 8.1 Introduction, 176 8.2 Propagation Inside a 2D-PEC Parallel Plate Waveguide, 177 8.2.1 Formulation of the TE- and TM-Type Problems, 178 8.2.2 The Green’s Function Problem, 181 8.2.3 Accessing the Spectral Domain: Separation of Variables, 182 8.2.4 Spectral Representations: Eigenvalue Problems, 183 8.2.5 Spectral Representations: 1D Characteristic Green’s Functions, 184 8.2.6 The 2D Green’s Function Problem: Alternative Representations, 185 8.3 Alternative Representation: Eigenray Solution, 187 8.3.1 Relation between Eigenmode and Eigenray Representations, 191 8.3.2 2D GF and Hybrid Ray-Mode Decomposition, 192 8.4 A 2D-PEC Parallel Plate Waveguide Simulator, 194 8.4.1 Representations Used for Mode, Ray, and Hybrid Solutions, 195 8.4.2 MATLAB Packages: RayMode and Hybrid, 207 8.4.3 Numerical Examples, 210 8.5 Eigenvalue Extraction from Propagation Characteristics, 215 8.5.1 Longitudinal Correlation Function, 215 8.5.2 Numerical Illustrations, 217 8.6 Tilted Beam Excitation, 221 8.7 Conclusions, 223 References, 225 9 Wedge Waveguide with Nonpenetrable Boundaries 227 9.1 Introduction, 228 9.2 Statement of the Problem: Physical Configuration and Ray-Asymptotic Guided Wave Schematizations, 229 9.3 Source-Free Solutions, 230 9.3.1 Separable Coordinates: Conventional NM, 230 9.3.2 Weakly Nonseparable Coordinates: AM, 231 9.3.3 Uniformizing the AM Near Caustics: IM, 232 9.4 Test Problem: The 2D Line-Source-Excited Nonpenetrable Wedge Waveguide, 234 9.4.1 Exact Solution in Cylindrical Coordinate, 234 9.4.2 Approximate Solutions in Rectangular Coordinates, 241 9.4.3 IM Spectral Representation, 244 9.5 The MATLAB Package “WedgeGUIDE,” 247 9.6 Numerical Tests and Illustrations, 249 9.7 Conclusions, 256 Appendix 9A: Formation of the Spectral IM Integral in Section 9.3.3, 257 References, 262 10 High Frequency Asymptotics: The 2D Wedge Diffraction Problem 265 10.1 Introduction, 266 10.2 Plane Wave Illumination and HFA Models, 268 10.2.1 Exact Solution by Series Summation, 268 10.2.2 The Physical Optics (PO) Solution, 270 10.2.3 The PTD Solution, 272 10.2.4 The UTD Solution, 273 10.2.5 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Solution, 275 10.3 HFA Models under Line Source (LS) Excitations, 275 10.3.1 Exact Solution by Series Summation, 276 10.3.2 Exact Solution by Integral, 277 10.3.3 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Solution, 277 10.4 Basic MATLAB Scripts, 278 10.5 The WedgeGUI Virtual Tool and Some Examples, 291 10.6 Conclusions, 297 References, 298 11 Antennas: Isotropic Radiators and Beam Forming/Beam Steering 301 11.1 Introduction, 301 11.2 Arrays of Isotropic Radiators, 303 11.3 The ARRAY Package, 306 11.4 Beam Forming/Steering Examples, 310 11.5 Conclusions, 317 References, 318 12 Simple Propagation Models and Ray Solutions 319 12.1 Introduction, 320 12.2 Ray-Tracing Approaches, 321 12.3 A Ray-Shooting MATLAB Package, 323 12.4 Characteristic Examples, 329 12.5 Flat-Earth Problem and 2Ray Model, 333 12.6 Knife-Edge Problem and 4Ray Model, 338 12.7 Ray Plus Diffraction Models, 348 12.8 Conclusions, 351 References, 351 13 Method of Moments 353 13.1 Introduction, 353 13.2 Approximating a Periodic Function by Other Functions: Fourier Series Representation, 354 13.3 Introduction to the MoM, 359 13.4 Simple Applications of MoM, 361 13.4.1 An Ordinary Differential Equation, 361 13.4.2 The Parallel Plate Capacitor, 364 13.4.3 Propagation over PEC Flat Earth, 366 13.5 MoM Applied to Radiation and Scattering Problems, 372 13.5.1 A Complex Antenna Structure, 372 13.5.2 Ground Wave Propagation Modeling, 373 13.5.3 EM Scattering from Infinitely Long Cylinder, 376 13.5.4 3D RCS Modeling, 381 13.6 MoM Applied to Wedge Diffraction Problem, 386 13.7 MoM Applied to Wedge Waveguide Problem, 397 13.8 Conclusions, 402 References, 402 14 Finite-Difference Time-Domain Method 407 14.1 FDTD Representation of EM Plane Waves, 407 14.1.1 Maxwell Equations and Plane Waves, 408 14.1.2 FDTD and Discretization, 410 14.1.3 A One-Dimensional FDTD MATLAB Script, 417 14.1.4 MATLAB-Based FDTD1D Package, 417 14.2 Transmission Lines and Time-Domain Reflectometer, 429 14.2.1 Transmission Line (TL) Theory, 430 14.2.2 Plane Wave–Transmission Line Analogy, 434 14.2.3 FDTD Representation of TL Equations, 437 14.2.4 MATLAB-Based TDRMeter Package, 447 14.2.5 Fourier Analysis and Reflection Characteristics, 454 14.2.6 Laplace Analysis and Fault Identification, 456 14.2.7 Step Response, 464 14.3 1D FDTD with Second-Order Differential Equations, 468 14.4 Two-Dimensional (2D) FDTD Modeling, 472 14.4.1 Field Components and FDTD Equations, 476 14.4.2 FDTD-Based Virtual Tool: MGL2D Package, 477 14.4.3 Characteristic Examples, 479 14.5 Canonical 2D Wedge Scattering Problem, 494 14.5.1 Problem Postulation, 494 14.5.2 Review of Analytical Models, 496 14.5.3 The FDTD Model, 499 14.5.4 Discretization and Dey–Mittra Approach, 502 14.5.5 The WedgeFDTD Package and Examples, 505 14.5.6 Wedge Diffraction and FDTD versus MoM, 510 14.6 Conclusions, 512 References, 512 15 Parabolic Equation Method 515 15.1 Introduction, 516 15.2 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Model, 518 15.3 The Split-Step Parabolic Equation (SSPE) Propagation Tool, 520 15.4 The Finite Element Method-Based PE Propagation Tool, 528 15.5 Atmospheric Refractivity Effects, 531 15.6 A 2D Surface Duct Scenario and Reference Solutions, 533 15.7 LINPE Algorithm and Canonical Tests/Comparisons, 538 15.8 The GrSSPE Package, 558 15.9 The Single-Knife-Edge Problem, 566 15.10 Accurate Source Modeling, 571 15.11 Dielectric Slab Waveguide, 580 15.11.1 Even and Odd Symmetric Solutions, 582 15.11.2 The SSPE Propagator and Eigenvalue Extraction, 584 15.11.3 The Matlab-Based DiSLAB Package, 585 15.12 Conclusions, 591 References, 591 16 Parallel Plate Waveguide Problem 595 16.1 Introduction, 595 16.2 Problem Postulation and Analytical Solutions: Revisited, 599 16.2.1 Green’s Function in Terms of Mode Summation, 602 16.2.2 Mode Summation for a Tilted/Directive Antenna, 604 16.2.3 Eigenray Representation, 606 16.2.4 Hybrid Ray + Image Method, 613 16.3 Numerical Models, 613 16.3.1 Split Step Parabolic Equation Model, 613 16.3.2 Finite-Difference Time-Domain Model, 617 16.3.3 Method of Moments (MoM), 622 16.4 Conclusions, 638 References, 639 Appendix A Introduction to MATLAB 643 Appendix B Suggested References 653 Appendix C Suggested Tutorials and Feature Articles 655 Index 659

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe acute energy problems facing China today are characterized by their own histories and realities. Some have come about because of China's energy endowment and stage of development, while others have been created by a combination of domestic and global factors.Trade ReviewPraise for Electric Power and Energy in China: “The Broad Energy Outlook approach tries to place the complex Chinese energy problem in a multi-angled and global prospective so that China will stop struggling within its narrowly defined and inward-looking supply-demand rigidity on energy. Overall, I find Electric Power and Energy in China an excellent book with significant academic value. It provides an essential reference for academics, policy makers and students who have a strong interest in China’s economy and energy development. The data included in this book and Liu’s personal experiences and expertise as chairman of China’s, and indeed the world’s, largest electricity distribution company are highly informative and valuable for both insiders and outsiders of the Chinese energy and electricity industries.” – Shujie Yao, Head of School of Contemporary Chinese Studies, Professor of Economics and Chinese Sustainable Development, University of Nottingham “Zhenya Liu’s Electric Power and Energy in China points out that the main challenges in China today are in meeting the growing energy demand of a large population in a fast growing, emerging economy. The current main source of energy supply in the country is coal, however, all technologies are needed to secure an adequate supply of energy. Accordingly, Liu does not focus on one technology; he provides an overview of Chinese perspectives on all available options. Electric Power and Energy in China gives an interesting insight into the Chinese energy challenge and the energy system – not from an outsider’s perspective but from the core. As head of China’s Energy Commission, Zhenya Liu knows what he is writing about. The book is valuable not only from an energy economics perspective but also because it gives a comprehensive overview of the Chinese energy system and its economic policies.” – Dr. Hubertus Bardt, Cologne Institute for Economic ResearchTable of ContentsAbout the Author xi Preface xiii 1 Energy: An Overview 1 1.1 An Overview of the World’s Energy Situation 1 1.1.1 The Global Energy Situation 1 1.1.2 Characteristics of the Global Energy Situation 8 1.2 An Overview of China’s Energy Situation 17 1.2.1 Energy Endowment 17 1.2.2 Energy Production 19 1.2.3 Energy Consumption 23 1.2.4 International Energy Cooperation 26 1.3 Major Energy Problems that China Faces 28 1.3.1 The Problem of Sustained Supply 28 1.3.2 The Problem of Transport and Allocation 35 1.3.3 The Quality Problem of Development 37 1.4 Causes that Affect China’s Energy Development 41 1.4.1 The Economic Development Model 41 1.4.2 The Energy Development Model 42 1.4.3 The Global Competitive Environment 43 2 Strategic Thinking on Energy 45 2.1 Basic Thinking Behind the Energy Solution 45 2.1.1 Complexity of the Energy Problem 45 2.1.2 Grand Energy Vision 47 2.1.3 Solutions to the Energy Problems 47 2.2 The Way to Change the Mode of Energy Development 51 2.2.1 Transformation Phase of China’s Energy Strategy 52 2.2.2 The Way to Change the Mode of Energy Development 55 2.3 The Central Link in the Energy Strategy 58 2.3.1 The Position of Electricity in the Energy Strategy 59 2.3.2 The Significance of an Electricity-centred Energy Strategy 60 2.4 The ‘One Ultra Four Large’ (1U4L) Strategy 65 2.4.1 The Core Mission of Electric Power Development 66 2.4.2 The Need to Implement the 1U4L Strategy 66 2.4.3 The Key to Implementing the 1U4L Strategy 69 3 Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1 General Thinking Behind Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1.1 Main Problems in Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1.2 Principles of Energy Exploration and Utilisation 76 3.1.3 Focus of Energy Exploration and Utilisation 77 3.2 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Coal Resources 79 3.2.1 Coordinated Planning of the Exploitation and Utilisation of Coal Resources 79 3.2.2 Construction of Large Coal-fired Power Bases in the West and North 81 3.2.3 The Clean and Integrated Utilisation of Coal 89 3.2.4 Scientifically Developing the Coal Chemical Industry 93 3.3 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Hydropower Resources 94 3.3.1 Construction of Large-scale Hydropower Bases 94 3.3.2 Development of Small Hydropower 99 3.3.3 Planning and Construction of Pumped Storage Power Plants 100 3.3.4 Environmental Protection and Migrant Relocation 102 3.4 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Nuclear Power 104 3.4.1 Construction of Large-scale Nuclear Power Base 104 3.4.2 Advancement of Nuclear Power Technology 105 3.4.3 Building up a Nuclear Energy Safety System 106 3.4.4 Supply of Nuclear Fuel 107 3.5 The Exploitation and Utilisation of New and Renewable Energies 108 3.5.1 Building Large-scale Renewable Energy Power Bases 109 3.5.2 Various Forms of Renewable Energy Development 117 3.5.3 Distributed Energy Development 119 3.5.4 Exploitation and Utilisation of New Energy 122 3.6 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Oil and Gas 125 3.6.1 Exploration and Development of Oil Resources 126 3.6.2 Exploitation and Utilisation of Natural Gas Resources 128 3.7 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Overseas Energy Resources 131 3.7.1 Development and Import of Overseas Oil and Gas Resources 131 3.7.2 Import of Overseas Coal and Electricity 135 4 Energy Transport and Allocation 137 4.1 Modern Comprehensive Energy Transport System 137 4.1.1 The Significance of Establishing a Modern Comprehensive Energy Transport System 139 4.1.2 The Guiding Principles for Developing a Modern Comprehensive Transport System for Energy 141 4.2 Optimisation of the Modes of Coal Transport 143 4.2.1 The Present Situation of Coal Transport 144 4.2.2 The Future Coal Transport Patterns 150 4.2.3 Equal Emphasis on Coal Transport and Power Transmission 151 4.3 Strong and Smart Grid Development 159 4.3.1 Overview of Power Grid Development 159 4.3.2 The Future Landscape of Power Flows 164 4.3.3 The Thinking Behind SSG Development 167 4.3.4 Development of UHV Grids and Grids of All Levels 170 4.3.5 R&D and Application of Grid Technology 183 4.4 Construction of UHV Synchronous Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 186 4.4.1 Development of Large Synchronous Grids in Overseas Countries 187 4.4.2 The Necessity of Building UHV Synchronous Power Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 189 4.4.3 Safety of UHV Synchronous Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 190 4.5 Smart Grid Development 192 4.5.1 The Essence and Features of Smart Grids 193 4.5.2 Strategic Significance of Smart Grids 193 4.5.3 The Priorities and Practices of Smart Grid Development 195 4.5.4 The Development Principles of Smart Grids 204 4.6 Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 206 4.6.1 Present Situation of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 206 4.6.2 The Main Problems of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 208 4.6.3 The Basic Thinking Behind the Development of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 210 5 Terminal Energy Consumption 213 5.1 Model of Green Energy Consumption 213 5.1.1 Challenges for Energy Consumption 213 5.1.2 Establishment of a Green Energy Consumption Model 215 5.2 Energy Conservation as a Strategic Priority 217 5.2.1 Thinking behind Energy Conservation as a Strategic Priority 218 5.2.2 Focus Areas of Energy Conservation as Strategic Priority 219 5.2.3 Implementing Measures to Ensure Strategic Priority of Energy Efficiency 225 5.3 Electrification in Socioeconomic Development 228 5.3.1 Substitution of Electric Energy in Terminal Energy Consumption 228 5.3.2 Electrification in the Industrial Sector 231 5.3.3 Electrification in the Transport Sector 232 5.3.4 Electrification for Businesses and Urban Population 233 5.3.5 Rural Electrification 235 5.4 Development of Electric Vehicles 236 5.4.1 Important Implications of Electric Vehicle Development 237 5.4.2 Key Areas of Electric Vehicle Development 238 5.4.3 EV Energy Supply Model 241 5.4.4 Policies Supporting the Development of Electric Vehicles 244 6 Energy Market 247 6.1 Overview and Development Ideas in Respect of the Energy Market 247 6.1.1 Overview of Energy Market Development 248 6.1.2 Basic Thinking Behind Energy Marketisation 250 6.2 The Building of Coal Market 251 6.2.1 Management of Coal Market Order 251 6.2.2 Coal Market Trading 254 6.2.3 Regulation of the Coal Market 255 6.3 Establishment of an Electricity Market 257 6.3.1 Reform of International Electricity Market 258 6.3.2 The Principles for China’s Electricity Market Reform 261 6.3.3 Ideas on Building an Electricity Market System in China 263 6.3.4 The Tariff System and Building of Tariff Pricing Mechanism 267 6.4 Development of Pricing Mechanism for Oil and Gas 274 6.4.1 Reform of Pricing Mechanism for Refined Products 274 6.4.2 Natural Gas Pricing Reform 276 6.4.3 The Bargaining Power in International Oil and Gas Pricing 280 6.5 Regulation of Energy Markets 282 6.5.1 Building a Big Energy Regulatory Framework 282 6.5.2 The Thinking Behind Energy Market Regulation 285 6.5.3 Building Support System for Energy Market 287 7 Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 289 7.1 Importance of Building Capacity for Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 289 7.1.1 Risks Posed to Energy Security 289 7.1.2 Significance of Strengthening the Building of Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 293 7.2 Energy Early Warning Mechanism 294 7.2.1 Focus of Energy Early Warning 295 7.2.2 Organisational Structure and Management System of Energy Early Warning 300 7.3 Energy Emergency Response System 302 7.3.1 Organisational and Management Structure of Energy Emergency Response 302 7.3.2 Emergency Response Programmes for Energy Emergencies 302 7.3.3 Supplies Reserves for Energy Emergency Response 303 7.3.4 Energy Emergency Response Publicity Campaign and Emergency Drills 305 7.3.5 Scientific Management of Energy Emergency Response 307 7.4 Energy Reserves 310 7.4.1 Present Situation of Energy Reserves in China 310 7.4.2 Experience in International Energy Reserves 312 7.4.3 The Thinking Behind Building Energy Reserves in China 314 8 Innovation in Energy Technology 321 8.1 The Situation of Energy Technology Innovation 321 8.1.1 Technology Innovations in International Energy Sector 321 8.1.2 The Situation of Energy Technology Innovation in China 324 8.2 Principles and Focuses of Energy Technology Innovation 327 8.2.1 The Fundamental Principle of Energy Technology Innovation 328 8.2.2 Focus Areas of Energy Technology Innovation 329 8.2.3 The Goal of Energy Technology Innovation 333 8.3 Development of System for Energy Technology Innovation 334 8.3.1 Integration of Resources of Energy Technology Innovation 334 8.3.2 Development of Mechanism for Energy Technology Innovation 335 8.3.3 Building Talent Team in Energy Technology Innovation 337 8.3.4 Innovation Strategy for Energy Technology 338 9 Ensuring Energy Sustainability 341 9.1 Energy Laws, Regulations and Policies 341 9.1.1 Establishment of a Legal Regime for Energy 341 9.1.2 Policy Guidance and Assurance 345 9.2 Establishment of an Energy Standards System 350 9.2.1 The Significance of Establishing an Energy Standards System 350 9.2.2 Formulation of Energy Standards 352 9.2.3 Bargaining Power over Development of International Energy Standards 354 9.3 Large Energy Groups 355 9.3.1 Significance of Developing Large Energy Groups 356 9.3.2 Supporting the Development of Large Energy Groups 361 9.3.3 Market Position of Large Energy Groups 366 9.3.4 Social Responsibilities of Large Energy Groups 368 References 371 Postscript 375 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisMicrogrids are the most innovative area in the electric power industry today. Future microgrids could exist as energy-balanced cells within existing power distribution grids or stand-alone power networks within small communities.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix 1 The Microgrids Concept 1Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Microgrid Concept as a Means to Integrate Distributed Generation 3 1.3 Clarification of the Microgrid Concept 4 1.4 Operation and Control of Microgrids 8 1.5 Market Models for Microgrids 12 1.6 Status Quo and Outlook of Microgrid Applications 22 2 Microgrids Control Issues 25Aris Dimeas, Antonis Tsikalakis, George Kariniotakis and George Korres 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Control Functions 25 2.3 The Role of Information and Communication Technology 27 2.4 Microgrid Control Architecture 28 2.5 Centralized and Decentralized Control 32 2.6 Forecasting 35 2.7 Centralized Control 40 2.8 Decentralized Control 51 2.9 State Estimation 72 2.10 Conclusions 76 3 Intelligent Local Controllers 81Thomas Degner, Nikos Soultani, Alfred Engler and Asier Gil de Muro 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Inverter Control Issues in the Formation of Microgrids 82 3.4 Implications of Line Parameters on Frequency and Voltage Droop Concepts 92 3.5 Development and Evaluation of Innovative Local Controls to Improve Stability 98 3.6 Conclusions 115 4 Microgrid Protection 117Alexander Oudalov, Thomas Degner, Frank van Overbeeke and Jose Miguel Yarza 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Challenges for Microgrid Protection 118 4.3 Adaptive Protection for Microgrids 125 4.4 Fault Current Source for Effective Protection in Islanded Operation 146 4.5 Fault Current Limitation in Microgrids 151 4.6 Conclusions 154 5 Operation of Multi-Microgrids 165Joao Abel PeScas Lopes, Andre Madureira, Nuno Gil and Fernanda Resende 5.1 Introduction 165 5.2 Multi-Microgrid Control and Management Architecture 167 5.3 Coordinated Voltage/var Support 169 5.4 Coordinated Frequency Control 178 5.5 Emergency Functions (Black Start) 186 5.6 Dynamic Equivalents 192 5.7 Conclusions 202 6 Pilot Sites: Success Stories and Learnt Lessons 206George Kariniotakis, Aris Dimeas and Frank Van Overbeeke (Sections 6.1, 6.2) 6.1 Introduction 206 6.2 Overview of Microgrid Projects in Europe 206 6.3 Overview of Microgrid Projects in the USA 231John Romankiewicz, Chris Marnay (Section 6.3) 6.4 Overview of Japanese Microgrid Projects 249Satoshi Morozumi (Section 6.4) 6.5 Overview of Microgrid Projects in China 262Meiqin Mao (Section 6.5) 6.6 An Off-Grid Microgrid in Chile 270Rodrigo Palma Behnke and Guillermo Jimenez-Estevez (Section 6.6) 7 Quantification of Technical, Economic, Environmental and Social Benefits of Microgrid Operation 275Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 7.1 Introduction and Overview of Potential Microgrid Benefits 275 7.2 Setup of Benefit Quantification Study 278 7.3 Quantification of Microgrids Benefits under Standard Test Conditions 285 7.4 Impact of External Market Prices and Pricing Policies 296 7.5 Impact of Microgrid Operation Strategy 303 7.6 Extension to European Scale 307 7.7 Conclusions 310 References 313 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs broadcasting gives way to the digital media age, the study of audiences faces unprecedented challenges. Digital media have dramatically increased the nature and the diversity in how people can position themselves in relation to media content, and the study of audiences is shifting and changing accordingly.Trade Review“This book offers helpful background readings for media research courses. Summing up: recommended.”-ChoiceTable of ContentsNotes on Contributors viii Series Editor's Preface xiv Acknowledgments xv Introduction 1 Virginia Nightingale Part I Being Audiences 17 1 Readers as Audiences 19 Wendy Griswold, Elizabeth Lenaghan, and Michelle Naffziger 2 Listening for Listeners: The Work of Arranging How Listening Will Occur in Cultures of Recorded Sound 41 Jackie Cook 3 Viewing 62 Shawn Shimpach 4 Search and Social Media 86 Virginia Nightingale 5 Spreadable Media: How Audiences Create Value and Meaning in a Networked Economy 109 Joshua Green and Henry Jenkins 6 Going Mobile 128 Gerard Goggin Part II Theorizing Audiences 147 7 Audiences and Publics, Media and Public Spheres 149 Richard Butsch 8 The Implied Audience of Communications Policy Making: Regulating Media in the Interests of Citizens and Consumers 169 Sonia Livingstone and Peter Lunt 9 New Configurations of the Audience? The Challenges of User-Generated Content for Audience Theory and Media Participation 190 Nico Carpentier 10 The Necessary Future of the Audience … and How to Research It 213 Nick Couldry 11 Reception 230 Cornel Sandvoss 12 Affect Theory and Audience 251 Anna Gibbs Part III Researching Audiences 267 13 Toward a Branded Audience: On the Dialectic between Marketing and Consumer Agency 269 Adam Arvidsson 14 Ratings and Audience Measurement 286 Philip M. Napoli 15 Quantitative Audience Research: Embracing the Poor Relation 302 David Deacon and Emily Keightley 16 Media Effects in Context 320 Brian O’Neill 17 Cultivation Analysis and Media Violence 340 Andy Ruddock 18 Creative and Visual Methods in Audience Research 360 Fatimah Awan and David Gauntlett 19 Locating Media Ethnography 380 Patrick D. Murphy Part IV Doing Audience Research 403 20 Children’s Media Cultures in Comparative Perspective 405 Sonia Livingstone and Kirsten Drotner 21 Fan Cultures and Fan Communities 425 Kristina Busse and Jonathan Gray 22 Beyond the Presumption of Identity? Ethnicities, Cultures, and Transnational Audiences 444 Mirca Madianou 23 Participatory Vision: Watching Movies with Yolngu 459 Jennifer Deger 24 The Audience Is the Show 472 Annette Hill 25 Seeking the Audience for News: Response, News Talk, and Everyday Practices 489 S. Elizabeth Bird 26 Sport and Its Audiences 509 David Rowe Index 527

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn original look from a microeconomic perspective for power system optimization and its application to electricity markets Presents a new and systematic viewpoint for power system optimization inspired by microeconomics and game theory A timely and important advanced reference with the fast growth of smart grids Professor Chen is a pioneer of applying experimental economics to the electricity market trading mechanism, and this work brings together the latest research A companion website is available Edit Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxv List of Figures xxvii List of Tables xxxi Acronyms xxxv Symbols xxxix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Power System Optimal Planning 2 1.1.1 Generation Expansion Planning 3 1.1.2 Transmission Expansion Planning 5 1.1.3 Distribution System Planning 7 1.2 Power System Optimal Operation 8 1.2.1 Unit Commitment and Hydrothermal Scheduling 8 1.2.2 Economic Dispatch 12 1.2.3 Optimal Load Flow 14 1.3 Power System Reactive Power Optimization 16 1.4 Optimization in Electricity Markets 18 1.4.1 Strategic Participants’ Bids 18 1.4.2 Market Clearing Model 20 1.4.3 Market Equilibrium Problem 21 2 Theories and Approaches of Large-Scale Complex Systems Optimization 22 2.1 Basic Theories of Large-scale Complex Systems 23 2.1.1 Hierarchical Structures of Large-scale Complex Systems 24 2.1.2 Basic Principles of Coordination 27 2.1.3 Decomposition and Coordination of Large-scale Systems 28 2.2 Hierarchical Optimization Approaches 30 2.3 Lagrangian Relaxation Method 36 2.4 Cooperative Coevolutionary Approach for Large-scale Complex System Optimization 40 2.4.1 Framework of Cooperative Coevolution 41 2.4.2 Cooperative Coevolutionary Genetic Algorithms and the Numerical Experiments 43 2.4.3 Basic Theories of CCA 45 2.4.4 CCA’s Potential Applications in Power Systems 46 3 Optimization Approaches in Microeconomics and Game Theory 49 3.1 General Equilibrium Theory 51 3.1.1 Basic Model of a Competitive Economy 52 3.1.2 Walrasian Equilibrium 53 3.1.3 First and Second Fundamental Theorems of Welfare Economics 54 3.2 Noncooperative Game Theory 55 3.2.1 Representation of Games 55 3.2.2 Existence of Equilibrium 60 3.3 Mechanism Design 61 3.3.1 Principles of Mechanism Design 61 3.3.2 Optimization of a Single Commodity Auction 63 3.4 Duality Principle and Its Economic Implications 66 3.4.1 Economic Implication of Linear Programming Duality 66 3.4.2 Economic Implication of Duality in Nonlinear Programming 68 3.4.3 Economic Implication of Lagrangian Relaxation Method 71 4 Power System Planning 76 4.1 Generation Planning Based on Lagrangian Relaxation Method 76 4.1.1 Problem Formulation 78 4.1.2 Lagrangian Relaxation for Generation Investment Decision 80 4.1.3 Probabilistic Production Simulation 85 4.1.4 Example 87 4.1.5 Summary 91 4.2 Transmission Planning Based on Improved Genetic Algorithm 91 4.2.1 Mathematical Model 93 4.2.2 Improvements of Genetic Algorithm 95 4.2.3 Example 96 4.2.4 Summary 101 4.3 Transmission Planning Based on Ordinal Optimization 103 4.3.1 Introduction 103 4.3.2 Transmission Expansion Planning Problem 104 4.3.3 Ordinal Optimization 107 4.3.4 Crude Model for Transmission Planning Problem 111 4.3.5 Example 112 4.3.6 Summary 120 4.4 Integrated Planning of Distribution Systems Based on Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 121 4.4.1 Mathematical Model of Integrated Planning Based on DG and DSR 122 4.4.2 Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 124 4.4.3 Example 125 4.4.4 Summary 129 5 Power System Operation 131 5.1 Unit Commitment Based on Cooperative Coevolutionary Algorithm 131 5.1.1 Problem Formulation 132 5.1.2 Cooperative Coevolutionary Algorithm 133 5.1.3 Form Primal Feasible Solution Based on the Dual Results 138 5.1.4 Dynamic Economic Dispatch 140 5.1.5 Example 146 5.1.6 Summary 148 5.2 Security-Constrained Unit Commitment with Wind Power Integration Based on Mixed Integer Programming 149 5.2.1 Suitable SCUC Model for MIP 151 5.2.2 Selection of St and the Significance of Extreme Scenarios 154 5.2.3 Example 156 5.2.4 Summary 160 5.3 Optimal Power Flow with Discrete Variables Based on Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 160 5.3.1 Formulation of OPF Problem 162 5.3.2 Modern Interior Point Algorithm (MIP) 163 5.3.3 Genetic Algorithm with Annealing Selection (AGA) 167 5.3.4 Flow of Presented Algorithm 169 5.3.5 Example 169 5.3.6 Summary 172 5.4 Optimal Power Flow with Discrete Variables Based on Interior Point Cutting Plane Method 173 5.4.1 IPCPM and Its Analysis 175 5.4.2 Improvement of IPCPM 180 5.4.3 Example 185 5.4.4 Summary 187 6 Power System Reactive Power Optimization 189 6.1 Space Decoupling for Reactive Power Optimization 189 6.1.1 Multi-agent System-based Volt/VAR Control 190 6.1.2 Coordination Optimization Method 193 6.2 Time Decoupling for Reactive Power Optimization 198 6.2.1 Cost Model of Adjusting the Control Devices of Volt/VAR Control 202 6.2.2 Time-Decoupling Model for Reactive Power Optimization Based upon Cost of Adjusting the Control Devices 207 6.3 Game Theory Model of Multi-agent Volt/VAR Control 215 6.3.1 Game Mechanism of Volt/VAR Control During Multi-level Power Dispatch 217 6.3.2 Payoff Function Modeling of Multi-agent Volt/VAR Control 224 6.4 Volt/VAR Control in Distribution Systems Using an Approach Based on Time Interval 231 6.4.1 Problem Formulation 233 6.4.2 Load Level Division 234 6.4.3 Optimal Dispatch of OLTC and Capacitors Using Genetic Algorithm 236 6.4.4 Example 238 6.4.5 Summary 244 7 Modeling and Analysis of Electricity Markets 247 7.1 Oligopolistic Electricity Market Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 247 7.1.1 Market Model Formulation 249 7.1.2 Electricity Market Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 252 7.1.3 Example 258 7.1.4 Summary 265 7.2 Supply Function Equilibrium Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 265 7.2.1 Market Model Formulation 267 7.2.2 Coevolutionary Approach to Analyzing SFE Model 271 7.2.3 Example 273 7.2.4 Summary 283 7.3 Searching for Electricity Market Equilibrium with Complex Constraints Using Coevolutionary Approach 284 7.3.1 Market Model Formulation 286 7.3.2 Coevolutionary Computation 290 7.3.3 Example 292 7.3.4 Summary 301 7.4 Analyzing Two-Settlement Electricity Market Equilibrium by Coevolutionary Computation Approach 301 7.4.1 Market Model Formulation 303 7.4.2 Coevolutionary Approach to Analyzing Market Model 307 7.4.3 Example 309 7.4.4 Summary 318 8 Future Developments 319 8.1 New Factors in Power System Optimization 320 8.1.1 Planning and Investment Decision Under New Paradigm 320 8.1.2 Scheduling/Dispatch of Renewable Energy Sources 321 8.1.3 Energy Storage Problems 322 8.1.4 Environmental Impact 323 8.1.5 Novel Electricity Market 323 8.2 Challenges and Possible Solutions in Power System Optimization 324 Appendix 328 A.1 Header File 328 A.2 Species Class 329 A.3 Ecosystem Class 335 A.4 Main Function 336 References 338 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisA generic DC grid model that is compatible with the standard AC system stability model is presented and used to analyse the interaction between the DC grid and the host AC systems. A multi-terminal DC (MTDC) grid interconnecting multiple AC systems and offshore energy sources (e.g. wind farms) across the nations and continents would allow effective sharing of intermittent renewable resources and open market operation for secure and cost-effective supply of electricity. However, such DC grids are unprecedented with no operational experience. Despite lots of discussions and specific visions for setting up such MTDC grids particularly in Europe, none has yet been realized in practice due to two major technical barriers: Lack of proper understanding about the interaction between a MTDC grid and the surrounding AC systems. Commercial unavailability of efficient DC side fault current interruption technology for conventional voltage sourced converTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acronyms xix Symbols xxi 1 Fundamentals 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Rationale Behind MTDC Grids 5 1.3 Network Architectures of MTDC Grids 6 1.3.1 Series Architecture 6 1.3.2 Parallel Architecture 7 1.4 Enabling Technologies and Components of MTDC Grids 9 1.4.1 LCC Technology 9 1.4.1.1 Control Modes in LCC-based MTDC Grid 10 1.4.1.2 Examples of Existing LCC MTDC Systems 10 1.4.2 VSC Technology 12 1.5 Control Modes in MTDC Grid 14 1.6 Challenges for MTDC Grids 15 1.7 Configurations of MTDC Converter Stations 16 1.8 Research Initiatives on MTDC Grids 19 1.9 Focus and Scope of the Monograph 21 2 The Voltage-Sourced Converter (VSC) 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Ideal Voltage-Sourced Converter 24 2.3 Practical Voltage-Sourced Converter 28 2.3.1 Two-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 28 2.3.2 Three-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 31 2.3.3 Multi-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 35 2.4 Control 38 2.4.1 Control of Real and Reactive Powers 38 2.4.2 Design and Implementation of Control 39 2.4.2.1 Space Phasors 39 2.4.2.2 Space-Phasor Representation of the AC Side 42 2.4.2.3 Current Control in the Stationary Frame 43 2.4.2.4 Current Control in a Rotating Frame 44 2.4.2.5 Phase-Locked Loop 52 2.4.3 Control of the DC-Side Voltage 56 2.4.4 Control of the AC Grid Voltage 58 2.4.5 Multi-unit Control of DC Grid Voltage and/or AC Grid Voltage 59 2.4.6 Control of Islands 61 2.5 Simulation 65 2.6 Symbols of the VSC 75 3 Modeling, Analysis, and Simulation of AC–MTDC Grids 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 MTDC Grid Model 78 3.2.1 Modeling Assumptions 78 3.2.2 Converter Model 81 3.2.3 Converter Controller Model 83 3.2.3.1 Outer Control Loops 83 3.2.3.2 Inner Current Control Loop 87 3.2.4 DC Network Model 87 3.2.4.1 Algebraic Equations 89 3.2.4.2 Differential Equations 91 3.2.5 State-Space Representation 91 3.2.5.1 Dynamic Equations of Converters and Controllers 92 3.2.5.2 Output Equations 93 3.2.5.3 Control Modes 93 3.2.5.4 Dynamic Equations of DC Network 95 3.2.5.5 Output Equations of DC Network 96 3.2.6 Phasor from Space Phasor 96 3.2.6.1 Base Values and Per-unit Systems 97 3.2.6.2 Phase Angle of Space Phasors 97 3.3 AC Grid Model 98 3.3.1 Generator Model 99 3.3.1.1 State-Space Representation of Synchronous Generator (SG) Model 99 3.3.1.2 Inclusion of Generator in the Network 101 3.3.1.3 Treatment of Sub-transient Saliency 102 3.3.1.4 State-Space Model of Excitation Systems for SGs 104 3.3.1.5 State-Space Model of Turbine and Governor 104 3.3.2 Load Model 105 3.3.3 AC Network Model 106 3.4 AC–MTDC Load flow Analysis 108 3.4.1 AC Grid Load flow Model 109 3.4.2 MTDC Grid Load flow Model 110 3.4.2.1 MTDC Interface with AC System 110 3.4.2.2 MTDC AC Side Load flow Model 110 3.4.2.3 Interface of MTDC AC and DC Sides 111 3.4.2.4 MTDC DC Side Load flow Model 112 3.4.2.5 MTDC Converter Control Modes 112 3.4.3 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 114 3.5 AC–MTDC Grid Model for Nonlinear Dynamic Simulation 120 3.5.1 Initialization of Dynamic Models 121 3.5.1.1 MTDC Grid 122 3.5.1.2 AC Grid 122 3.6 Small-signal Stability Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 122 3.6.1 Linear Model of Converters and Controllers 123 3.6.2 Linear Model of DC Network 128 3.6.3 Eigenvalue, Eigenvector, and Participation Factor 130 3.7 Transient Stability Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 130 3.7.1 Large Disturbance Simulation 131 3.7.2 Representation of Rotor and Phase Angles 132 3.8 Case Studies 132 3.9 Case Study 1: The North Sea Benchmark System 133 3.9.1 Study Network 133 3.9.2 Nonlinear Simulation 134 3.9.2.1 Small Disturbances 134 3.9.2.2 Converter Outage 135 3.9.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 137 3.9.3.1 Eigenvalue Analysis 137 3.9.3.2 Participation Factor Analysis 138 3.10 Case Study 2: MTDC Grid Connected to Equivalent AC Systems 139 3.10.1 Study Network 139 3.10.2 Nonlinear Simulation 140 3.10.2.1 Small Disturbances 142 3.10.2.2 Large Disturbances 142 3.10.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 142 3.11 Case Study 3: MTDC Grid Connected to Multi-machine AC System 143 3.11.1 Study Network 143 3.11.2 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 145 3.11.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 146 3.11.4 Nonlinear Simulation 147 3.11.4.1 AC Side Fault 147 3.11.4.2 DC Cable Fault 148 3.11.4.3 Converter Outage 150 4 Autonomous Power Sharing 153 4.1 Introduction 153 4.2 Steady-state Operating Characteristics 156 4.3 Concept of Power Sharing 157 4.3.1 Power Sharing Among Synchronous Generators 157 4.3.2 Power Sharing in AC Microgrids 158 4.4 Power Sharing in MTDC Grid 159 4.4.1 Voltage Margin Control 159 4.4.2 Droop Control 162 4.4.2.1 Ratio and Priority Control 166 4.4.3 Adaptive Droop Control 167 4.5 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 168 4.6 Post-contingency Operation 169 4.6.1 Local DC Link Voltage Feedback 170 4.6.2 Common DC Link Voltage Feedback 171 4.6.3 Adaptive Droop Control 172 4.7 Linear Model 173 4.8 Case Study 174 4.8.1 Study Network 174 4.8.2 Small-signal Stability Analysis 175 4.8.3 Nonlinear Simulation 177 4.8.3.1 Validation Against Switched Model 177 4.8.3.2 Problems with Local Voltage Feedback 178 4.8.3.3 Fixed vs Adaptive Droop 179 5 Frequency Support 187 5.1 Introduction 187 5.2 Fundamentals of Frequency Control 189 5.3 Inertial and Primary Frequency Support from Wind Farms 190 5.4 Wind Farms in Secondary Frequency Control (AGC) 191 5.5 Modified Droop Control for Frequency Support 192 5.6 AC–MTDC Load Flow Solution 194 5.7 Post-Contingency Operation 195 5.7.1 Analysis for AC System 196 5.7.2 Analysis for Converter Station 196 5.7.2.1 AC Side Disturbances 197 5.7.2.2 Converter Outage 197 5.7.3 Analysis for AC System Connected to Converter Stations 198 5.7.4 Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 199 5.8 Case Study 200 5.8.1 Study Network 200 5.8.2 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 202 5.8.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 203 5.8.4 Nonlinear Simulation 204 5.8.4.1 AC Side Disturbances 204 5.8.4.2 Converter Station Disturbances 212 6 Protection of MTDC Grids 219 6.1 Introduction 219 6.2 Converter Station Protection 220 6.3 DC Cable Fault Response 220 6.3.1 Fault Response of Two-level VSC 221 6.3.1.1 Analysis 224 6.3.2 Fault Response of Half-bridge mmc 225 6.3.3 Challenges 227 6.4 Fault-blocking Converters 228 6.4.1 Full-bridge mmc 228 6.4.2 Variants of Full-bridge mmc 230 6.5 DC Circuit Breakers 231 6.5.1 Solid-state DC Breaker 232 6.5.2 Proactive Hybrid DC Breaker 233 6.5.3 DC/DC Converter 235 6.6 Protection Strategies 237 6.6.1 Strategy I 238 6.6.2 Strategy II 240 6.6.3 Strategy III 241 6.6.3.1 Detection and Identification 241 6.6.4 Backup Protection 245 References 249 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnderstanding transient phenomena in electric power systems and the harmful impact of resulting disturbances is an important aspect of power system operation and resilience. Bridging the gap from theory to practice, this guide introduces the fundamentals of transient phenomena affecting electric power systems using the numerical analysis tools, Alternative Transients Program- Electromagnetic Transients Program (ATP-EMTP) and ATP-DRAW. This technology is widely-applied to recognize and solve transient problems in power networks and components giving readers a highly practical and relevant perspective and the skills to analyse new transient phenomena encountered in the field. Key features: Introduces novice engineers to transient phenomena using commonplace tools and models as well as background theory to link theory to practice. Develops analysis skills using the ATP-EMTP program, which is widely used in the electric power industry. ComprehensiveTable of ContentsPreface ix Part I Standard Course-Fundamentals and Typical Phenomena 1 1 Fundamentals of EMTP 3 1.1 Function and Composition of EMTP 3 1.1.1 Lumped Parameter RLC 3 1.1.2 Transmission Line 4 1.1.3 Transformer 6 1.1.4 Nonlinear Element 6 1.1.5 Arrester 6 1.1.6 Switch 7 1.1.7 Voltage and Current Sources 7 1.1.8 Generator and Rotating Machine 7 1.1.9 Control 7 1.1.10 Support Routines 7 1.2 Features of the Calculation Method 8 1.2.1 Formulation of the Main Circuit 8 1.2.2 Calculation in TACS 12 1.2.3 Features of EMTP 13 References 16 2 Modeling of System Components 17 2.1 Overhead Transmission Lines and Underground Cables 17 2.1.1 Overhead Transmission Line—Line Constants 17 2.1.2 Underground Cables—Cable Parameters 37 2.2 Transformer 46 2.2.1 Single‐Phase Two-Winding Transformer 46 2.2.2 Single‐Phase Three‐Winding Transformer 50 2.2.3 Three‐Phase One‐Core Transformer—Three Legs or Five Legs 53 2.2.4 Frequency and Transformer Modeling 55 3 Transient Currents in Power Systems 57 3.1 Short‐Circuit Currents 57 3.2 Transformer Inrush Magnetizing Current 60 3.3 Transient Inrush Currents in Capacitive Circuits 62 Appendix 3.A: Example of ATPDraw Sheets—Data3‐02.acp 64 Reference 64 4 Transient at Current Breaking 65 4.1 Short‐Circuit Current Breakings 66 4.2 Capacitive Current Switching 71 4.2.1 Switching of Capacitive Current of a No‐Load Overhead Transmission Line 72 4.2.2 Switching of Capacitive Current of a Cable 75 4.2.3 Switching of Capacitive Current of a Shunt Capacitor Bank 76 4.3 Inductive Current Switching 78 4.3.1 Current Chopping Phenomenon 78 4.3.2 Reignition 79 4.3.3 High‐Frequency Extinction and Multiple Reignition 80 4.4 TRV with Parallel Capacitance in SLF Breaking 80 Appendix 4.A: Current Injection to Various Circuit Elements 84 Appendix 4.B: TRV Calculation, Including ITRV—Current Injection is Applied for TRV Calculation 91 Appendix 4.C: 550 kV Line Normal Breaking 97 Appendix 4.D: 300 kV, 150 MVA Shunt Reactor Current Breaking—Current Chopping—Reignition—HF Current Interruption 100 References 103 5 Black Box Arc Modeling 105 5.1 Mayr Arc Model 106 5.1.1 Analysis of Phenomenon of Short‐Line Fault Breaking 106 5.1.2 Analysis of Phenomenon of Shunt Reactor Switching 110 5.2 Cassie Arc Model 112 5.2.1 Analysis of Phenomenon of Current Zero Skipping 113 Appendix 5.A: Mayr Arc Model Calculating SLF Breaking, 300 kV, 50 kA, L90 Condition 118 Appendix 5.B: Zero Skipping Current Breaking Near Generator—Fault Current Lasting 124 Appendix 5.C: Zero Skipping Current Breaking Near Generator—Dynamic Arc Introduced, Still Nonbreaking 131 6 Typical Power Electronics Circuits in Power Systems 135 6.1 General 135 6.2 HVDC Converter/Inverter Circuits 135 6.3 Static Var Compensator/Thyristor‐Controlled Inductor 140 6.4 PWM Self‐Communicated Type Inverter Applying the Triangular Carrier Wave Shape Principle—Applied to SVG (Static Var Generator) 142 Appendix 6.A: Example of ATPDraw Picture 147 Reference 148 Part II Advanced Course-Special Phenomena and Various Applications 149 7 Special Switching 151 7.1 Transformer‐Limited Short‐Circuit Current Breaking 151 7.2 Transformer Winding Response to Very Fast Transient Voltage 152 7.3 Transformer Magnetizing Current under Geomagnetic Storm Conditions 156 7.4 Four‐Armed Shunt Reactor for Suppressing Secondary Arc in Single‐Pole Rapid Reclosing 159 7.5 Switching Four‐Armed Shunt Reactor Compensated Transmission Line 162 References 163 8 Synchronous Machine Dynamics 165 8.1 Synchronous Machine Modeling and Machine Parameters 165 8.2 Some Basic Examples 167 8.2.1 No‐Load Transmission Line Charging 167 8.2.2 Power Flow Calculation 169 8.2.3 Sudden Short‐Circuiting 172 8.3 Transient Stability Analysis Applying the Synchronous Machine Model 176 8.3.1 Classic Analysis (Equal‐Area Method) and Time Domain Analysis (EMTP) 176 8.3.2 Detailed Transients by Time Domain Analysis: ATP‐EMTP 180 8.3.3 Field Excitation Control 183 8.3.4 Back‐Swing Phenomenon 186 Appendix 8.A: Short‐Circuit Phenomena Observation in d‐q Domain Coordinate 190 Appendix 8.B: Starting as an Induction Motor 193 Appendix 8.C: Modeling by the No. 19 Universal Machine 195 Appendix 8.D: Example of ATPDraw Picture File: Draw8‐111.acp (Figure D8.1). 197 References 198 9 Induction Machine, Doubly Fed Machine, Permanent Magnet Machine 199 9.1 Induction Machine (Cage Rotor Type) 199 9.1.1 Machine Data for EMTP Calculation 200 9.1.2 Zero Starting 201 9.1.3 Mechanical Torque Load Application 204 9.1.4 Multimachines 206 9.1.5 Motor Terminal Voltage Change 208 9.1.6 Driving by Variable Voltage and Frequency Source (VVVF) 209 9.2 Doubly Fed Machine 212 9.2.1 Operation Principle 212 9.2.2 Steady‐State Calculation 213 9.2.3 Flywheel Generator Operation 213 9.3 Permanent Magnet Machine 215 9.3.1 Zero Starting (Starting by Direct AC Voltage Source Connection) 217 9.3.2 Calculation of Transient Phenomena 217 Appendix 9.A: Doubly Fed Machine Vector Diagrams 218 Appendix 9.B: Example of ATPDraw Picture 219 10 Machine Drive Applications 221 10.1 Small‐Scale System Composed of a Synchronous Generator and Induction Motor 221 10.1.1 Initialization 221 10.1.2 Induction Motor Starting 223 10.1.3 Application of AVR 225 10.1.4 Inverter‐Controlled VVVF Starting 226 10.2 Cycloconverter 233 10.3 Cycloconverter‐Driven Synchronous Machine 237 10.3.1 Application of Sudden Mechanical Load 237 10.3.2 Quick Starting of a Cycloconverter‐Driven Synchronous Motor 242 10.3.3 Comparison with the Inverter‐Driven System 245 10.4 Flywheel Generator: Doubly Fed Machine Application for Transient Stability Enhancement 248 10.4.1 Initialization 249 10.4.2 Flywheel Activity in Transient Stability Enhancement 254 10.4.3 Active/Reactive Power Effect 254 10.4.4 Discussion 258 Appendix 10.A: Example of ATPDraw Picture 260 Reference 266 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe modern financial industry has been required to deal with large and diverse portfolios in a variety of asset classes often with limited market data available.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xv 1 Overview 1 Ali N. Akansu, Sanjeev R. Kulkarni, and Dmitry Malioutov 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Bird’s-Eye View of Finance 2 1.2.1 Trading and Exchanges 4 1.2.2 Technical Themes in the Book 5 1.3 Overview of the Chapters 6 1.3.1 Chapter 2: “Sparse Markowitz Portfolios” by Christine De Mol 6 1.3.2 Chapter 3: “Mean-Reverting Portfolios: Tradeoffs between Sparsity and Volatility” by Marco Cuturi and Alexandre d’Aspremont 7 1.3.3 Chapter 4: “Temporal Causal Modeling” by Prabhanjan Kambadur, Aurélie C. Lozano, and Ronny Luss 7 1.3.4 Chapter 5: “Explicit Kernel and Sparsity of Eigen Subspace for the AR(1) Process” by Mustafa U. Torun, Onur Yilmaz and Ali N. Akansu 7 1.3.5 Chapter 6: “Approaches to High-Dimensional Covariance and Precision Matrix Estimation” by Jianqing Fan, Yuan Liao, and Han Liu 7 1.3.6 Chapter 7: “Stochastic Volatility: Modeling and Asymptotic Approaches to Option Pricing and Portfolio Selection” by Matthew Lorig and Ronnie Sircar 7 1.3.7 Chapter 8: “Statistical Measures of Dependence for Financial Data” by David S. Matteson, Nicholas A. James, and William B. Nicholson 8 1.3.8 Chapter 9: “Correlated Poisson Processes and Their Applications in Financial Modeling” by Alexander Kreinin 8 1.3.9 Chapter 10: “CVaR Minimizations in Support Vector Machines” by Junya Gotoh and Akiko Takeda 8 1.3.10 Chapter 11: “Regression Models in Risk Management” by Stan Uryasev 8 1.4 Other Topics in Financial Signal Processing and Machine Learning 9 References 9 2 Sparse Markowitz Portfolios 11 ChristineDeMol 2.1 Markowitz Portfolios 11 2.2 Portfolio Optimization as an Inverse Problem: The Need for Regularization 13 2.3 Sparse Portfolios 15 2.4 Empirical Validation 17 2.5 Variations on the Theme 18 2.5.1 Portfolio Rebalancing 18 2.5.2 Portfolio Replication or Index Tracking 19 2.5.3 Other Penalties and Portfolio Norms 19 2.6 Optimal Forecast Combination 20 Acknowlegments 21 References 21 3 Mean-Reverting Portfolios 23 Marco Cuturi and Alexandre d’Aspremont 3.1 Introduction 23 3.1.1 Synthetic Mean-Reverting Baskets 24 3.1.2 Mean-Reverting Baskets with Sufficient Volatility and Sparsity 24 3.2 Proxies for Mean Reversion 25 3.2.1 Related Work and Problem Setting 25 3.2.2 Predictability 26 3.2.3 Portmanteau Criterion 27 3.2.4 Crossing Statistics 28 3.3 Optimal Baskets 28 3.3.1 Minimizing Predictability 29 3.3.2 Minimizing the Portmanteau Statistic 29 3.3.3 Minimizing the Crossing Statistic 29 3.4 Semidefinite Relaxations and Sparse Components 30 3.4.1 A Semidefinite Programming Approach to Basket Estimation 30 3.4.2 Predictability 30 3.4.3 Portmanteau 31 3.4.4 Crossing Stats 31 3.5 Numerical Experiments 32 3.5.1 Historical Data 32 3.5.2 Mean-reverting Basket Estimators 33 3.5.3 Jurek and Yang (2007) Trading Strategy 33 3.5.4 Transaction Costs 33 3.5.5 Experimental Setup 36 3.5.6 Results 36 3.6 Conclusion 39 References 39 4 Temporal Causal Modeling 41 Prabhanjan Kambadur, Aurélie C. Lozano, and Ronny Luss 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 TCM 46 4.2.1 Granger Causality and Temporal Causal Modeling 46 4.2.2 Grouped Temporal Causal Modeling Method 47 4.2.3 Synthetic Experiments 49 4.3 Causal Strength Modeling 51 4.4 Quantile TCM (Q-TCM) 52 4.4.1 Modifying Group OMP for Quantile Loss 52 4.4.2 Experiments 53 4.5 TCM with Regime Change Identification 55 4.5.1 Model 56 4.5.2 Algorithm 58 4.5.3 Synthetic Experiments 60 4.5.4 Application: Analyzing Stock Returns 62 4.6 Conclusions 63 References 64 5 Explicit Kernel and Sparsity of Eigen Subspace for the AR(1) Process 67 Mustafa U. Torun, Onur Yilmaz, and Ali N. Akansu 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Mathematical Definitions 68 5.2.1 Discrete AR(1) Stochastic Signal Model 68 5.2.2 Orthogonal Subspace 69 5.3 Derivation of Explicit KLT Kernel for a Discrete AR(1) Process 72 5.3.1 A Simple Method for Explicit Solution of a Transcendental Equation 73 5.3.2 Continuous Process with Exponential Autocorrelation 74 5.3.3 Eigenanalysis of a Discrete AR(1) Process 76 5.3.4 Fast Derivation of KLT Kernel for an AR(1) Process 79 5.4 Sparsity of Eigen Subspace 82 5.4.1 Overview of Sparsity Methods 83 5.4.2 pdf-Optimized Midtread Quantizer 84 5.4.3 Quantization of Eigen Subspace 86 5.4.4 pdf of Eigenvector 87 5.4.5 Sparse KLT Method 89 5.4.6 Sparsity Performance 91 5.5 Conclusions 97 References 97 6 Approaches to High-Dimensional Covariance and Precision Matrix Estimations 100 Jianqing Fan, Yuan Liao, and Han Liu 6.1 Introduction 100 6.2 Covariance Estimation via Factor Analysis 101 6.2.1 Known Factors 103 6.2.2 Unknown Factors 104 6.2.3 Choosing the Threshold 105 6.2.4 Asymptotic Results 105 6.2.5 A Numerical Illustration 107 6.3 Precision Matrix Estimation and Graphical Models 109 6.3.1 Column-wise Precision Matrix Estimation 110 6.3.2 The Need for Tuning-insensitive Procedures 111 6.3.3 TIGER: A Tuning-insensitive Approach for Optimal Precision Matrix Estimation 112 6.3.4 Computation 114 6.3.5 Theoretical Properties of TIGER 114 6.3.6 Applications to Modeling Stock Returns 115 6.3.7 Applications to Genomic Network 118 6.4 Financial Applications 119 6.4.1 Estimating Risks of Large Portfolios 119 6.4.2 Large Panel Test of Factor Pricing Models 121 6.5 Statistical Inference in Panel Data Models 126 6.5.1 Efficient Estimation in Pure Factor Models 126 6.5.2 Panel Data Model with Interactive Effects 127 6.5.3 Numerical Illustrations 130 6.6 Conclusions 131 References 131 7 Stochastic Volatility 135 Matthew Lorig and Ronnie Sircar 7.1 Introduction 135 7.1.1 Options and Implied Volatility 136 7.1.2 Volatility Modeling 137 7.2 Asymptotic Regimes and Approximations 141 7.2.1 Contract Asymptotics 142 7.2.2 Model Asymptotics 142 7.2.3 Implied Volatility Asymptotics 143 7.2.4 Tractable Models 145 7.2.5 Model Coefficient Polynomial Expansions 146 7.2.6 Small “Vol of Vol” Expansion 152 7.2.7 Separation of Timescales Approach 152 7.2.8 Comparison of the Expansion Schemes 154 7.3 Merton Problem with Stochastic Volatility: Model Coefficient Polynomial Expansions 155 7.3.1 Models and Dynamic Programming Equation 155 7.3.2 Asymptotic Approximation 157 7.3.3 Power Utility 159 7.4 Conclusions 160 Acknowledgements 160 References 160 8 Statistical Measures of Dependence for Financial Data 162 David S. Matteson, Nicholas A. James, and William B. Nicholson 8.1 Introduction 162 8.2 Robust Measures of Correlation and Autocorrelation 164 8.2.1 Transformations and Rank-Based Methods 166 8.2.2 Inference 169 8.2.3 Misspecification Testing 171 8.3 Multivariate Extensions 174 8.3.1 Multivariate Volatility 175 8.3.2 Multivariate Misspecification Testing 176 8.3.3 Granger Causality 176 8.3.4 Nonlinear Granger Causality 177 8.4 Copulas 179 8.4.1 Fitting Copula Models 180 8.4.2 Parametric Copulas 181 8.4.3 Extending beyond Two Random Variables 183 8.4.4 Software 185 8.5 Types of Dependence 185 8.5.1 Positive and Negative Dependence 185 8.5.2 Tail Dependence 187 References 188 9 Correlated Poisson Processes and Their Applications in Financial Modeling 191 Alexander Kreinin 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Poisson Processes and Financial Scenarios 193 9.2.1 Integrated Market–Credit Risk Modeling 193 9.2.2 Market Risk and Derivatives Pricing 194 9.2.3 Operational Risk Modeling 194 9.2.4 Correlation of Operational Events 195 9.3 Common Shock Model and Randomization of Intensities 196 9.3.1 Common Shock Model 196 9.3.2 Randomization of Intensities 196 9.4 Simulation of Poisson Processes 197 9.4.1 Forward Simulation 197 9.4.2 Backward Simulation 200 9.5 Extreme Joint Distribution 207 9.5.1 Reduction to Optimization Problem 207 9.5.2 Monotone Distributions 208 9.5.3 Computation of the Joint Distribution 214 9.5.4 On the Frechet–Hoeffding Theorem 215 9.5.5 Approximation of the Extreme Distributions 217 9.6 Numerical Results 219 9.6.1 Examples of the Support 219 9.6.2 Correlation Boundaries 221 9.7 Backward Simulation of the Poisson-Wiener Process 222 9.8 Concluding Remarks 227 Acknowledgments 228 Appendix A 229 A. 1 Proof of Lemmas 9.2 and 9.3 229 A.1.1 Proof of Lemma 9.2 229 A.1.2 Proof of Lemma 9.3 230 References 231 10 CVaR Minimizations in Support Vector Machines 233 Jun-ya Gotoh and Akiko Takeda 10.1 What Is CVaR? 234 10.1.1 Definition and Interpretations 234 10.1.2 Basic Properties of CVaR 238 10.1.3 Minimization of CVaR 240 10.2 Support Vector Machines 242 10.2.1 Classification 242 10.2.2 Regression 246 10.3 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations 247 10.3.1 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations with Homogeneous Loss 247 10.3.2 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations with Nonhomogeneous Loss 251 10.3.3 Refining the ν-Property 253 10.4 Duality 256 10.4.1 Binary Classification 256 10.4.2 Geometric Interpretation of ν-SVM 257 10.4.3 Geometric Interpretation of the Range of ν for ν-SVC 258 10.4.4 Regression 259 10.4.5 One-class Classification and SVDD 259 10.5 Extensions to Robust Optimization Modelings 259 10.5.1 Distributionally Robust Formulation 259 10.5.2 Measurement-wise Robust Formulation 261 10.6 Literature Review 262 10.6.1 CVaR as a Risk Measure 263 10.6.2 From CVaR Minimization to SVM 263 10.6.3 From SVM to CVaR Minimization 263 10.6.4 Beyond CVaR 263 References 264 11 Regression Models in Risk Management 266 Stan Uryasev 11.1 Introduction 267 11.2 Error and Deviation Measures 268 11.3 Risk Envelopes and Risk Identifiers 271 11.3.1 Examples of Deviation Measures D, Corresponding Risk Envelopes Q, and Sets of Risk Identifiers QD(X) 272 11.4 Error Decomposition in Regression 273 11.5 Least-Squares Linear Regression 275 11.6 Median Regression 277 11.7 Quantile Regression and Mixed Quantile Regression 281 11.8 Special Types of Linear Regression 283 11.9 Robust Regression 284 References, Further Reading, and Bibliography 287 Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisDemonstrates techniques which will allow rewiring rates of over 95%, enabling adoption of deep sub-micron chips for industrial applications Logic synthesis is an essential part of the modern digital IC design process in semi-conductor industry. This book discusses a logic synthesis technique called rewiring and its latest technical advancement in term of rewirability. Rewiring technique has surfaced in academic research since 1993 and there is currently no book available on the market which systematically and comprehensively discusses this rewiring technology. The authors cover logic transformation techniques with concentration on rewiring. For many decades, the effect of wiring on logic structures has been ignored due to an ideal view of wires and their negligible role in the circuit performance. However in today's semiconductor technology wiring is the major player in circuit performance degeneration and logic synthesis engines can be improved to deal with thiTable of ContentsList of Figures ix List of Tables xiii Preface xv Introduction xvii 1 Preliminaries 1 1.1 Boolean Circuits 1 1.2 Redundancy and Stuck-at Faults 4 1.3 Automatic Test Pattern Generation (ATPG) 6 1.4 Dominators 6 1.5 Mandatory Assignments and Recursive Learning 7 1.6 Graph Theory and Boolean Circuits 8 References 10 2 Concept of Logic Rewiring 11 2.1 What is Rewiring? 11 2.2 ATPG-based Rewiring Techniques 12 2.2.1 Add-First 12 2.2.2 Delete-First 18 2.3 Non-ATPG-based Rewiring Techniques 24 2.3.1 Graph-based Alternate Wiring (GBAW) 24 2.3.2 SPFD 25 2.4 Why are Rewiring Techniques Important? 31 References 33 3 Add-First and Non-ATPG-Based Rewiring Techniques 37 3.1 Redundancy Addition and Removal (RAR) 37 3.1.1 RAMBO 37 3.1.2 REWIRE 38 3.1.3 RAMFIRE 41 3.1.4 Comparison Between RAR-Based Rewiring Techniques 43 3.2 Node-Based Network Addition and Removal (NAR) 43 3.2.1 Node Merging 43 3.2.2 Node Addition and Removal 48 3.3 Other Rewiring Techniques 51 3.3.1 SPFD-Based Rewiring 51 References 65 4 Delete-First Rewiring Techniques 67 4.1 IRRA 69 4.1.1 Destination of Alternative Wires 71 4.1.2 Source of Alternative Wires 72 4.2 ECR 76 4.2.1 Destination of Alternative Wires 80 4.2.2 Source of Alternative Wires 85 4.2.3 Overview of the Approach of Error-Cancellation-Based Rewiring 86 4.2.4 Complexity Analysis of ECR 87 4.2.5 Comparison Between ECR and Other Resynthesis Techniques 90 4.2.6 Experimental Result 92 4.3 FECR 96 4.3.1 Error Flow Graph Construction 97 4.3.2 Destination Node Identification 98 4.3.3 Source Node Identification 102 4.3.4 ECR is a Special Case of FECR 104 4.3.5 Complexity Analysis of FECR 105 4.3.6 Experimental Result 105 4.4 Cut-Based Error Cancellation Rewiring 107 4.4.1 Preliminaries 107 4.4.2 Error Frontier 109 4.4.3 Cut-Based Error Cancellation Rewiring 117 4.4.4 Verification of Alternative Wires 121 4.4.5 Complexity Analysis of CECR 122 4.4.6 Relationship Between ECR, FECR, and CECR 122 4.4.7 Extending CECR for n-to-m Rewiring 123 4.4.8 Speedup for CECR 124 4.4.9 Experimental Results 125 References 129 5 Applications 133 5.1 Area Reduction 133 5.1.1 Preliminaries 134 5.1.2 Our Methodology (“Long tail” vs “Bump tail” Curves) 135 5.1.3 Details of our Approach 140 5.1.4 Experimental Results 143 5.2 Postplacement Optimization 145 5.2.1 Wire-Length-Driven Rewiring-Based Postplacement Optimization 145 5.2.2 Timing-Driven Rewiring-Based Postplacement Optimization 151 5.3 ECO Timing Optimization 158 5.3.1 Preliminaries 160 5.3.2 Nego-Rout Operation 161 5.3.3 Path-Restructuring Operation 164 5.3.4 Experimental Results 166 5.4 Area Reduction in FPGA Technology Mapping 167 5.4.1 Incremental Logic Resynthesis (ILR): Depth-Oriented Mode 170 5.4.2 Incremental Logic Resynthesis (ILR): Area-Oriented Mode 171 5.4.3 Experimental Results 173 5.4.4 Conclusion 183 5.5 FPGA Postlayout Routing Optimization 184 5.5.1 Optimization by Alternative Functions 185 5.5.2 Optimization with Mapping-to-Routing Logic Rewirings 187 5.5.3 Optimization by SPFD-Based Rewiring 198 5.6 Logic Synthesis for Low Power Using Clock Gating and Rewiring 199 5.6.1 Mechanism of Clock Gating 199 5.6.2 Rewiring-Based Optimization 203 References 207 6 Summary 211 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisLiquid Crystal Devices are crucial and ubiquitous components of an ever-increasing number of technologies. They are used in everything from cellular phones, eBook readers, GPS devices, computer monitors and automotive displays to projectors and TVs, to name but a few. This second edition continues to serve as an introductory guide to the fundamental properties of liquid crystals and their technical application, while explicating the recent advancements within LCD technology. This edition includes important new chapters on blue-phase display technology, advancements in LCD research significantly contributed to by the authors themselves. This title is of particular interest to engineers and researchers involved in display technology and graduate students involved in display technology research. Key features:Updated throughout to reflect the latest technical state-of-the-art in LCD research and development, including new chapters and material on topics such asTable of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword xiii Preface to the First Edition xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii 1 Liquid Crystal Physics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics 5 1.2.1 Thermodynamic laws 5 1.2.2 Boltzmann distribution 6 1.2.3 Thermodynamic quantities 7 1.2.4 Criteria for thermodynamical equilibrium 9 1.3 Orientational Order 10 1.3.1 Orientational order parameter 11 1.3.2 Landau–de Gennes theory of orientational order in nematic phase 13 1.3.3 Maier–Saupe theory 18 1.4 Elastic Properties of Liquid Crystals 21 1.4.1 Elastic properties of nematic liquid crystals 21 1.4.2 Elastic properties of cholesteric liquid crystals 24 1.4.3 Elastic properties of smectic liquid crystals 26 1.5 Response of Liquid Crystals to Electromagnetic Fields 27 1.5.1 Magnetic susceptibility 27 1.5.2 Dielectric permittivity and refractive index 29 1.6 Anchoring Effects of Nematic Liquid Crystal at Surfaces 38 1.6.1 Anchoring energy 38 1.6.2 Alignment layers 39 1.7 Liquid crystal director elastic deformation 40 1.7.1 Elastic deformation and disclination 40 1.7.2 Escape of liquid crystal director in disclinations 42 Homework Problems 48 References 49 2 Propagation of Light in Anisotropic Optical Media 51 2.1 Electromagnetic Wave 51 2.2 Polarization 54 2.2.1 Monochromatic plane waves and their polarization states 54 2.2.2 Linear polarization state 55 2.2.3 Circular polarization states 55 2.2.4 Elliptical polarization state 56 2.3 Propagation of Light in Uniform Anisotropic Optical Media 59 2.3.1 Eigenmodes 60 2.3.2 Orthogonality of eigenmodes 65 2.3.3 Energy flux 66 2.3.4 Special cases 67 2.3.5 Polarizers 69 2.4 Propagation of Light in Cholesteric Liquid Crystals 72 2.4.1 Eigenmodes 72 2.4.2 Reflection of cholesteric liquid crystals 81 2.4.3 Lasing in cholesteric liquid crystals 84 Homework Problems 85 References 86 3 Optical Modeling Methods 87 3.1 Jones Matrix Method 87 3.1.1 Jones vector 87 3.1.2 Jones matrix 88 3.1.3 Jones matrix of non-uniform birefringent film 91 3.1.4 Optical properties of twisted nematic 92 3.2 Mueller Matrix Method 98 3.2.1 Partially polarized and unpolarized light 98 3.2.2 Measurement of the Stokes parameters 100 3.2.3 The Mueller matrix 102 3.2.4 Poincaré sphere 104 3.2.5 Evolution of the polarization states on the Poincaré sphere 106 3.2.6 Mueller matrix of twisted nematic liquid crystals 110 3.2.7 Mueller matrix of non-uniform birefringence film 112 3.3 Berreman 4 × 4 Method 113 Homework Problems 124 References 125 4 Effects of Electric Field on Liquid Crystals 127 4.1 Dielectric Interaction 127 4.1.1 Reorientation under dielectric interaction 128 4.1.2 Field-induced orientational order 129 4.2 Flexoelectric Effect 132 4.2.1 Flexoelectric effect in nematic liquid crystals 132 4.2.2 Flexoelectric effect in cholesteric liquid crystals 136 4.3 Ferroelectric Liquid Crystal 138 4.3.1 Symmetry and polarization 138 4.3.2 Tilt angle and polarization 140 4.3.3 Surface stabilized ferroelectric liquid crystals 141 4.3.4 Electroclinic effect in chiral smectic liquid crystal 144 Homework Problems 146 References 147 5 Fréedericksz Transition 149 5.1 Calculus of Variation 149 5.1.1 One dimension and one variable 150 5.1.2 One dimension and multiple variables 153 5.1.3 Three dimensions 153 5.2 Fréedericksz Transition: Statics 153 5.2.1 Splay geometry 154 5.2.2 Bend geometry 158 5.2.3 Twist geometry 160 5.2.4 Twisted nematic cell 161 5.2.5 Splay geometry with weak anchoring 164 5.2.6 Splay geometry with pretilt angle 165 5.3 Measurement of Anchoring Strength 166 5.3.1 Polar anchoring strength 167 5.3.2 Azimuthal anchoring strength 169 5.4 Measurement of Pretilt Angle 171 5.5 Fréedericksz Transition: Dynamics 175 5.5.1 Dynamics of Fréedericksz transition in twist geometry 175 5.5.2 Hydrodynamics 176 5.5.3 Backflow 182 Homework Problems 187 References 188 6 Liquid Crystal Materials 191 6.1 Introduction 191 6.2 Refractive Indices 192 6.2.1 Extended Cauchy equations 192 6.2.2 Three-band model 193 6.2.3 Temperature effect 195 6.2.4 Temperature gradient 198 6.2.5 Molecular polarizabilities 199 6.3 Dielectric Constants 201 6.3.1 Positive Δε liquid crystals for AMLCD 202 6.3.2 Negative Δε liquid crystals 202 6.3.3 Dual-frequency liquid crystals 203 6.4 Rotational Viscosity 204 6.5 Elastic Constants 204 6.6 Figure-of-Merit (FoM) 205 6.7 Index Matching between Liquid Crystals and Polymers 206 6.7.1 Refractive index of polymers 206 6.7.2 Matching refractive index 208 Homework problems 210 References 210 7 Modeling Liquid Crystal Director Configuration 213 7.1 Electric Energy of Liquid Crystals 213 7.1.1 Constant charge 214 7.1.2 Constant voltage 215 7.1.3 Constant electric field 218 7.2 Modeling Electric Field 218 7.3 Simulation of Liquid Crystal Director Configuration 221 7.3.1 Angle representation 221 7.3.2 Vector representation 225 7.3.3 Tensor representation 228 Homework Problems 232 References 232 8 Transmissive Liquid Crystal Displays 235 8.1 Introduction 235 8.2 Twisted Nematic (TN) Cells 236 8.2.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 237 8.2.2 Film-compensated TN cells 238 8.2.3 Viewing angle 241 8.3 In-Plane Switching Mode 241 8.3.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 242 8.3.2 Response time 243 8.3.3 Viewing angle 246 8.3.4 Classification of compensation films 246 8.3.5 Phase retardation of uniaxial media at oblique angles 246 8.3.6 Poincaré sphere representation 249 8.3.7 Light leakage of crossed polarizers at oblique view 250 8.3.8 IPS with a positive a film and a positive c film 254 8.3.9 IPS with positive and negative a films 259 8.3.10 Color shift 263 8.4 Vertical Alignment Mode 263 8.4.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 263 8.4.2 Optical response time 264 8.4.3 Overdrive and undershoot voltage method 265 8.5 Multi-Domain Vertical Alignment Cells 266 8.5.1 MVA with a positive a film and a negative c film 269 8.5.2 MVA with a positive a, a negative a, and a negative c film 273 8.6 Optically Compensated Bend Cell 277 8.6.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 278 8.6.2 Compensation films for OCB 279 Homework Problems 281 References 283 9 Reflective and Transflective Liquid Crystal Displays 285 9.1 Introduction 285 9.2 Reflective Liquid Crystal Displays 286 9.2.1 Film-compensated homogeneous cell 287 9.2.2 Mixed-mode twisted nematic (MTN) cells 289 9.3 Transflector 290 9.3.1 Openings-on-metal transflector 290 9.3.2 Half-mirror metal transflector 291 9.3.3 Multilayer dielectric film transflector 292 9.3.4 Orthogonal polarization transflectors 292 9.4 Classification of Transflective LCDs 293 9.4.1 Absorption-type transflective LCDs 294 9.4.2 Scattering-type transflective LCDs 296 9.4.3 Scattering and absorption type transflective LCDs 298 9.4.4 Reflection-type transflective LCDs 300 9.4.5 Phase retardation type 302 9.5 Dual-Cell-Gap Transflective LCDs 312 9.6 Single-Cell-Gap Transflective LCDs 314 9.7 Performance of Transflective LCDs 314 9.7.1 Color balance 314 9.7.2 Image brightness 315 9.7.3 Viewing angle 315 Homework Problems 316 References 316 10 Liquid Crystal Display Matrices, Drive Schemes and Bistable Displays 321 10.1 Segmented Displays 321 10.2 Passive Matrix Displays and Drive Scheme 322 10.3 Active Matrix Displays 326 10.3.1 TFT structure 328 10.3.2 TFT operation principles 329 10.4 Bistable Ferroelectric LCD and Drive Scheme 330 10.5 Bistable Nematic Displays 332 10.5.1 Introduction 332 10.5.2 Twisted-untwisted bistable nematic LCDs 333 10.5.3 Surface-stabilized nematic liquid crystals 339 10.6 Bistable Cholesteric Reflective Display 342 10.6.1 Introduction 342 10.6.2 Optical properties of bistable Ch reflective displays 344 10.6.3 Encapsulated cholesteric liquid crystal displays 347 10.6.4 Transition between cholesteric states 347 10.6.5 Drive schemes for bistable Ch displays 355 Homework Problems 358 References 359 11 Liquid Crystal/Polymer Composites 363 11.1 Introduction 363 11.2 Phase Separation 365 11.2.1 Binary mixture 365 11.2.2 Phase diagram and thermal induced phase separation 369 11.2.3 Polymerization induced phase separation 371 11.2.4 Solvent-induced phase separation 374 11.2.5 Encapsulation 376 11.3 Scattering Properties of LCPCs 377 11.4 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystals 383 11.4.1 Liquid crystal droplet configurations in PDLCs 383 11.4.2 Switching PDLCs 385 11.4.3 Scattering PDLC devices 387 11.4.4 Dichroic dye-doped PDLC 391 11.4.5 Holographic PDLCs 393 11.5 PSLCs 395 11.5.1 Preparation of PSLCs 395 11.5.2 Working modes of scattering PSLCs 396 11.6 Scattering-Based Displays from LCPCs 400 11.6.1 Reflective displays 400 11.6.2 Projection displays 402 11.6.3 Transmissive direct-view displays 403 11.7 Polymer-Stabilized LCDs 403 Homework Problems 407 References 409 12 Tunable Liquid Crystal Photonic Devices 413 12.1 Introduction 413 12.2 Laser Beam Steering 414 12.2.1 Optical phased array 415 12.2.2 Prism-based beam steering 417 12.3 Variable Optical Attenuators 419 12.4 Tunable-Focus Lens 423 12.4.1 Tunable-focus spherical lens 423 12.4.2 Tunable-focus cylindrical lens 426 12.4.3 Switchable positive and negative microlens 428 12.4.4 Hermaphroditic LC microlens 434 12.5 Polarization-Independent LC Devices 435 12.5.1 Double-layered homogeneous LC cells 436 12.5.2 Double-layered LC gels 438 Homework Problems 441 References 442 13 Blue Phases of Chiral Liquid Crystals 445 13.1 Introduction 445 13.2 Phase Diagram of Blue Phases 446 13.3 Reflection of Blue Phases 447 13.3.1 Basics of crystal structure and X-ray diffraction 447 13.3.2 Bragg reflection of blue phases 449 13.4 Structure of Blue Phase 451 13.4.1 Defect theory 452 13.4.2 Landau theory 459 13.5 Optical Properties of Blue Phase 471 13.5.1 Reflection 471 13.5.2 Transmission 472 Homework Problems 475 References 475 14 Polymer-Stabilized Blue Phase Liquid Crystals 477 14.1 Introduction 477 14.2 Polymer-Stabilized Blue Phases 480 14.2.1 Nematic LC host 482 14.2.2 Chiral dopants 483 14.2.3 Monomers 483 14.3 Kerr Effect 484 14.3.1 Extended Kerr effect 486 14.3.2 Wavelength effect 489 14.3.3 Frequency effect 490 14.3.4 Temperature effects 491 14.4 Device Configurations 496 14.4.1 In-plane-switching BPLCD 497 14.4.2 Protruded electrodes 501 14.4.3 Etched electrodes 504 14.4.4 Single gamma curve 504 14.5 Vertical Field Switching 507 14.5.1 Device structure 507 14.5.2 Experiments and simulations 508 14.6 Phase Modulation 510 References 510 15 Liquid Crystal Display Components 513 15.1 Introduction 513 15.2 Light Source 513 15.3 Light-guide 516 15.4 Diffuser 516 15.5 Collimation Film 518 15.6 Polarizer 519 15.6.1 Dichroic absorbing polarizer 520 15.6.2 Dichroic reflective polarizer 521 15.7 Compensation Film 530 15.7.1 Form birefringence compensation film 531 15.7.2 Discotic liquid crystal compensation film 531 15.7.3 Compensation film from rigid polymer chains 532 15.7.4 Drawn polymer compensation film 533 15.8 Color Filter 535 References 536 16 Three-Dimensional Displays 539 16.1 Introduction 539 16.2 Depth Cues 539 16.2.1 Binocular disparity 539 16.2.2 Convergence 540 16.2.3 Motion parallax 540 16.2.4 Accommodation 541 16.3 Stereoscopic Displays 541 16.3.1 Head-mounted displays 542 16.3.2 Anaglyph 542 16.3.3 Time sequential stereoscopic displays with shutter glasses 542 16.3.4 Stereoscopic displays with polarizing glasses 544 16.4 Autostereoscopic Displays 546 16.4.1 Autostereoscopic displays based on parallax barriers 546 16.4.2 Autostereoscopic displays based on lenticular lens array 550 16.4.3 Directional backlight 552 16.5 Integral imaging 553 16.6 Holography 554 16.7 Volumetric displays 556 16.7.1 Swept volumetric displays 556 16.7.2 Multi-planar volumetric displays 557 16.7.3 Points volumetric displays 560 References 560 Index 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisGet up to speed on your Canon SL1/100D and enter the world of dSLR photography! Canon's EOS Rebel SL1/100D is for photographers who prefer a smaller, lightweight camera that still offers heavyweight features. This full-color guide explains how to get better photos from an SL1.Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part I: Getting Started 5 Chapter 1: Exploring Your Canon EOS Rebel SL1/100D 7 Chapter 2: Creating Great Images on Auto-Pilot 41 Chapter 3: Specifying Image Size and Quality 73 Chapter 4: Using the LCD Monitor 83 Part II: Going beyond Point-and-Shoot Photography 111 Chapter 5: Shooting Pictures and Movies in Live View 113 Chapter 6: Leaving Auto Mode Behind 135 Chapter 7: Features That Make Pictures Pop 165 Chapter 8: Shooting Frameworthy Photos 205 Part III: Editing and Sharing Images 237 Chapter 9: Editing Your Images 239 Chapter 10: Creating Prints from Your Images 267 Part IV: The Part of Tens 287 Chapter 11: Ten Tips and Tricks 289 Chapter 12: Ten Cool Projects 305 Index 327

Read more less

Book SynopsisShows how the engineering curriculum can be a site for rendering social justice visible in engineering, for exploring complex socio-technical interplays inherent in engineering practice, and for enhancing teaching and learning Using social justice as a catalyst for curricular transformation, Engineering Justice presents an examination of how politics, culture, and other social issues are inherent in the practice of engineering. It aims to align engineering curricula with socially just outcomes, increase enrollment among underrepresented groups, and lessen lingering gender, class, and ethnicity gaps by showing how the power of engineering knowledge can be explicitly harnessed to serve the underserved and address social inequalities. This book is meant to transform the way educators think about engineering curricula through creating or transforming existing courses to attract, retain, and motivate engineering students to become professionals who enact engineering Table of ContentsA Note from the Series Editor xiii About the Authors xv Foreword xvii Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxvii Introduction 1 1 Pressing Issues for Engineering Education and the Engineering Profession 3 1.1 A Mismatched Curriculum 3 1.2 Responsibility that Emerges from the Transformative Power of Engineering 7 1.3 Inquiring into the Framing of Benefits and Constraints 9 1.4 Transitioning from Weak to Robust Sustainability 9 1.5 Fostering Inclusive Excellence 10 1.6 Engaging Emerging Interest Groups 11 2 Research Methods 12 3 Theoretical Frameworks 13 4 Engineering for Social Justice 14 4.1 Emerging Organizations Provide New Opportunities 15 4.2 Calls from Engineering Education Leaders 16 4.3 Emerging Scholarship on Engineering and Social Justice 18 5 Engineering for Social Justice Criteria 19 5.1 Listening Contextually to Develop Trust and Empathy 21 5.2 Identifying Structural Conditions 23 5.3 Acknowledging Political Agency and Mobilizing Power 24 5.4 Increasing Opportunities and Resources 26 5.5 Reducing Imposed Risks and Harms 27 5.6 Enhancing Human Capabilities 28 5.7 Engineering and Social Justice Criteria Combined 30 6 Guidelines for Engineering for Social Justice Implementation 31 6.1 Cradle-to-Grave Analysis 31 6.2 Transcending Temporal Delimitations 33 6.3 Culling Multiple Perspectives 33 7 Further Chapters 34 7.1 Ideologies and Mindsets that Render Social Justice Invisible or Irrelevant 34 7.2 Engineering Design 35 7.3 Engineering Sciences 36 7.4 Humanities/Social Science Courses for Engineering Students 36 7.5 E4SJ as Catalyst for Inclusive Excellence in Engineering 37 7.6 Conclusion 37 8 Benefits of E4SJ Approach 37 References 38 1 Social Justice is often invisible in Engineering Education and Practice 45 1.1 Generic Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible 46 1.1.1 Normalcy 46 1.1.2 Superiority 47 1.1.3 Unconscious Biases 47 1.1.4 Personal and Broader Societal Framing 48 1.2 Engineering-Specific Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible: Ideologies 49 1.2.1 Technical–Social Dualism 50 1.2.2 Depoliticization 52 1.2.3 Meritocracy 55 1.3 Engineering-Specific Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible: Mindsets 56 1.3.1 Centrality of Military and Corporate Organizations 57 1.3.2 Uncritical Acceptance of Authority 58 1.3.3 Technical Narrowness 59 1.3.4 Positivism and the Myth of Objectivity 59 1.3.5 Willingness to Help and Persistence 60 References 63 2 Engineering Design for Social Justice 67 2.1 Why Engineering Design Matters 69 2.1.1 Why Design Resembles Actual Engineering Practice Yet Has Limitations 70 2.1.2 Why Design is an Important Yet Undervalued Component of Engineering Education 71 2.2 Engineering for Social Justice: Criteria for Engineering Design Initiatives 71 2.2.1 Listening Contextually 74 2.2.2 Identifying Structural Conditions 78 2.2.3 Acknowledging Political Agency and Mobilizing Power 79 2.2.4 Increasing Opportunities and Resources 82 2.2.5 Reducing Imposed Risks and Harms 85 2.2.6 Enhancing Human Capabilities 86 2.3 Social Justice Criteria Combined 88 2.4 Benefits of Integrating SJ in Design 89 2.5 Limitations of Social Justice Criteria 95 Appendix 2.A Engineering for Social Justice Self-Assessment Checklist 98 Appendix 2.B Design for Social Justice Charrette 100 Acknowledgments 102 References 102 3 Social Justice in the Engineering Sciences 107 3.1 Why are the Engineering Sciences the Sacred Cow of the Engineering Curriculum? 108 3.1.1 Engineering Sciences as Shapers of Engineering Identity 108 3.1.2 Pedagogical Tradition in the Engineering Sciences 112 3.2 Why Social Justice is Inherent in Engineering Sciences Course Content 114 3.3 Making Social Justice Visible without Compromising Technical Excellence 116 3.3.1 Social Justice Definition 116 3.3.2 E4SJ Criteria 119 3.4 Examples of Making SJ Visible in the Engineering Sciences 120 3.4.1 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Introduction to Feedback Control Systems 120 3.4.2 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Continuous-Time Signals and Systems 127 3.4.3 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Mass and Energy Balances 128 3.5 Challenges of Integrating Social Justice into the Engineering Sciences 132 3.5.1 Accreditation 132 3.5.2 Student Attitude 133 3.5.3 Faculty Attitude 133 3.6 Opportunities Associated with Integrating Social Justice 135 3.6.1 Student Perspectives on Opportunities 136 3.6.2 Teaching and Scholarship Opportunities for Faculty 139 3.7 Author Narratives on Challenges and Opportunities 141 3.7.1 IFCS Reflection by Dr. Johnson 141 3.7.2 CTSS Reflection by Dr. Huff 142 3.7.2.1 CTSS Follow-Up Reflection by Dr. Huff 143 3.7.3 Mass and Energy Balances Reflection by Dr. Riley 144 3.8 Conclusion 145 Appendix 3.A IFCS Case Study Matrix. The Case Study Options are Mapped to Technical and Social Justice Learning Objectives 146 Appendix 3.B SJ Integration Issues. For Future IFCS Course Iterations, the Key SJ Integration Issues and Their Potential Solutions are Explored 147 Acknowledgments 149 References 149 4 Humanities and Social Sciences in Engineering Education: From Irrelevance to Social Justice 155 4.1 Humanities and Social Sciences, the Engineering Curriculum, and the Distancing of Engineering Education from Pressing Social Problems 157 4.2 The Cold War, the Anti-Technology Movement, and a Marginalized HSS 160 4.2.1 Humanities and Social Sciences in 1960s and 1970s Engineering Education 161 4.2.2 The Emergence and Evolution of STS 162 4.3 It is Time: Integration of Engineering and Social Justice Through the HSS–The Historical Convergence of ABET 2000 and More 163 4.3.1 Changes in the Institutional Landscape 165 4.3.2 Changes in the Scholarly Landscape 166 4.4 Emerging Curricular Innovations 168 4.5 Engineering and Social Justice at Colorado School of Mines 170 4.5.1 Background 170 4.5.2 Description of the Course “Engineering and Social Justice” 171 4.5.3 Course Learning Outcomes 172 4.6 Intercultural Communication at Colorado School of Mines 173 4.6.1 Course Background 174 4.6.2 Course Description 174 4.6.3 Learning Outcomes 177 4.7 Document Design and Graphics at Utah State 177 4.7.1 Course Background 178 4.7.2 Course Description 178 4.7.3 Learning Outcomes 179 4.8 Benefits and Limitations 182 4.8.1 Benefits 182 4.8.2 Limitations 183 Appendix 4.A Privilege Walk Questions 184 Appendix 4.B Privilege by Numbers Activity 187 Appendix 4.C Intercultural Communication Foundational Questions 188 Acknowledgments 189 References 190 5 Transforming Engineering Education and Practice 197 5.1 Practical Guidelines: From Problem Space to Program Space 199 5.1.1 E4SJ in the Problem Space 199 5.1.2 E4SJ in the Course Space 202 5.1.3 E4SJ in Boundary Spaces 206 5.1.4 E4SJ in the Program Space 207 5.2 Broader Implications of E4SJ-Infused Transformations 208 5.2.1 Changing Who Becomes an Engineer 208 5.2.2 Changing the Culture of Engineering 211 5.2.3 From a Culture of Disengagement to One of Greater Public Engagement 215 5.3 Identity Challenges and Inspirations 217 5.3.1 Engineering Student Identity Issues 217 5.3.2 Engineering Faculty Identity Issues 223 Appendix 5.A Assignment and Examples of Problem Rewrites 228 References 237 6 Conclusion: Making Social Justice Visible and Valued 243 6.1 Engineering Justice into Your Career 244 6.1.1 Recognizing Barriers and Opportunities to Making E4SJ Visible 245 6.1.2 Developing Creative Framing on the Road to Tenure and Promotion 246 6.1.3 Engaging Other Stakeholders and Building a Community of Practice 250 6.1.4 Supporting Students interested in E4SJ Beyond the Classroom 250 6.1.5 Enacting E4SJ Outside the Home Institution 252 6.2 Future E4SJ Research Directions 253 6.2.1 Longitudinal Studies 253 6.2.2 Vehicles for Giving Voice to Marginalized Groups 255 References 255 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe large scale integration and planar scaling of individual system chips is reaching an expensive limit.Trade Review"In summary, Betty Prince has produced a piece of work that is timely and will undoubtedly become a classic text for 3D memory technologies." (3dincites.com, 30 September 2014) "As the semiconductor memory industry moves to the third dimension a plethora of competing technologies has arisen each claiming to be the logical, lucrative successor to existing two dimensional versions. The very breadth of these new technologies can be confusing even to experienced industry professionals. Dr Prince's book appears at the right time to remove this confusion by explaining each technology's structure, function and potential advantages in a way that is accessible to both interested spectators and those working in the industry. It provides a welcome solid foundation to anyone interested in understanding the various technologies vying for success in this migration."—Andrew Walker, Schiltron Corporation, USA "This is a great review on the current state-of-the-art in the highly topical subject of vertical 3D memories. It comprises the challenges and current solutions of 3D memory integration with respective to different memory technologies. It is a highly valuable resource for researchers and engineers in the field of memory technology."—Dr. Stephan Menzel, Forschungszentrum Jülich (PGI-7), Germany "... one to consider if you want to bring yourself up to speed on recent research behind today's and tomorrow’s 3D memory technologies. The book provides capsule summaries of over 360 papers and articles from scholarly journals organized into sections of related technologies to provide an invaluable reference on a particular 3D technology. It's a useful tool for locating research covering any of the numerous 3D technologies that are now finding their way into early production."—Jim Handy, TheMemoryGuy.com, OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS Semiconductor Market Research, USATable of ContentsAcknowledgments xv 1 Basic Memory Device Trends Toward the Vertical 1 1.1 Overview of 3D Vertical Memory Book 1 1.2 Moore’s Law and Scaling 2 1.3 Early RAM 3D Memory 3 1.3.1 SRAM as the First 3D Memory 3 1.3.2 An Early 3D Memory—The FinFET SRAM 6 1.3.3 Early Progress in 3D DRAM Trench and Stack Capacitors 6 1.3.4 3D as the Next Step for Embedded RAM 11 1.4 Early Nonvolatile Memories Evolve to 3D 13 1.4.1 NOR Flash Memory—Both Standalone and Embedded 13 1.4.2 The Charge-Trapping EEPROM 14 1.4.3 Thin-Film Transistor Takes Nonvolatile Memory into 3D 15 1.4.4 3D Microcontroller Stacks with Embedded SRAM and EEPROM 17 1.4.5 NAND Flash Memory as an Ideal 3D Memory 17 1.5 3D Cross-Point Arrays with Resistance RAM 20 1.6 STT-MTJ Resistance Switches in 3D 21 1.7 The Role of Emerging Memories in 3D Vertical Memories 22 References 23 2 3D Memory Using Double-Gate, Folded, TFT, and Stacked Crystal Silicon 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 FinFET—Early Vertical Memories 26 2.2.1 Early FD-SOI FinFET Charge-Trapping Flash Memory 26 2.2.2 FinFET Charge-Trapping Memory on Bulk Silicon 28 2.2.3 Doubling Memory Density Using a Paired FinFET Bit-Line Structure 32 2.2.4 Other Folded Gate Memory Structures and Characteristics 34 2.3 Double-Gate and Tri-Gate Flash 37 2.3.1 Vertical Channel Double Floating Gate Flash Memory 37 2.3.2 Early Double- and Tri-Gate FinFET Charge-Trapping Flash Memories 38 2.3.3 Double-Gate Dopant-Segregated Schottky Barrier CT FinFET Flash 39 2.3.4 Independent Double-Gate FinFET CT Flash Memory 42 2.4 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) Nonvolatile Memory with Polysilicon Channels 43 2.4.1 Independent Double-Gate Memory with TFT and Polysilicon Channels 43 2.4.2 TFT Polysilicon Channel NV Memory Using Silicon Protrusions to Enhance Performance 46 2.4.3 An Improved Polysilicon Channel TFT for Vertical Transistor NAND Flash 46 2.4.4 Polysilicon TFT CT Memory with Vacuum Tunneling and Al2O3 Blocking Oxide 47 2.4.5 Graphene Channel NV Memory with Al2O3–HfOx–Al2O3 Storage Layer 48 2.5 Double-Gate Vertical Channel Flash Memory with Engineered Tunnel Layer 49 2.5.1 Double-Gate Vertical Single-Crystal Silicon Channel with Engineered Tunnel Layer 49 2.5.2 Polysilicon Substrate TFT CT NAND with Engineered Tunnel Layer 51 2.5.3 Polysilicon Channel Double-Layer Stacked TFT NAND Bandgap-Engineered Flash 52 2.5.4 Eight-Layer 3D Vertical DG TFT NAND Flash with Junctionless Buried Channel 54 2.5.5 Variability in Polysilicon TFT for 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash 55 2.6 Stacked Gated Twin-Bit (SGTB) CT Flash 55 2.7 Crystalline Silicon and Epitaxial Stacked Layers 56 2.7.1 Stacked Crystalline Silicon Layer TFT for Six-Transistor SRAM Cell Technology 57 2.7.2 Stacked Silicon Layer S3 Process for Production SRAM 61 2.7.3 NAND Flash Memory Development Using Double-Stacked S3 Technology 64 2.7.4 4Gb NAND Flash Memory in 45 nm 3D Double-Stacked S3 Technology 66 References 69 3 Gate-All-Around (GAA) Nanowire for Vertical Memory 72 3.1 Overview of GAA Nanowire Memories 72 3.2 Single-Crystal Silicon GAA Nanowire CT Memories 72 3.2.1 Overview of Single-Crystal Silicon GAA CT Memories 72 3.2.2 An Early GAA Nanowire Single-Crystal Silicon CT Memory 73 3.2.3 Vertically Stacked Single-Crystal Silicon Twin Nanowire GAA CT Memories 74 3.2.4 GAA CT NAND Flash String Using One Single-Crystal SiNW 75 3.2.5 Single-Crystal SiNW CT Memory with High-κ Dielectric and Metal Gate 77 3.2.6 Improvement in Transient Vth Shift After Erase in 3D GAA NW SONOS 78 3.2.7 Semianalytical Model of GAA CT Memories 79 3.2.8 Nonvolatile GAA Single-Crystal Silicon Nanowire Memory on Bulk Substrate 79 3.3 Polysilicon GAA Nanowire CT Memories 82 3.3.1 Polysilicon CT Memories with NW Diameter Comparable to Polysilicon Grain Size 82 3.3.2 Various GAA Polysilicon NW Memory Configurations 83 3.3.3 Trapping Layer Enhanced Polysilicon NW SONOS 85 3.4 Junctionless GAA CT Nanowire Memories 88 3.4.1 3D Junctionless Vertical GAA Silicon NW SONOS Memories 88 3.4.2 Junctionless GAA SONOS Silicon Nanowire on Bulk Substrate for 3D NAND Stack 91 3.4.3 Modeling Erase in Cylindrical Junctionless CT Arrays 92 3.4.4 HfO2–Si3N4 Trap Layer in Junctionless Polycrystal GAA Memory Storage 95 3.5 3D Stacked Horizontal Nanowire Single-Crystal Silicon Memory 95 3.5.1 Process for 3D Stacked Horizontal NW Single-Crystal Silicon Memory 96 3.5.2 A Stacked Horizontal NW Single-Crystal Silicon NAND Flash Memory Development 98 3.6 Vertical Single-Crystal GAA CT Nanowire Flash Technology 103 3.6.1 Overview of Vertical Flash Using GAA SONOS Nanowire Technology 103 3.6.2 Vertical Single-Crystal Silicon 3D Flash Using GAA SONOS Nanowire 103 3.6.3 Fabrication of Two Independent GAA FETs on a Vertical SiNW 104 3.6.4 Vertical 3D Silicon Nanowire CT NAND Array 106 3.7 Vertical Channel Polysilicon GAA CT Memory 107 3.7.1 Multiple Vertical GAA Flash Cells Stacked Using Polysilicon NW Channel 107 3.7.2 Vth Shift Characteristics of Vertical GAA SONOS and/or TANOS Nonvolatile Memory 109 3.7.3 GAA Vertical Pipe CT Gate Replacement Technology 111 3.7.4 Bilayer Poly Channel Vertical Flash for 3D SONOS NAND 112 3.7.5 3D Vertical Pipe CT Low-Resistance (CoSi) Word-Line NAND Flash 112 3.7.6 Vertical Channel CT 3D NAND Flash Cell 114 3.7.7 Read Sensing for Thin-Body Vertical NAND 114 3.8 Graphene Channel Nonvolatile Memory with Al2O3–HfOx–Al2O3 Storage Layer 115 3.9 Cost Analysis for 3D GAA NAND Flash Considering Channel Slope 116 References 117 4 Vertical NAND Flash 119 4.1 Overview of 3D Vertical NAND Trends 119 4.1.1 3D Nonvolatile Memory Overview 119 4.1.2 Architectures of Various 3D NAND Flash Arrays 120 4.1.3 Scaling Trends for 2D and 3D NAND Cells 122 4.2 Vertical Channel (Pipe) CT NAND Flash Technology 124 4.2.1 BiCS CT Pipe NAND Flash Technology 124 4.2.2 Pipe-Shaped BiCS (P-BiCS) NAND Flash Technology 128 4.2.3 Vertical CT Vertical Recess Array Transistor (VRAT) Technology 138 4.2.4 Z-VRAT CT Memory Technology 139 4.2.5 Vertical NAND Chains—VSAT with “PIPE” Process 141 4.2.6 Vertical CT PIPE NAND Flash with Damascene Metal Gate TCAT/VNAND 142 4.2.7 3D NAND Flash SB-CAT Stack 145 4.3 3D FG NAND Flash Cell Arrays 146 4.3.1 3D FG NAND with Extended Sidewall Control Gate 146 4.3.2 3D FG NAND with Separated-Sidewall Control Gate 149 4.3.3 3D FG NAND Flash Cell with Dual CGs and Surrounding FG (DC-SF) 152 4.3.4 3D Vertical FG NAND with Sidewall Control Pillar 155 4.3.5 Trap Characterization in 3D Vertical Channel NAND Flash 157 4.3.6 Program Disturb Characteristics of 3D Vertical NAND Flash 158 4.4 3D Stacked NAND Flash with Lateral BL Layers and Vertical Gate 159 4.4.1 Introduction to Horizontal BL and Vertical Gate NAND Flash 159 4.4.2 A 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash Process and Device Considerations 160 4.4.3 Vertical Gate NAND Flash Integration with Eight Active Layers 163 4.4.4 3D Stacked CT TFT Bandgap-Engineered SONOS NAND Flash Memory 165 4.4.5 Horizontal Channel Vertical Gate 3D NAND Flash with PN Diode Decoding 168 4.4.6 3D Vertical Gate BE-SONOS NAND Program Inhibit with Multiple Island Gate Decoding 169 4.4.7 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash BL Decoding and Page Operation 171 4.4.8 An Eight-Layer Vertical Gate 3D NAND Architecture with Split-Page BL 173 4.4.9 Various Innovations for 3D Stackable Vertical Gate 176 4.4.10 Variability Considerations in 2D Vertical Gate 3D NAND Flash 180 4.4.11 An Etching Technology for Vertical Multilayers for 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash 182 4.4.12 Interference, Disturb, and Programming Algorithms for MLC Vertical Gate NAND 183 4.4.13 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash Program and Read and Fail-Bit Detection 184 4.4.14 3D p-Channel Stackable NAND Flash with Band-to-Band Tunnel Programming 185 4.4.15 A Bit-Alterable 3D NAND Flash with n-Channel and p-Channel NAND 187 References 189 5 3D Cross-Point Array Memory 192 5.1 Overview of Cross-Point Array Memory 192 5.2 A Brief Background of Cross-Point Array Memories 193 5.2.1 Construction of a Basic Cross-Point Array 193 5.2.2 Stacking Multibit Cross-Point Arrays 194 5.2.3 Methods of Stacking Cross-Point Arrays 196 5.2.4 Stacking Cross-Point Layers for High Density 197 5.2.5 An Example of Unipolar ReRAM 198 5.2.6 An Example of a Bipolar ReRAM 199 5.2.7 Basic Cross-Point Array Operation with a Diode Selector 200 5.2.8 Early Test Chip Using a ReRAM Cross-Point Array with Diode Selector 201 5.3 Low-Resistance Interconnects for Cross-Point Arrays 203 5.3.1 Model of Low Resistance Interconnects for Cross-Point Arrays 203 5.3.2 A Cross-Point Array Grid with Low-Resistivity Nanowires 206 5.3.3 A Cross-Point Array Using Two Nickel Core Nanowires 206 5.3.4 Resistive Memory Using Single-Wall Carbon Nanotubes 207 5.4 Cross-Point Array Memories Without Cell Selectors 207 5.4.1 Early Model of Bipolar Resistive Switch in Selectorless Cross-Point Array 208 5.4.2 Sneak Path Leakage in a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 210 5.4.3 Effect of Parasitic Resistance on Maximum Size of a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 212 5.4.4 Effect of Nonlinearity on I–V Characteristics of Selectorless Memory Element 215 5.4.5 Self-Rectifying ReRAM Requirements in Cross-Point Arrays 216 5.4.6 A Cross-Point Array Model for Line Resistance and Nonlinear Devices 217 5.5 Examples of Selectorless Cross-Point Arrays 217 5.5.1 Example of Nonlinearity in a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 217 5.5.2 Example of High-Resistive Memory Element in Selectorless Cross-Point Array 218 5.5.3 Design Techniques for Nonlinear Selectorless Cross-Point Arrays Using ReRAMs 221 5.5.4 Film Thickness and Scaling Effects in Cross-Point Selectorless ReRAM 222 5.5.5 Vertical HfOx ReRAM 3D Cross-Point Array Without Cell Selector 223 5.5.6 Dopant Selection Rules for Tuning HfOx ReRAM Characteristics 224 5.5.7 High-Resistance CB-ReRAM Memory Element to Avoid Sneak Current 225 5.5.8 Electromechanical Diode Cell for a Cross-Point Nonvolatile Memory Array 226 5.6 Unipolar Resistance RAMs with Diode Selectors in Cross-Point Arrays 227 5.6.1 Overview of Unipolar ReRAMS with Diode Selectors in Cross-Point Arrays 227 5.6.2 A Unipolar ReRAM with Silicon Diode for Cross-Point Array 228 5.6.3 CuOx–InZnOx Heterojunction Thin-Film Diode with NiO ReRAM 230 5.6.4 Unipolar NiO ReRAM Ireset and SET–RESET Instability 232 5.6.5 HfOx–AlOy Unipolar ReRAM with Silicon Diode Selector in Cross-Point Array 232 5.6.6 TiN–TaOx–Pt MIM Selector for Pt–TaOx–Pt Unipolar ReRAM Cross-Point Array 234 5.6.7 Self-Rectifying Unipolar Ni–HfOx Schottky Barrier ReRAM 234 5.6.8 Schottky Barriers for Self-Rectifying Unidirectional Cross-Point Array 236 5.6.9 Thermally Induced Set Operation for Unipolar ReRAM with Diode Selector 237 5.7 Unipolar PCM with Two-Terminal Diodes for Cross-Point Array 238 5.7.1 Background of Phase-Change Memory in a Cross-Point Array 238 5.7.2 PCMs in Cross-Point Arrays with Polysilicon Diodes 239 5.7.3 Cross-Point Array with PCM and Carbon Nanotube Electrode 240 5.7.4 Cross-Point Array with MIEC Access Devices and PCM Elements 241 5.7.5 Threshold Switching Access Devices for ReRAM Cross-Point Arrays 243 5.7.6 p–n Diode Selection Devices for PCM 244 5.7.7 Epitaxial Diode Selector for PCM in Cross-Point Arrays 245 5.7.8 Dual-Trench Epitaxial Diode Array for High-Density PCM 245 5.8 Bipolar Resistance RAMS With Selector Devices in Cross-Point Arrays 246 5.8.1 VO2 Select Device for Bipolar ReRAM in Cross-Point Array 246 5.8.2 Threshold Select Devices for Bipolar Memory Elements in Cross-Point Arrays 246 5.8.3 Vertical Bipolar Switching Polysilicon n–p–n Diode for Cross-Point Array 249 5.8.4 Two-Terminal Diode Steering Element for 3D Cross-Point ReRAM Array 250 5.8.5 Varistor-Type Bidirectional Switch for 3D Bipolar ReRAM Array 250 5.8.6 Bidirectional Threshold Vacuum Switch for 3D 4F2 Cross-Point Array 251 5.8.7 Bidirectional Schottky Diode Selector 252 5.8.8 Bipolar ReRAM with Schottky Self-Rectifying Behavior in the LRS 254 5.8.9 Self-Rectifying Bipolar ReRAM Using Schottky Barrier at Ta–TaOx Interface 255 5.8.10 Diode Effect of Pt–In2Ga2ZnO7 Layer in TiO2-type ReRAM 255 5.8.11 Confined NbO2 as a Selector in Bipolar ReRAMs 256 5.9 Complementary Switching Devices and Arrays 256 5.9.1 Complementary Resistive Switching for Dense Crossbar Arrays 256 5.9.2 CRS Memory Using Amorphous Carbon and CNTs 257 5.9.3 Complementary Switching in Metal–Oxide ReRAM for Crossbar Arrays 259 5.9.4 CRSs Using a Heterodevice 260 5.9.5 Self-Selective W–VO2–Pt ReRAM to Reduce Sneak Current in ReRAM Arrays 261 5.9.6 Hybrid Nb2O5–NbO2 ReRAMwith Combined Memory and Selector 263 5.9.7 Analysis of Complementary ReRAM Switching 264 5.9.8 Complementary Stacked Bipolar ReRAM Cross-Point Arrays 266 5.9.9 Complementary Switching Oxide-Based Bipolar ReRAM 266 5.10 Toward Manufacturable ReRAM Cells and Cross-point Arrays 267 5.10.1 28 nm ReRAM and Diode Cross-Point Array in CMOS-Compatible Process 267 5.10.2 Double-Layer 3D Vertical ReRAM for High-Density Arrays 268 5.10.3 Study of Cell Performance for Different Stacked ReRAM Geometries 269 5.11 STT Magnetic Tunnel Junction Resistance Switches in Cross-Point Array Architecture 269 5.11.1 High-Density Cross-Point STT Magnetic Tunnel Junction Architecture 269 References 271 6 3D Stacking of RAM–Processor Chips Using TSV 275 6.1 Overview of 3D Stacking of RAM–Processor Chips with TSV 275 6.2 Architecture and Design of TSV RAM–Processor Chips 280 6.2.1 Overview of Architecture and Design of Vertical TSV Connected Chips 280 6.2.2 Repartitioning For Performance by Increasing the Number of Memory Banks 280 6.2.3 Using a Global Clock Distribution Technique to Improve Performance 282 6.2.4 Stacking eDRAM Cache and Processor for Improved Performance 282 6.2.5 Using Decoupling Scheduling of the Memory Controller to Improve Performance 283 6.2.6 Repartitioning Multicore Processors and Stacked RAM for Improved Performance 283 6.2.7 Increasing Performance and Lowering Power in Low-Power Mobile Systems 287 6.2.8 Increasing Performance of Memory Hierarchies with 3D TSV Integration 287 6.2.9 Adding Storage-Class Memory to the Memory Hierarchy 289 6.2.10 Improving Performance Using 3D Stacked RAM Modeling 290 6.3 Process and Fabrication of Vertical TSV for Memory and Logic 292 6.3.1 Passive TSV Interposers for Stacked Memory–Logic Integration 292 6.3.2 Process Fabrication Methods and Foundries for Early 2.5D and 3D Integration 295 6.3.3 Integration with TSV Using a High-κ–Metal Gate CMOS Process 296 6.3.4 Processor with Deep Trench DRAM TSV Stacks and High-κ–Metal Gate 297 6.4 Process and Fabrication Issues of TSV 3D Stacking Technology 299 6.4.1 Using Copper TSV for 3D Stacking 299 6.4.2 Air Gaps for High-Performance TSV Interconnects for 3D ICs 300 6.5 Fabrication of TSVs 301 6.5.1 Using TSVs at Various Stages in the Process 301 6.5.2 Stacked Chips using Via-Middle Technology 303 6.6 Energy Efficiency Considerations of 3D Stacked Memory–Logic Chip Systems 306 6.6.1 Overview of Energy Efficiency in 3D Stacked Memory–Logic Chip Systems 306 6.6.2 Energy Efficiency for a 3D TSV Integrated DRAM–Controller System 306 6.6.3 Adding an SRAM Row Cache to Stacked 3D DRAM to Minimize Energy 308 6.6.4 Power Delivery Networks in 3D ICs 311 6.6.5 Using Near-Threshold Computing for Power Reduction in a 3D TSV System 312 6.7 Thermal Characterization Analysis and Modeling of RAM–Logic Stacks 314 6.7.1 Thermal Management of Hot Spots in 3D Chips 314 6.7.2 Thermal Management in 3D Chips Using an Interposer with Embedded TSV 314 6.7.3 Thermal Management of TSV DRAM Stacks with Logic 314 6.7.4 Thermal Management of a 3D TSV SRAM on Logic Stack 316 6.8 Testing of 3D Stacked TSV System Chips 316 6.8.1 Using BIST to Reduce Testing for a Logic and DRAM System Stack 316 6.8.2 Efficient BISR and Redundancy Allocation in 3D RAM–Logic Stacks 316 6.8.3 Direct Testing of Early SDRAM Stacks 319 6.9 Reliability Considerations with 3D TSV RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.1 Overview of Reliability Issues in 3D TSV Stacked RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.2 Variation Issues in Stacked 3D TSV RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.3 Switching and Decoupling Noise in a 3D TSV-Based System 321 6.9.4 TSV-Induced Mechanical Stress in CMOS 324 6.10 Reconfiguring Stacked TSV Memory Architectures for Improved Performance 326 6.10.1 Overview of Potential for Reconfigured Stacked Architectures 326 6.10.2 3D TSV-based 3D SRAM for High-Performance Platforms 326 6.10.3 Waveform Capture with 100 GB/s I/O, 4096 TSVs and an Active Si Interposer 329 6.10.4 3D Stacked FPGA and ReRAM Configuration Memory 330 6.10.5 Cache Architecture to Configure Stacked DRAM to Specific Applications 330 6.10.6 Network Platform for Stacked Memory–Processor Architectures 331 6.10.7 Multiplexing Signals to Reduce Number of TSVs in IC Die Stacking 332 6.10.8 3D Hybrid Cache with MRAM and SRAM Stacked on Processor Cores 333 6.10.9 CMOS FPGA and Routing Switches Made with ReRAM Devices 333 6.10.10 Dynamic Configurable SRAM Stacked with Various Logic Chips 333 6.11 Stacking Memories Using Noncontact Connections with Inductive Coupling 333 6.11.1 Overview of Noncontact Inductive Coupling of Stacked Memory 333 6.11.2 Early Concepts of Inductive-Coupling Connections of Stacked Memory Chips 334 6.11.3 Evolution of Inductive-Coupling Connections of NAND Flash Stacks 336 6.11.4 TCI for Replacing Stacking with TSV Connections 338 6.11.5 Processor–SRAM 3D Integration Using Inductive Coupling 339 6.11.6 Optical Interface for Future 3D Stacked Chip Connections 339 References 340 Index 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisEssentials of Machine Olfaction and Taste This book provides a valuable information source for olfaction and taste which includes a comprehensive and timely overview of the current state of knowledge of use for olfaction and taste machines Presents original, latest research in the field, with an emphasis on the recent development of human interfacingCovers the full range of artificial chemical senses including olfaction and taste, from basic through to advanced levelTimely project in that mobile robots, olfactory displays and odour recorders are currently under research, driven by commercial demandTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Contributors xiii 1 Introduction to Essentials of Machine Olfaction and Tastes 1Takamichi Nakamoto 2 Physiology of Chemical Sense and its Biosensor Application 3Ryohei Kanzaki, Kei Nakatani, Takeshi Sakurai, Nobuo Misawa and Hidefumi Mitsuno 2.1 Introduction 3 2.2 Olfaction and Taste of Insects 4 2.2.1 Olfaction 4 2.2.1.1 Anatomy of Olfaction 4 2.2.1.2 Signal Transduction of Odor Signals 6 2.2.1.3 Molecular Biology of Olfaction 7 2.2.2 Taste 8 2.2.2.1 Anatomy of Taste 8 2.2.2.2 Molecular Biology and Signal Transduction of Taste 9 2.3 Olfaction and Taste of Vertebrate 11 2.3.1 Olfaction 11 2.3.1.1 Anatomy of Olfaction 11 2.3.1.2 Transduction of Odor Signals 12 2.3.1.3 Molecular Biology of Olfaction 15 2.3.2 Taste 17 2.3.2.1 Anatomy of Taste 17 2.3.2.2 Transduction of Taste Signals 18 2.3.2.3 Molecular Biology of Taste 20 2.4 Cell‐Based Sensors and Receptor‐Based Sensors 21 2.4.1 Tissue‐Based Sensors 23 2.4.2 Cell‐Based Sensors 26 2.4.3 Receptor‐Based Sensors 30 2.4.3.1 Production of Odorant Receptors 34 2.4.3.2 Immobilization of Odorant Receptors 35 2.4.3.3 Measurement from Odorant Receptors 36 2.4.4 Summary of the Biosensors 41 2.5 Future Prospects 42 References 43 3 Large‐Scale Chemical Sensor Arrays for Machine Olfaction 49Mara Bernabei, Simone Pantalei and Krishna C. Persaud 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Overview of Artificial Olfactory Systems 50 3.3 Common Sensor Technologies Employed in Artificial Olfactory Systems 53 3.3.1 Metal‐Oxide Gas Sensors 53 3.3.2 Piezoelectric Sensors 54 3.3.3 Conducting Polymer Sensors 55 3.4 Typical Application of “Electronic Nose” Technologies 58 3.5 A Comparison between Artificial and the Biological Olfaction Systems 58 3.6 A Large‐Scale Sensor Array 59 3.6.1 Conducting Polymers 60 3.6.2 Sensor Interrogation Strategy 62 3.6.3 Sensor Substrate 64 3.7 Characterization of the Large‐Scale Sensor Array 68 3.7.1 Pure Analyte Study: Classification and Quantification Capability 69 3.7.2 Binary Mixture Study: Segmentation and Background Suppression Capability 75 3.7.3 Polymer Classes: Testing Broad and Overlapping Sensitivity, High Level of Redundancy 76 3.7.4 System Robustness and Long‐Term Stability 77 3.8 Conclusions 79 Acknowledgment80 References 80 4 Taste Sensor: Electronic Tongue with Global Selectivity 87Kiyoshi Toko, Yusuke Tahara, Masaaki Habara, Yoshikazu Kobayashi and Hidekazu Ikezaki 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Electronic Tongues 90 4.3 Taste Sensor 92 4.3.1 Introduction 92 4.3.2 Principle 93 4.3.3 Response Mechanism 93 4.3.4 Measurement Procedure 97 4.3.5 Sensor Design Techniques 98 4.3.6 Basic Characteristics 103 4.3.6.1 Threshold 106 4.3.6.2 Global Selectivity 106 4.3.6.3 High Correlation with Human Sensory Scores 108 4.3.6.4 Definition of Taste Information 109 4.3.6.5 Detection of Interactions between Taste Substances 110 4.3.7 Sample Preparation 111 4.3.8 Analysis 112 4.4 Taste Substances Adsorbed on the Membrane 116 4.5 Miniaturized Taste Sensor 117 4.6 Pungent Sensor 122 4.7 Application to Foods and Beverages 124 4.7.1 Introduction 124 4.7.2 Beer 124 4.7.3 Coffee 127 4.7.4 Meat 132 4.7.5 Combinatorial Optimization Technique for Ingredients and Qualities Using a GA 134 4.7.5.2 Ga 134 4.7.5.3 Constrained Nonlinear Optimization 137 4.7.6 For More Effective Use of “Taste Information” 137 4.7.6.1 Key Concept 138 4.7.6.2 Taste Attributes or Qualities become Understandable and Translatable When They Are Simplified 138 4.7.6.3 Simplification of Large Numbers of Molecules into a Couple of Taste Qualities Allows Mathematical Optimization 140 4.7.6.4 Summary 141 4.8 Application to Medicines 141 4.8.1 Introduction 141 4.8.2 Bitterness Evaluation of APIs and Suppression Effect of Formulations 141 4.8.3 Development of Bitterness Sensor for Pharmaceutical Formulations 143 4.8.3.1 Sensor Design 143 4.8.3.2 Prediction of Bitterness Intensity and Threshold 144 4.8.3.3 Applications to Orally Disintegrating Tablets 146 4.8.3.4 Response Mechanism to APIs 154 4.8.4 Evaluation of Poorly Water‐Soluble Drugs 156 4.9 Perspectives 160 References 163 5 Pattern Recognition 175Saverio De Vito, Matteo Falasconi and Matteo Pardo 5.1 Introduction 175 5.2 Application Frameworks and Their Challenges 176 5.2.1 Common Challenges 176 5.2.2 Static In‐Lab Applications 177 5.2.3 On‐Field Applications 178 5.3 Unsupervised Learning and Data Exploration 180 5.3.1 Feature Extraction: Static and Dynamic Characteristics 180 5.3.2 Exploratory Data Analysis 184 5.3.3 Cluster Analysis 189 5.4 Supervised Learning 190 5.4.1 Classification: Detection and Discrimination of Analytes and Mixtures of Volatiles 192 5.4.2 Regression: Machine Olfaction Quantification Problems and Solutions 196 5.4.3 Feature Selection 200 5.5 Advanced Topics 202 5.5.1 System Instability Compensation 202 5.5.2 Calibration Transfer 208 5.6 Conclusions 210 References 211 6 Using Chemical Sensors as “Noses” for Mobile Robots 219Hiroshi Ishida, Achim J. Lilienthal, Haruka Matsukura, Victor Hernandez Bennetts and Erik Schaffernicht 6.1 Introduction 219 6.2 Task Descriptions 220 6.2.1 Definitions of Tasks 220 6.2.2 Characteristics of Turbulent Chemical Plumes 222 6.3 Robots and Sensors 224 6.3.1 Sensors for Gas Detection 224 6.3.2 Airflow Sensing 225 6.3.3 Robot Platforms 226 6.4 Characterization of Environments 226 6.5 Case Studies 230 6.5.1 Chemical Trail Following 230 6.5.2 Chemotactic Search versus Anemotactic Approach 232 6.5.3 Attempts to Improve Gas Source Localization Robots 236 6.5.4 Flying, Swimming, and Burrowing Robots 238 6.5.5 Gas Distribution Mapping 239 6.6 Future Prospective 241 Acknowledgment242 References 242 7 Olfactory Display and Odor Recorder 247Takamichi Nakamoto 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Principle of Olfactory Display 247 7.2.1 Olfactory Display Device 248 7.2.2 Olfactory Display Related to Spatial Distribution of Odor 250 7.2.3 Temporal Intensity Change of Odor 251 7.2.3.1 Problem of Smell Persistence 251 7.2.3.2 Olfactory Display Using Inkjet Device 254 7.2.4 Multicomponent Olfactory Display 256 7.2.4.1 Mass Flow Controller 256 7.2.4.2 Automatic Sampler 256 7.2.4.3 Solenoid Valve 258 7.2.4.4 Micropumps and Surface Acoustic Wave Atomizer 260 7.2.5 Cross Modality Interaction 261 7.3 Application of Olfactory Display 263 7.3.1 Entertainment 263 7.3.2 Olfactory Art 265 7.3.3 Advertisement 266 7.3.4 Medical Field 266 7.4 Odor Recorder 267 7.4.1 Background of Odor Recorder 267 7.4.2 Principle of Odor Recorder 268 7.4.3 Mixture Quantification Method 271 7.5.1 Odor Approximation 274 7.5.2 MIMO Feedback Method 276 7.5.3 Method to Increase Number of Odor Components 278 7.5.3.1 SVD Method 278 7.5.3.2 Two‐Level Quantization Method 280 7.5.4 Dynamic Method 283 7.5.4.1 Real‐Time Reference Method 284 7.5.4.2 Concurrent Method 287 7.5.5 Mixture Quantification Using Huge Number of Odor Candidates 289 7.6 Exploration of Odor Components 292 7.6.1 Introduction of Odor Components 292 7.6.2 Procedure for Odor Approximation 293 7.6.3 Simulation of Odor Approximation 295 7.6.4 Experiment on Essential Oil Approximation 297 7.6.5 Comparison of Distance Measure 301 7.6.6 Improvement of Odor Approximation 303 7.7 Teleolfaction 305 7.7.1 Concept of Teleolfaction 305 7.7.2 Implementation of Teleolfaction System 306 7.7.3 Experiment on Teleolfaction 307 7.8 Summary 308 References 309 8 Summary and Future Perspectives 315Takamichi Nakamoto Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps readers understand and appreciate what the history of wind power can teach us about technology innovation and provides the implications for both wind power today and its future This book takes readers on a journey through the history of wind power in order to show how the technology evolved over the course of the twentieth century and where it may be headed in the twenty-first century. It introduces and examines broad themes such as government funding of wind power, the role of fossil fuels in wind power development, and the importance of entrepreneurs in wind power development. It also discusses the lessons learned from wind power technology innovation and makes them relevant to the understanding of wind power today and in the future. Spanning the entire history of wind power (1888-2018), The Wind Power Story: A Century of Innovation that Reshaped the Global Energy Landscape provides balanced coverage of each decade as well as the important wind poTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 The Wind Power Pioneers 1 1.1 Work of the Devil 1 1.2 The Danish Edison 7 1.3 The War of the Currents 12 1.4 The Colorado Connection 14 2 The Age of Small Wind 19 2.1 Networks of Power 19 2.2 An Interesting Twist 22 2.3 The Savior of the Windmills 25 2.4 From the Arctic to Antarctica 27 2.5 Rural Electrification 32 3 The Birth of Big Wind 37 3.1 The High Altitude Turbogenerator 37 3.2 The Soviets Advance 42 3.3 Victory 46 4 Wind Power's Giant Leap 53 4.1 The Winds of Cape Cod 53 4.2 Grandpa's Knob 58 4.3 A Dream Realized 60 4.4 A Lesson in Economics 63 5 Wind Power in the Wake of War 67 5.1 The Wind Power Aerogenerator 67 5.2 The Search for Tomorrow 72 5.3 The British Experiments 73 5.4 The Wind Power Schism 77 6 Wind Power's Invisible Solution 83 6.1 The Death of Windmills 83 6.2 The Return of Johannes Juul 88 6.3 Learning to Stall 91 6.4 Gedser Economics 95 7 The French Connection 101 7.1 The Duke's Invention 101 7.2 The Seeker 106 7.3 The Neyrpic Wind Turbines 110 8 Germany's Timeless Beauty 115 8.1 Wind Power in Wartime 115 8.2 Lighting Neuwerk Island 117 8.3 The Aesthete 119 8.4 The Blade Breakthrough 122 9 Wind Power's Silent Decade 129 9.1 The Pope's Speech 129 9.2 Silent Spring 134 9.3 The Gathering Storm 138 10 America's Next Moonshot 143 10.1 The Energy Crisis 143 10.2 Back to Ohio 148 10.3 The Turning Point 152 11 Denmark Reinvents Wind Power 159 11.1 Feared to Freeze 159 11.2 More Than a Carpenter 162 11.3 Let 100 Windmills Bloom 166 11.4 From Blacksmiths to Businessmen 168 12 The Wind King 175 12.1 Heronemus's Dream 175 12.2 California's Soft Energy Path 180 12.3 This Is the Place! 185 13 The California Wind Rush 191 13.1 The Deluge 191 13.2 The Danish Invasion 194 13.3 Brand New Day 199 14 Germany's Giant 207 14.1 Ulrich Hutter Returns 207 14.2 Bottoms Up 215 14.3 Our Common Future 218 15 Spain's Wind Power Miracle 223 15.1 A Hot Day in Madrid 223 15.2 Wind Policy Push 228 15.3 Denmark's Design 229 16 Europe Sails Ahead 237 16.1 Wind Power Reincarnated 237 16.2 The Wind Power Wizard 242 16.3 The Wind Virus 246 17 Reigniting American Wind Power 253 17.1 Picking up the Pieces 253 17.2 Iowa Innovates 257 17.3 The Selfish Invention 262 18 India's Wind Power Path 269 18.1 Coping with the Crisis 269 18.2 A Star Is Born 274 18.3 Gamesa Gets It 278 18.4 The Path Forward 279 19 China's Wind Power Surge 285 19.1 The Birth of Goldwind 285 19.2 The Rise of Sinovel 289 19.3 The Year of Adjustment 293 19.4 Sinovel's Stall 297 19.5 Recalibration 300 20 The Globalization of Wind Power 307 20.1 Into the Fire 307 20.2 The Final Frontier 311 20.3 A Stable Sunset 314 20.4 Around the World 317 20.5 The Tipping Point 318 20.6 Back to the Future 321 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Handbook of Global Media and Communication Policy offers insights into the boundaries of this field of study, assesses why it is important, who is affected, and with what political, economic, social and cultural consequences.Table of ContentsFigures and Tables viii About the Editors x Notes on Contributors xi Series Editor’s Preface xvi Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction: Foundations of the Theory and Practice of Global Media and Communication Policy 1Robin Mansell and Marc Raboy Part I Contested Concepts: An Emerging Field 21 2 The Origins of International Agreements and Global Media: The Post, the Telegraph, and Wireless Communication Before World War I 23Ted Magder 3 The Evolution of GMCP Institutions 40Don MacLean 4 Whose Global Village? 58William H. Melody 5 Free Flow Doctrine in Global Media Policy 79Kaarle Nordenstreng 6 Human Rights and Their Role in Global Media and Communication Discourses 95Rikke Frank Jørgensen 7 Policy’s Hubris: Power, Fantasy, and the Limits of (Global) Media Policy Interventions 113Nico Carpentier Part II Democratization: Policy in Practice 129 8 Power Dynamics in Multi-stakeholder Policy Processes and Intra-civil Society Networking 131Bart Cammaerts 9 Media Reform in the United States and Canada: Activism and Advocacy for Media Policies in the Public Interest 147Leslie Regan Shade 10 Community Media in a Globalized World: The Relevance and Resilience of Local Radio 166Kate Coyer 11 Global Media Policy and Crisis States 180Monroe E. Price 12 The Post-Soviet Media and Communication Policy Landscape: The Case of Russia 192Andrei Richter 13 Public Service Broadcasting: Product (and Victim?) of Public Policy 210Karol Jakubowicz 14 User Rights for the Internet Age: Communications Policy According to “Netizens” 230Arne Hintz and Stefania Milan Part III Cultural Diversity: Contesting Power 243 15 Media Research and Public Policy: Tiding Over the Rupture 245Biswajit Das and Vibodh Parthasarathi 16 Whose Democracy? Rights-based Discourse and Global Intellectual Property Rights Activism 261Boatema Boateng 17 Global Media Policy and Cultural Pluralism 276Karim H. Karim 18 The Emergent Supranational Arab Media Policy Sphere 293Marwan M. Kraidy 19 The Mediterranean Arab Mosaic between Free Press Development and Unequal Exchanges with the “North” 306Jamal Eddine Naji 20 Rethinking Communication for Development Policy: Some Considerations 319Linje Manyozo 21 The UNESCO Convention on Cultural Diversity: Cultural Policy and International Trade in Cultural Products 336Peter S. Grant Part IV Markets and Globality 353 22 Economic Approaches to Media Policy 355Robert G. Picard 23 Postcolonial Media Policy Under the Long Shadow of Empire 366Amin Alhassan and Paula Chakravartty 24 Policy Imperialism: Bilateral Trade Agreements as Instruments of Media Governance 383Andrew Calabrese and Marco Briziarelli 25 ICT Policy-making and International Trade Agreements in the Caribbean 395Hopeton S. Dunn 26 Legislation, Regulation, and Management in the South African Broadcasting Landscape: A Case Study of the South African Broadcasting Corporation 414Ruth Teer-Tomaselli 27 Regulation as Linguistic Engineering 432Roberta G. Lentz Part V Governance: New Policy and Research Challenges 449 28 Gender and Communication Policy: Struggling for Space 451Margaret Gallagher 29 The Environment and Global Media and Communication Policy 467Richard Maxwell and Toby Miller 30 Anti-terrorism and the Harmonization of Media and Communication Policy 486Sandra Braman 31 Regulating the Internet in the Interests of Children: Emerging European and International Approaches 505Sonia Livingstone 32 From Television without Frontiers to the Digital Big Bang: The EU’s Continuous Efforts to Create a Future-proof Internal Media Market 525Caroline Pauwels and Karen Donders 33 Actors and Interactions in Global Communication Governance: The Heuristic Potential of a Network Approach 543Claudia Padovani and Elena Pavan Index 564

Read more less

Book SynopsisPower systems worldwide are going through a paradigm shift from centralized generation to distributed generation. This book presents the SYNDEM (i.e., synchronized and democratized) grid architecture and its technical routes to harmonize the integration of renewable energy sources, electric vehicles, storage systems, and flexible loads, with the synchronization mechanism of synchronous machines, to enable autonomous operation of power systems, and to promote energy freedom. This is a game changer for the grid. It is the sort of breakthrough like the touch screen in smart phones that helps to push an industry from one era to the next, as reported by Keith Schneider, a New York Times correspondent since 1982. This book contains an introductory chapter and additional 24 chapters in five parts: Theoretical Framework, First-Generation VSM (virtual synchronous machines), Second-Generation VSM, Third-Generation VSM, and Case Studies. Most of the chapters include experimental results. As the first book of its kind for power electronics-enabled autonomous power systems, it introduces a holistic architecture applicable to both large and small power systems, including aircraft power systems, ship power systems, microgrids, and supergrids provides latest research to address the unprecedented challenges faced by power systems and to enhance grid stability, reliability, security, resiliency, and sustainability demonstrates how future power systems achieve harmonious interaction, prevent local faults from cascading into wide-area blackouts, and operate autonomously with minimized cyber-attacks highlights the significance of the SYNDEM concept for power systems and beyond Power Electronics-Enabled Autonomous Power Systems is an excellent book for researchers, engineers, and students involved in energy and power systems, electrical and control engineering, and power electronics. The SYNDEM theoretical framework chapter is also suitable for policy makers, legislators, entrepreneurs, commissioners of utility commissions, energy and environmental agency staff, utility personnel, investors, consultants, and attorneys.Table of ContentsList of Figures xix List of Tables xxxiii Foreword xxxv Preface xxxvii Acknowledgments xxxix About the Author xli List of Abbreviations xliii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation and Purpose 1 1.2 Outline of the Book 3 1.3 Evolution of Power Systems 7 1.3.1 Today’s Grids 8 1.3.2 Smart Grids 8 1.3.3 Next-Generation Smart Grids 8 1.4 Summary 10 Part I Theoretical Framework 11 2 Synchronized and Democratized (SYNDEM) Smart Grid 13 2.1 The SYNDEM Concept 13 2.2 SYNDEM Rule of Law – Synchronization Mechanism of Synchronous Machines 15 2.3 SYNDEM Legal Equality – Homogenizing Heterogeneous Players as Virtual Synchronous Machines (VSM) 18 2.4 SYNDEM Grid Architecture 19 2.4.1 Architecture of Electrical Systems 19 2.4.2 Overall Architecture 22 2.4.3 Typical Scenarios 23 2.5 Potential Benefits 24 2.6 Brief Description of Technical Routes 28 2.6.1 The First-Generation (1G) VSM 28 2.6.2 The Second-Generation (2G) VSM 29 2.6.3 The Third-Generation (3G) VSM 29 2.7 Primary Frequency Response (PFR) in a SYNDEM Smart Grid 30 2.7.1 PFR from both Generators and Loads 31 2.7.2 Droop 31 2.7.3 Fast Action Without Delay 31 2.7.4 Reconfigurable Virtual Inertia 31 2.7.5 Continuous PFR 32 2.8 SYNDEM Roots 32 2.8.1 SYNDEM and Taoism 32 2.8.2 SYNDEM and Chinese History 33 2.9 Summary 34 3 Ghost Power Theory 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Ghost Operator, Ghost Signal, and Ghost System 36 3.2.1 The Ghost Operator 36 3.2.2 The Ghost Signal 37 3.2.3 The Ghost System 39 3.3 Physical Meaning of Reactive Power in Electrical Systems 41 3.4 Extension to Complete the Electrical-Mechanical Analogy 43 3.5 Generalization to Other Energy Systems 46 3.6 Summary and Discussions 47 Part II 1G VSM: Synchronverters 49 4 Synchronverter Based Generation 51 4.1 Mathematical Model of Synchronous Generatorss 51 4.1.1 The Electrical Part 51 4.1.2 The Mechanical Part 53 4.1.3 Presence of a Neutral Line 54 4.2 Implementation of a Synchronverter 55 4.2.1 The Power Part 56 4.2.2 The Electronic Part 56 4.3 Operation of a Synchronverter 57 4.3.1 Regulation of Real Power and Frequency Droop Control 57 4.3.2 Regulation of Reactive Power and Voltage Droop Control 58 4.4 Simulation Results 59 4.4.1 Under Different Grid Frequencies 60 4.4.2 Under Different Load Conditions 62 4.5 Experimental Results 62 4.5.1 Grid-connected Set Mode 63 4.5.2 Grid-connected Droop Mode 63 4.5.3 Grid-connected Parallel Operation 63 4.5.4 Seamless Transfer of the Operation Mode 64 4.6 Summary 67 5 Synchronverter Based Loads 69 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Modeling of a Synchronous Motor 70 5.3 Operation of a PWM Rectifier as a VSM 71 5.3.1 Controlling the Power 72 5.3.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 73 5.4 Simulation Results 74 5.4.1 Controlling the Power 74 5.4.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 76 5.5 Experimental Results 77 5.5.1 Controlling the Power 77 5.5.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 77 5.6 Summary 79 6 Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator (PMSG) Based Wind Turbines 81 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 PMSG Based Wind Turbines 83 6.3 Control of the Rotor-Side Converter 83 6.4 Control of the Grid-Side Converter 85 6.5 Real-time Simulation Results 86 6.5.1 Under Normal Grid Conditions 87 6.5.2 Under Grid Faults 89 6.6 Summary 90 7 Synchronverter Based AC Ward Leonard Drive Systems 91 7.1 Introduction 91 7.2 Ward Leonard Drive Systems 93 7.3 Model of a Synchronous Generator 95 7.4 Control Scheme with a Speed Sensor 96 7.4.1 Control Structure 96 7.4.2 System Analysis and Parameter Selection 97 7.5 Control Scheme without a Speed Sensor 98 7.5.1 Control Structure 98 7.5.2 System Analysis and Parameter Selection 99 7.6 Experimental Results 100 7.6.1 Case 1: With a Speed Sensor for Feedback 101 7.6.2 Case 2: Without a Speed Sensor for Feedback 104 7.7 Summary 106 8 Synchronverter without a Dedicated Synchronization Unit 107 8.1 Introduction 107 8.2 Interaction of a Synchronous Generator (SG) with an Infinite Bus 109 8.3 Controller for a Self-synchronized Synchronverter 110 8.3.1 Operation after Connection to the Grid 112 8.3.2 Synchronization before Connection to the Grid 113 8.4 Simulation Results 114 8.4.1 Normal Operation 114 8.4.2 Operation under Grid Faults 118 8.5 Experimental Results 119 8.5.1 Case 1: With the Grid Frequency Below 50 Hz 119 8.5.2 Case 2: With the Grid Frequency Above 50 Hz 123 8.6 Benefits of Removing the Synchronization Unit 123 8.7 Summary 124 9 Synchronverter Based Loads without a Dedicated Synchronisation Unit 125 9.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 125 9.1.1 Self-synchronization 125 9.1.2 Normal Operation 126 9.2 Controlling the Power 127 9.3 Simulation Results 127 9.3.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 128 9.3.2 Controlling the Power 130 9.4 Experimental Results 131 9.4.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 132 9.4.2 Controlling the Power 132 9.5 Summary 134 10 Control of a DFIG Based Wind Turbine as a VSG (DFIG-VSG) 135 10.1 Introduction 135 10.2 DFIG Based Wind Turbines 137 10.3 Differential Gears and Ancient Chinese South-pointing Chariots 138 10.4 Analogy between a DFIG and Differential Gears 139 10.5 Control of a Grid-side Converter 140 10.5.1 DC-bus Voltage Control 141 10.5.2 Unity Power Factor Control 141 10.5.3 Self-synchronization 142 10.6 Control of the Rotor-Side Converter 142 10.6.1 Frequency Control 143 10.6.2 Voltage Control 143 10.6.3 Self-synchronization 144 10.7 Regulation of System Frequency and Voltage 145 10.8 Simulation Results 146 10.9 Experimental Results 150 10.10 Summary 153 11 Synchronverter Based Transformerless Photovoltaic Systems 155 11.1 Introduction 155 11.2 Leakage Currents and Grounding of Grid-tied Converters 156 11.2.1 Ground, Grounding, and Grounded Systems 156 11.2.2 Leakage Currents in a Grid-tied Converter 158 11.2.3 Benefits of Providing a Common AC and DC Ground 159 11.3 Operation of a Conventional Half-bridge Inverter 160 11.3.1 Reduction of Leakage Currents 161 11.3.2 Output Voltage Range 161 11.4 A Transformerless PV Inverter 161 11.4.1 Topology 161 11.4.2 Control of the Neutral Leg 161 11.4.3 Control of the Inversion Leg as a VSM 164 11.5 Real-time Simulation Results 165 11.6 Summary 167 12 Synchronverter Based STATCOM without an Dedicated Synchronization Unit 169 12.1 Introduction 169 12.2 Conventional Control of STATCOM 170 12.2.1 Operational Principles 171 12.2.2 Typical Control Strategy 172 12.3 Synchronverter Based Control 173 12.3.1 Regulation of the DC-bus Voltage and Synchronization with the Grid 173 12.3.2 Operation in the Q-mode to Regulate the Reactive Power 175 12.3.3 Operation in the V-mode to Regulate the PCC Voltage 176 12.3.4 Operation in the VD-mode to Droop the Voltage 176 12.4 Simulation Results 177 12.4.1 System Description 177 12.4.2 Connection to the Grid 179 12.4.3 Normal Operation in Different Modes 180 12.4.4 Operation under Extreme Conditions 181 12.5 Summary 185 13 Synchronverters with Bounded Frequency and Voltage 187 13.1 Introduction 187 13.2 Model of the Original Synchronverter 188 13.3 Achieving Bounded Frequency and Voltage 189 13.3.1 Control Design 190 13.3.2 Existence of a Unique Equilibrium 193 13.3.3 Convergence to the Equilibrium 197 13.4 Real-time Simulation Results 199 13.5 Summary 202 14 Virtual Inertia, Virtual Damping, and Fault Ride-through 203 14.1 Introduction 203 14.2 Inertia, the Inertia Time Constant, and the Inertia Constant 204 14.3 Limitation of the Inertia of a Synchronverter 206 14.4 Reconfiguration of the Inertia Time Constant 210 14.4.1 Design and Outcome 210 14.4.2 What is the Catch? 211 14.5 Reconfiguration of the Virtual Damping 212 14.5.1 Through Impedance Scaling with an Inner-loop Voltage Controller 213 14.5.2 Through Impedance Insertion with an Inner-loop Current Controller 214 14.6 Fault Ride-through 214 14.6.1 Analysis 214 14.6.2 Recommended Design 215 14.7 Simulation Results 215 14.7.1 A Single VSM 216 14.7.2 Two VSMs in Parallel Operation 217 14.8 Experimental Results 221 14.8.1 A Single VSM 221 14.8.2 Two VSMs in Parallel Operation 222 14.9 Summary 225 Part III 2G VSM: Robust Droop Controller 227 15 Synchronization Mechanism of Droop Control 229 15.1 Brief Review of Phase-Locked Loops (PLLs) 229 15.1.1 Basic PLL 229 15.1.2 Enhanced PLL (EPLL) 230 15.2 Brief Review of Droop Control 232 15.3 Structural Resemblance between Droop Control and PLL 234 15.3.1 When the Impedance is Inductive 234 15.3.2 When the Impedance is Resistive 236 15.4 Operation of a Droop Controller as a Synchronization Unit 238 15.5 Experimental Results 239 15.5.1 Synchronization with the Grid 239 15.5.2 Connection to the Grid 240 15.5.3 Operation in the Droop Mode 241 15.5.4 Robustness of Synchronization 241 15.5.5 Change in the Operation Mode 242 15.6 Summary 243 16 Robust Droop Control 245 16.1 Control of Inverter Output Impedance 245 16.1.1 Inverters with Inductive Output Impedances (L-inverters) 245 16.1.2 Inverters with Resistive Output Impedances (R-inverters) 246 16.1.3 Inverters with Capacitive Output Impedances (C-inverters) 247 16.2 Inherent Limitations of Conventional Droop Control 248 16.2.1 Basic Principle 248 16.2.2 Experimental Phenomena 250 16.2.3 Real Power Sharing 251 16.2.4 Reactive Power Sharing 252 16.3 Robust Droop Control of R-inverters 252 16.3.1 Control Strategy 252 16.3.2 Error due to Inaccurate Voltage Measurements 253 16.3.3 Voltage Regulation 254 16.3.4 Error due to the Global Settings for E∗ and 𝜔∗ 254 16.3.5 Experimental Results 255 16.4 Robust Droop Control of C-inverters 261 16.4.1 Control Strategy 261 16.4.2 Experimental Results 262 16.5 Robust Droop Control of L-inverters 262 16.5.1 Control Strategy 262 16.5.2 Experimental Results 265 16.6 Summary 268 17 Universal Droop Control 269 17.1 Introduction 269 17.2 Further Insights into Droop Control 270 17.2.1 Parallel Operation of Inverters with the Same Type of Impedance 271 17.2.2 Parallel Operation of L-, R-, and RL-inverters 272 17.2.3 Parallel Operation of RC-, R-, and C-inverters 273 17.3 Universal Droop Controller 275 17.3.1 Basic Principle 275 17.3.2 Implementation 276 17.4 Real-time Simulation Results 277 17.5 Experimental Results 277 17.5.1 Case I: Parallel Operation of L- and C-inverters 277 17.5.2 Case II: Parallel Operation of L-, C-, and R-inverters 279 17.6 Summary 281 18 Self-synchronized Universal Droop Controller 283 18.1 Description of the Controller 283 18.2 Operation of the Controller 285 18.2.1 Self-synchronization Mode 285 18.2.2 Set Mode (P-mode and Q-mode) 286 18.2.3 Droop Mode (PD-mode and QD-mode) 286 18.3 Experimental Results 287 18.3.1 R-inverter with Self-synchronized Universal Droop Control 288 18.3.2 L-inverter with Self-synchronized Universal Droop Control 290 18.3.3 L-inverter with Self-synchronized Robust Droop Control 294 18.4 Real-time Simulation Results from a Microgrid 297 18.5 Summary 300 19 Droop-Controlled Loads for Continuous Demand Response 301 19.1 Introduction 301 19.2 Control Framework with a Three-port Converter 302 19.2.1 Generation of the Real Power Reference 302 19.2.2 Regulation of the Power Drawn from the Grid 304 19.2.3 Analysis of the Operation Modes 305 19.2.4 Determination of the Capacitance for Grid Support 306 19.3 An Illustrative Implementation with the 𝜃-converter 308 19.3.1 Brief Description about the 𝜃-converter 309 19.3.2 Control of the Neutral Leg 310 19.3.3 Control of the Conversion Leg 311 19.4 Experimental Results 311 19.4.1 Design of the Experimental System 311 19.4.2 Steady-state Performance 312 19.4.3 Transient Performance 315 19.4.4 Capacity Potential 317 19.4.5 Comparative Study 318 19.5 Summary 319 20 Current-limiting Universal Droop Controller 321 20.1 Introduction 321 20.2 System Modeling 322 20.3 Control Design 323 20.3.1 Structure 323 20.3.2 Implementation 323 20.4 System Analysis 326 20.4.1 Current-limiting Property 326 20.4.2 Closed-loop Stability 327 20.4.3 Selection of Control Parameters 328 20.5 Practical Implementation 329 20.6 Operation under Grid Variations and Faults 330 20.7 Experimental Results 331 20.7.1 Operation under Normal Conditions 332 20.7.2 Operation under Grid Faults 334 20.8 Summary 338 Part IV 3G VSM: Cybersync Machines 339 21 Cybersync Machines 341 21.1 Introduction 341 21.2 Passivity and Port-Hamiltonian Systems 343 21.2.1 Passive Systems 343 21.2.2 Port-Hamiltonian Systems 343 21.2.3 Passivity of Interconnected Passive Systems 345 21.3 System Modeling 346 21.4 Control Framework 348 21.4.1 The Engendering Block Σe 349 21.4.2 Generation of the Desired Frequency 𝜔d and Flux 𝜑d 350 21.4.3 Design of Σ𝜔 and Σ𝜑 to Obtain a Passive ΣC 351 21.5 Passivity of the Controller 352 21.5.1 Losslessness of the Interconnection Block ΣI 352 21.5.2 Passivity of the Cascade of ΣC and ΣI 354 21.6 Passivity of the Closed-loop System 355 21.7 Sample Implementations for Blocks Σ𝜔 and Σ𝜑 355 21.7.1 Using the Standard Integral Controller (IC) 355 21.7.2 Using a Static Controller 356 21.8 Self-Synchronization and Power Regulation 357 21.9 Simulation Results 358 21.9.1 Self-synchronization 360 21.9.2 Operation after Connection to the Grid 360 21.10 Experimental Results 362 21.10.1 Self-synchronization 362 21.10.2 Operation after Connection to the Grid 363 21.11 Summary 364 Part V Case Studies 365 22 A Single-node System 367 22.1 SYNDEM Smart Grid Research and Educational Kit 367 22.1.1 Overview 367 22.1.2 Hardware Structure 368 22.1.3 Sample Conversion Topologies Attainable 369 22.2 Details of the Single-Node SYNDEM System 375 22.2.1 Description of the System 375 22.2.2 Experimental Results 377 22.3 Summary 378 23 A 100% Power Electronics Based SYNDEM Smart Grid Testbed 379 23.1 Description of the Testbed 379 23.1.1 Overall Structure 379 23.1.2 VSM Topologies Adopted 379 23.1.3 Individual Nodes 382 23.2 Experimental Results 384 23.2.1 Operation of Energy Bridges 384 23.2.2 Operation of Solar Power Nodes 384 23.2.3 Operation of Wind Power Nodes 386 23.2.4 Operation of the DC-Load Node 388 23.2.5 Operation of the AC-Load Node 389 23.2.6 Operation of the Whole Testbed 391 23.3 Summary 393 24 A Home Grid 395 24.1 Description of the Home Grid 395 24.2 Results from Field Operations 396 24.2.1 Black start and Grid forming 396 24.2.2 From Islanded to Grid-tied Operation 399 24.2.3 Seamless Mode Change when the Public Grid is Lost and Recovered 400 24.2.4 Voltage/Frequency Regulation and Power Sharing 400 24.3 Unexpected Problems Emerged During the Field Trial 402 24.4 Summary 404 25 Texas Panhandle Wind Power System 405 25.1 Geographical Description 405 25.2 System Structure 406 25.3 Main Challenges 407 25.4 Overview of Control Strategies Compared 407 25.4.1 VSM Control 408 25.4.2 DQ Control 410 25.5 Simulation Results 411 25.5.1 VSM Control 412 25.5.2 DQ Control 415 25.6 Summary and Conclusions 416 Bibliography 417 Index 441

Read more less

Book SynopsisEstablishes the foundations of Cloud computing, building a diverse understanding of the technologies behind Cloud computing. This book begins with an introduction to Cloud computing, presenting fundamental concepts such as analysing Cloud definitions, Cloud evolution, Cloud services, Cloud deployment types, and highlights the main challenges.Table of ContentsPreface ixReferences xii1 Introduction 11.1 Overview 11.2 Cloud definition 21.3 Cloud evolution 31.4 Cloud services 51.5 Cloud deployment types 61.6 Main challenges of Clouds 71.7 Summary 101.8 Exercises 10References 11Part One Cloud management 132 Cloud structure 152.1 Introduction 152.2 Infrastructure components 152.3 Cloud Layers 172.4 Cloud relations 232.5 Cloud dynamics 272.6 Data types 272.7 Summary 302.8 Exercises 30References 303 Fundamentals of Cloud management 313.1 Introduction 313.2 Clouds management services 323.3 Virtual control center 373.4 Prerequisite input-data for the management services 373.5 Management of user requirements 403.6 Summary 463.7 Exercises 47References 474 Cloud properties 494.1 Introduction 494.2 Adaptability property 504.3 Resilience property 514.4 Scalability property 524.5 Availability property 534.6 Reliability property 534.7 Security and privacy property 544.8 Business model 554.9 Summary 564.10 Exercises 57References 575 Automated management services 595.1 Introduction 595.2 Virtual layer self-managed services 605.3 Virtual services interdependency 655.4 Application layer self-managed services 675.5 Application services interdependency 705.6 Security and privacy by design 715.7 Multi-tier application deployment in the Cloud 735.8 Main challenges and requirements 795.9 Summary 825.10 Exercises 82References 83Part Two Clouds security fundamentals 856 Background 876.1 Topics flow 876.2 Trusted Computing 896.3 Summary 97References 977 Challenges for establishing trust in Clouds 997.1 Introduction 997.2 Effects of Cloud dynamism on trust relationships 1007.3 Challenges 1037.4 Summary 1057.5 Exercises 105References 1058 Establishing trust in Clouds 1078.1 Introduction 1078.2 Organization requirements 1078.3 Framework requirements 1088.4 Device properties 1118.5 Framework architecture 1128.6 Required software agents 1168.7 Framework workflow 1198.8 Discussion and analysis 1258.9 Summary 1268.10 Exercises 127References 1279 Clouds chains of trust 1299.1 Introduction 1299.2 Software agents revision 1309.3 Roots of and chains of trust definition 1309.4 Intra-layer chains of trust 1329.5 Trust across layers 1409.6 Summary 1439.7 Exercises 143References 14310 Provenance in Clouds 14510.1 Introduction 14510.2 Motivating scenarios 14810.3 Log records management and requirements 15010.4 Framework domain architecture 15510.5 Framework software agents 15710.6 Framework workflow 16010.7 Threat analysis 17110.8 Discussion and future directions 17310.9 Exercises 175References 17511 Insiders 17711.1 Introduction 17711.2 Insiders definition 17811.3 Conceptual models 18211.4 Summary 18511.5 Exercises 185References 186Part Three Practical examples 18712 Real life examples 18912.1 Open Stack 18912.2 Amazon web services 19512.3 Component architecture 19712.4 Prototype 20312.5 Summary 209Reference 20913 Case study 21113.1 Scenario 21113.2 Home healthcare architecture in the Cloud 21213.3 Insiders analysis for home healthcare 21213.4 Cloud threats 220References 226

Read more less

Book SynopsisModern Power System Protection guides the reader through all of the principles of modern protection systems and schemes in the smart grid era. The authors provide a comprehensive guide to protection principles, before examining digital systems and equipment used for modern protection schemes.Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xv List of Abbreviations xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Review of Principles of Protection 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historical Development 1 1.3 Faults, Fault Currents, Voltages, and Protection 2 1.3.1 Types of Faults 2 1.3.2 Currents and Voltages under Fault Situations and Protection 2 1.4 Fault Current Contribution from Generators 5 1.5 Philosophy of Protection Relaying 5 1.5.1 Selectivity 5 1.5.2 Speed of Operation 5 1.5.3 Sensitivity 5 1.5.4 Reliability, Dependability, and Security 6 1.5.5 Primary and Backup Protection 6 1.5.6 Unit and Non-Unit Protection 6 1.6 Review Questions 6 1.7 Problems 6 2 Instrument Transformers 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Basic Principles of Operation 10 2.2.1 Shunt Mode 10 2.2.2 Series Mode 10 2.3 Current Transformers (CTS) 11 2.3.1 Steady-state Theory 11 2.3.2 Excitation Current 12 2.3.3 Excitation Characteristic 13 2.3.4 Terminal Marking and Polarity 13 2.3.5 CT Burden 14 2.3.6 CT Errors 14 2.3.7 Accuracy Classes 15 2.3.8 Accuracy Limit Factor 16 2.3.9 Rated Currents 16 2.4 Transient Response of CTs 17 2.4.1 Power System Fault Current 17 2.4.2 Flux Required to Transform the Primary Current 18 2.4.3 Transient Factor 19 2.4.4 Peak Transient Factor 20 2.4.5 Maximum Peak Transient Factor (Ktfp,max ) 21 2.4.6Transient Dimensioning Factor Ktd for Specific Time t'al 21 2.4.7 Rated Equivalent Limiting Secondary Voltage (Eal) 22 2.4.8 Primary Time Constant (TP) with Multiple Infeeds 23 2.4.9 Over-dimensioning Factor (Kh) Due Remanence 23 2.4.10 Duty Cycle 23 2.4.11 Auto-reclosing 23 2.4.12 Errors 24 2.4.13 CT Classes for Transient Performance 25 2.5 Selection of a CT 26 2.5.1 Rated Primary Current 26 2.5.2 Rated Secondary Current 26 2.5.3 Class, Burden, and ALF of the CTs 27 2.6 Voltage Transformers 32 2.6.1 Inductive Voltage Transformers 32 2.6.2 Inductive Voltage Transformer Errors 33 2.6.3 Inductive Voltage Transformer Classes 33 2.6.4 Inductive Voltage Transformer Selection 34 2.6.5 Terminal Marking 35 2.6.6 Inductive Voltage Transformer Transient Behaviour 35 2.6.7 Voltage Transformer Connections 35 2.7 Capacitor Voltage Transformer 36 2.7.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Errors 37 2.7.2 Capacitive Voltage Transformer Classes 37 2.7.3 Transient Behaviour 38 2.8 Non-Conventional Current and Voltage Transformers 39 2.8.1 Introduction 39 2.8.2 Non-Conventional CTs 40 2.8.3 Optical Voltage Transformers 45 2.9 Review Questions 45 2.10 Problems 46 3 Review of Principles of Protection 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Excess Current Protection 49 3.2.1 Discrimination by Current 50 3.2.2 Discrimination by Time 51 3.2.3 Discrimination by Time and Current 52 3.2.4 Inverse Characteristics 52 3.2.5 Grading of Relays 54 3.2.6 Co-ordination with Fuses 55 3.2.7 Plug Setting and Plug Setting Multiplier 56 3.2.8 Time Multiplier Setting 56 3.2.9 Discrimination When There Is a Delta-star Transformer 56 3.2.10 Earth Fault Protection 61 3.2.11 Directional Relaying 61 3.3 Differential Protection 62 3.3.1 Transformer Differential Protection 63 3.3.2 Protection Against Inter Turn Faults and Earth Faults 65 3.3.3 Feeder Differential Protection 70 3.4 Distance Protection 73 3.4.1 General Principles 73 3.4.2 Zones 74 3.4.3 Characteristic Presentation 75 3.4.4 Distance Relay Inputs for Three-Phase Faults and Phase-to-Phase Faults 75 3.4.5 Relationship Between Relay Voltage and ZS / ZL Ratio 76 3.4.6 Distance Measurement 77 3.4.7 Distance Relay Tele-protection Schemes 77 3.5 Overload Protection 79 3.5.1 Overhead Lines 80 3.5.2 Transformers 80 3.5.3 Generators 81 3.6 Load Shedding 81 3.7 Over-Flux Protection 84 3.8 Review Questions 84 3.9 Problems 85 4 Protection of Distributed Generation 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Fault Current Contribution from Different Generators 92 4.2.1 Synchronous Generators 92 4.2.2 Single-fed Induction Generators 93 4.2.3 Doubly-fed Induction Generators 94 4.2.4 Full Power Converter Generators 95 4.3 Protection of Distributed Generation 96 4.3.1 Protection of Faults within a DG 96 4.3.2 Protection Requirements for DGs Connected to a Distribution Network 97 4.3.3 Distribution System Earth Fault Protection 99 4.3.4 Mains Failure Protection 100 4.4 Effect of DG on Distribution Network Protection 101 4.4.1 Blinding of Protection 101 4.4.2 False Tripping 105 4.4.3 Issues with Recloser Operations 108 4.4.4 Impact on Distance Protection 110 4.5 Review Questions 111 4.6 Problems 111 5 Protection of Wind Farms 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Wind Turbine Configurations 115 5.2.1 Fixed Speed Wind Turbines 115 5.2.2 Doubly Fed Induction Generator Wind Turbines 116 5.2.3 Fully Rated Wind Turbines 116 5.3 Wind Turbine Fault Protection 117 5.4 Protection of On-shore Wind Farms 121 5.4.1 Protection Associated with Grid Interface 121 5.4.2 Protection Associated with Collector Network 124 5.4.3 Lightning and Surge Protection for Wind Farms 128 5.5 Protection of Offshore Wind Farms 129 5.5.1 Protection of LCC-HVDC 131 5.5.2 Protection of VSC-HVDC 131 5.6 Review Questions 133 5.7 Problems 134 6 Protection of PV Plants 137 6.1 Introduction 137 6.2 Components of a Solar PV Plant 137 6.2.1 PV Cells, Modules, or Arrays 137 6.2.2 Power Conversion and Conditioning Equipment 141 6.2.3 Controller 143 6.3 Protection of Rooftop Solar PV Systems 143 6.4 Protection of Ground Mounted Solar PV Systems 145 6.5 Review Questions 151 6.6 Problems 151 7 Signal Acquisition and Processing for Intelligent Electronic Devices 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Signal Parameters for an Intelligent Electronic Device 153 7.2.1 Signals under Normal and Abnormal Conditions 153 7.2.2 Spectral Content of CT/VT Measurements 154 7.3 Nyquist Sampling Theorem and Aliasing 155 7.4 A to D Conversion 158 7.4.1 Sampling 158 7.4.2 Quantisation and Encoding 159 7.4.3 Issues with A to d 160 7.4.4 A to D Conversion Techniques: Successive Approximation Method 163 7.5 Discrete-Time Signal Analysis 164 7.5.1 Discrete Fourier Transform 165 7.6 Sine and Cosine Filter 168 7.7 Review Questions 172 7.8 Problems 172 8 Numerical Relays 175 8.1 Introduction 175 8.2 Components of a Numerical Relay 175 8.2.1 I/V Converter 176 8.2.2 Anti-aliasing Filter 176 8.2.3 Sample and Hold Circuit, Multiplexer, and A to D Converter (ADC) 178 8.2.4 Microprocessor 179 8.3 Numerical Overcurrent Relay 180 8.4 Numerical Distance Relay 180 8.5 Numerical Differential Protection 186 8.6 Review Questions 188 8.7 Problems 188 9 Substation Automation and IEC 61850 191 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Substation Automation 192 9.2.1 Input/Output Devices 192 9.2.2 Relaying and Controlling Equipment 192 9.2.3 Remote Terminal Units 193 9.2.4 Station Computer 193 9.2.5 Human-machine Interface 193 9.2.6 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System 194 9.3 Communication between Substation Equipment 194 9.3.1 Physical Media for Communication 194 9.3.2 Serial Communication 196 9.4 Connection of Substation Equipment 198 9.5 IEC 61850 200 9.5.1 The IEC 61850 Data Model 200 9.5.2 Time-critical Information Exchange 206 9.5.3 Sampled Values 209 9.5.4 SA Design 210 9.6 Review Questions 211 9.7 Problems 212 10 Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control Fundamentals 215 10.1 System Needs for Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control 215 10.2 Synchronised Measurement Technology 216 10.2.1 Definition of Synchrophasors 217 10.2.2 Synchrophasor Measurement Errors 218 10.2.3 Timing Sources 219 10.2.4 Phasor Measurement Unit 220 10.2.5 PMU Measurement Latency 221 10.2.6 Phasor Data Concentrators 222 10.2.7 Communication Infrastructure 223 10.2.8 Architecture of Synchrophasor Measurement Systems 224 10.2.9 Communication Networks for WAMPAC System 225 10.3 Wide Area Monitoring, Protection, and Control Applications 226 10.3.1 Post-disturbance Analysis and Model Validation 228 10.3.2 Characterisation of Load Centres 229 10.3.3 Monitoring of Parameters of Synchronous Generators 232 10.3.4 PMU-based State Estimation 233 10.3.5 PMU-based Monitoring of Inter-area Oscillations 239 10.3.6 PMU-based Coordinated Power Oscillations Damping 240 10.3.7 PMU-based Adaptive Underfrequency Load-shedding and Smart Frequency Control 242 10.3.8 Adaptive PMU Based Fault Location Method 245 10.3.9 Transmission Line Fault Location Based on Time Synchronised Samples 248 10.4 Practical WAMPAC Examples and Installations 252 10.4.1 Future Intelligent Transmission Network Substation (FITNESS) Project 253 10.4.2 Visualisation of Real Time System Dynamics Using Enhanced Monitoring (VISOR) Project 254 10.4.3 The Enhanced Frequency Control Capability (EFCC) Project 258 10.5 Review Questions 260 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Encyclopedia of Cloud Computing provides IT professionals, educators, researchers and students with a compendium of cloud computing knowledge. Authored by a spectrum of subject matter experts in industry and academia, this unique publication, in a single volume, covers a wide range of cloud computing topics, including technological trends and developments, research opportunities, best practices, standards, and cloud adoption. Providing multiple perspectives, it also addresses questions that stakeholders might have in the context of development, operation, management, and use of clouds. Furthermore, it examines cloud computing's impact now and in the future. The encyclopedia presents 56 chapters logically organized into 10 sections. Each chapter covers a major topic/area with cross-references to other chapters and contains tables, illustrations, side-bars as appropriate. Furthermore, each chapter presents its summary at the beginning and backend material, references and additional resources for further information.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xii About the Authors xiv Reviewers xxxvi Foreword xxxviii Preface xxxix Acknowledgments xlv Part I Introduction to Cloud Computing 1 1 Cloud Computing: An Overview 3San Murugesan and Irena Bojanova Part II Cloud Services 15 2 Cloud Services and Service Providers 17K. Chandrasekaran and Alaka Ananth 3 Mobile Cloud Computing 29Saeid Abolfazli, Zohreh Sanaei, Mohammad Hadi Sanaei, Mohammad Shojafar, and Abdullah Gani 4 Community Clouds 41Amin M. Khan, Felix Freitag, and Leandro Navarro 5 Government Clouds 52Sean Rhody and Dan Dunn 6 Cloud]Based Development Environments: PaaS 62Mehmet N. Aydin, Nazim Ziya Perdahci, and Bahadir Odevci Part III Cloud Frameworks and Technologies 71 7 Cloud Reference Frameworks 73Kapil Bakshi and Larry Beser 8 Virtualization: An Overview 89Jim Sweeney 9 Cloud Network and I/O Virtualization 102Kapil Bakshi and Craig Hill 10 Cloud Networks 115Saurav Kanti Chandra and Krishnananda Shenoy 11 Wireless Datacenter Networks 128Yong Cui and Ivan Stojmenovic 12 Open]Source Cloud Software Solutions 139G. R. Gangadharan, Deepnarayan Tiwari, Lalit Sanagavarapu, Shakti Mishra, Abraham Williams, and Srimanyu Timmaraju 13 Developing Software for Cloud: Opportunities and Challenges for Developers 150K. Chandrasekaran and C. Marimuthu Part IV Cloud Integration and Standards 163 14 Cloud Portability and Interoperability 165Beniamino Di Martino, Giuseppina Cretella, and Antonio Esposito 15 Cloud Federation and Geo]Distribution 178William Culhane, Patrick Eugster, Chamikara Jayalath, Kirill Kogan, and Julian Stephen 16 Cloud Standards 191Andy Edmonds, Thijs Metsch, Alexis Richardson, Piyush Harsh, Wolfgang Ziegler, Philip Kershaw, Alan Sill, Mark A. Carlson, Alex Heneveld, Alexandru]Florian Antonescu, and Thomas Michael Bohnert Part V Cloud Security, Privacy, and Compliance 205 17 Cloud Security: Issues and Concerns 207Pierangela Samarati and Sabrina De Capitani di Vimercati 18 Securing the Clouds: Methodologies and Practices 220Simon Liu 19 Cloud Forensics 233Shams Zawoad and Ragib Hasan 20 Privacy, Law, and Cloud Services 245Carol M. Hayes and Jay P. Kesan 21 Ensuring Privacy in Clouds 255Travis Breaux and Siani Pearson 22 Compliance in Clouds 267Thorsten Humberg and Jan Jürjens Part VI Cloud Performance, Reliability, and Availability 275 23 Cloud Capacity Planning and Management 277Yousri Kouki, Frederico Alvares, and Thomas Ledoux 24 Fault Tolerance in the Cloud 291Kashif Bilal, Osman Khalid, Saif Ur Rehman Malik, Muhammad Usman Shahid Khan, Samee U. Khan, and Albert Y. Zomaya 25 Cloud Energy Consumption 301Dan C. Marinescu 26 Cloud Modeling and Simulation 315Peter Altevogt, Wolfgang Denzel, and Tibor Kiss 27 Cloud Testing: An Overview 327Ganesh Neelakanta Iyer 28 Testing the Cloud and Testing as a Service 338Nitin Dangwal, Neha Mehrotra Dewan, and Sonal Sachdeva 29 Cloud Service Evaluation 349Zheng Li, Liam O’Brien, and Rajiv Ranjan Part VII Cloud Migration and Management 361 30 Enterprise Cloud Computing Strategy and Policy 363Eric Carlson 31 Cloud Brokers 372Ganesh Neelakanta Iyer and Bharadwaj Veeravalli 32 Migrating Applications to Clouds 383Jyhjong Lin 33 Identity and Access Management 396Edwin Sturrus and Olga Kulikova 34 OAuth Standard for User Authorization of Cloud Services 406Piotr Tysowski 35 Distributed Access Control in Cloud Computing Systems 417K. Chandrasekaran and Manoj V. Thomas 36 Cloud Service Level Agreement 433Salman A. Baset 37 Automatic Provisioning of Intercloud Resources driven by Nonfunctional Requirements of Applications 446Jungmin Son, Diana Barreto, Rodrigo N. Calheiros, and Rajkumar Buyya 38 Legal Aspects of Cloud Computing 462David G. Gordon 39 Cloud Economics 476Sowmya Karunakaran Part VIII Cloud Applications and Case Studies 489 40 Engineering Applications of the Cloud 491Kincho H. Law, Jack C. P. Cheng, Renate Fruchter, and Ram D. Sriram 41 Educational Applications of the Cloud 505V. K. Cody Bumgardner, Victor Marek, and Doyle Friskney 42 Personal Applications of Clouds 517Cameron Seay, Montressa Washington, and Rudy J. Watson 43 Cloud Gaming 524Wei Cai, Fangyuan Chi, and Victor C. M. Leung Part IX Big Data and Analytics in Clouds 537 44 An Introduction to Big Data 539Mark Smiley 45 Big Data in a Cloud 551Mark Smiley 46 Cloud]Hosted Databases 562Sherif Sakr 47 Cloud Data Management 572Lingfang Zeng, Bharadwaj Veeravalli, and Yang Wang 48 Large]Scale Analytics in Clouds 582Vladimir Dimitrov 49 Cloud Programming Models (MapReduce) 596Vladimir Dimitrov 50 Developing Elastic Software for the Cloud 609Shigeru Imai, Pratik Patel, and Carlos A. Varela 51 Cloud Services for Distributed Knowledge Discovery 628Fabrizio Marozzo, Domenico Talia, and Paolo Trunfio 52 Cloud Knowledge Modeling and Management 640Pierfrancesco Bellini, Daniele Cenni, and Paolo Nesi Part X Cloud Prospects 653 53 Impact of the Cloud on IT Professionals and the IT Industry 655Cameron Seay, Montressa Washington, and Rudy J. Watson 54 Cloud Computing in Emerging Markets 664Nir Kshetri and Lailani L. Alcantara 55 Research Topics in Cloud Computing 676Anand Kumar, B. Vijayakumar, and R. K. Mittal 56 Cloud Outlook: The Future of the Clouds 682San Murugesan and Irena Bojanova Index 687

Read more less

Book SynopsisMost existing robust design books address design for static systems, or achieve robust design from experimental data via the Taguchi method. Little work considers model information for robust design particularly for the dynamic system. This book covers robust design for both static and dynamic systems using the nominal model information or the hybrid model/data information, and also integrates design with control under a large operating region. This design can handle strong nonlinearity and more uncertainties from model and parameters.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii I BACKGROUND AND FUNDAMENTALS 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 Background and Motivation 3 1.1.1 Robust Design for Static Systems 5 1.1.2 Robust Design for Dynamic Systems 8 1.1.3 Integration of Design and Control 10 1.2 Objectives of the Book 14 1.3 Contribution and Organization of the Book 15 2 OVERVIEW AND CLASSIFICATION 19 2.1 Classification of Uncertainty 19 2.2 Robust Performance Analysis 20 2.2.1 Interval Analysis 20 2.2.2 Fuzzy Analysis 21 2.2.3 Probabilistic Analysis 21 2.3 Robust Design 27 2.3.1 Robust Design for Static Systems 28 2.3.2 Robust Design for Dynamic Systems 37 2.4 Integration of Design and Control 41 2.4.1 Control Structure Design 41 2.4.2 Control Method 42 2.4.3 Optimization Method 43 2.5 Problems and Research Opportunities 43 II ROBUST DESIGN FOR STATIC SYSTEMS 3 VARIABLE SENSITIVITY BASED ROBUST DESIGN FOR NONLINEAR SYSTEM 47 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Design Problem for Nonlinear Systems 48 3.2.1 Problem in Deterministic Design 49 3.2.2 Problem in Probabilistic Design 49 3.3 Concept of Variable Sensitivity 51 3.4 Variable Sensitivity Based Deterministic Robust Design 52 3.4.1 Robust Design for Single Performance Single Variable 52 3.4.2 Robust Design for Multiperformances Multivariables 54 3.4.3 Design Procedure 58 3.5 Variable Sensitivity Based Probabilistic Robust Design 58 3.5.1 Single Performance Function Under Single Variables 59 3.5.2 Single Performance Function Under Multivariables 60 3.5.3 Multiperformance Functions Under Multivariables 61 3.6 Case Study 62 3.6.1 Deterministic Design Cases 62 3.6.2 Probabilistic Design Case 66 3.7 Summary 70 4 MULTI-DOMAIN MODELING-BASED ROBUST DESIGN 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Multi-Domain Modeling-Based Robust Design Methodology 73 4.2.1 Multi-Domain Modeling Approach 74 4.2.2 Variation Separation-Based Robust Design Method 75 4.2.3 Design Procedure 78 4.3 Case Study 80 4.3.1 Robust Design of a Belt 80 4.3.2 Robust Design of Hydraulic Press Machine 81 4.4 Summary 86 5 HYBRID MODEL DATA-BASED ROBUST DESIGN UNDER MODEL UNCERTAINTY 87 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Design Problem for Partially Unknown Systems 88 5.2.1 Probabilistic Robust Design Problem 88 5.2.2 Deterministic Robust Design Problem 90 5.3 Hybrid Model Data-Based Robust Design Methodology 92 5.3.1 Probabilistic Robust Design 93 5.3.2 Deterministic Robust Design 99 5.4 Case Study 104 5.4.1 Probabilistic Robust Design 104 5.4.2 Deterministic Robust Design 109 5.5 Summary 114 III ROBUST DESIGN FOR DYNAMIC SYSTEMS 6 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER PARAMETER VARIATION—A LINEARIZATION APPROACH 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Dynamic Design Problem Under Parameter Variation 120 6.2.1 Stability Design Problem 120 6.2.2 Dynamic Robust Design Problem 121 6.3 Linearization-Based Robust Eigenvalue Design 122 6.3.1 Stability Design 122 6.3.2 Robust Eigenvalue Design 124 6.3.3 Tolerance Design 127 6.3.4 Design Procedure 128 6.4 Multi-Model-Based Robust Design Method for Stability and Robustness 128 6.4.1 Multi-Model Approach 129 6.4.2 Stability Design 130 6.4.3 Dynamic Robust Design 132 6.4.4 Summary 134 6.5 Case Studies 134 6.5.1 Linearization-Based Robust Eigenvalue Design 134 6.5.2 Multi-Model-Based Robust Design Method 138 6.6 Summary 145 7 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER PARAMETER VARIATION—A NONLINEAR APPROACH 147 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Design Problem 148 7.3 SN-Based Dynamic Design 150 7.3.1 Stability Design 152 7.3.2 Dynamic Robust Design 153 7.4 Case Study 160 7.4.1 Stability Design 160 7.4.2 Dynamic Robust Design 162 7.5 Summary 165 8 ROBUST EIGENVALUE DESIGN UNDER MODEL UNCERTAINTY 167 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Design Problem for Partially Unknown Dynamic Systems 168 8.3 Stability Design 169 8.3.1 Stability Design for Nominal Model 169 8.3.2 Stability Design Under Model Uncertainty 169 8.3.3 Stability Bound of Design Variables 171 8.4 Robust Eigenvalue Design and Tolerance Design 172 8.4.1 Robust Eigenvalue Design 172 8.4.2 Tolerance Design 173 8.4.3 Design Procedure 174 8.5 Case Study 175 8.5.1 Design of the Nominal Stability Space 175 8.5.2 Design of the Stability Space 176 8.5.3 Design of the Robust Stability Space 176 8.5.4 Robust Eigenvalue Design 176 8.5.5 Tolerance Design 177 8.5.6 Design Verification 177 8.6 Summary 180 IV INTEGRATION OF DESIGN AND CONTROL 9 DESIGN-FOR-CONTROL-BASED INTEGRATION 183 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Integration Problem 184 9.3 Design-for-Control-Based Integration Methodology 186 9.3.1 Design for Control 186 9.3.2 Control Development 188 9.3.3 Integration Optimization for Robust Pole Assignment 188 9.3.4 Integration Procedure 191 9.4 Case Study 192 9.4.1 Design for Control 192 9.4.2 Robust Pole Assignment 193 9.4.3 Design Verification 193 9.4.4 Design for Control 202 9.4.5 Robust Dynamic Design and Verification 202 9.5 Summary 204 10 INTELLIGENCE-BASED HYBRID INTEGRATION 205 10.1 Introduction 205 10.2 Problem in Hybrid System in Manufacturing 207 10.3 Intelligence-Based Hybrid Integration 208 10.3.1 Intelligent Process Control 208 10.3.2 Hybrid Integration Design 214 10.3.3 Hierarchical Optimization of Integration 215 10.4 Case Study 218 10.4.1 Objective 219 10.4.2 Integration Method for the Curing Process 220 10.4.3 Verification and Comparison 222 10.5 Summary 227 11 CONCLUSIONS 229 11.1 Summary and Conclusions 229 11.2 Challenge 231 REFERENCES 233 INDEX 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book examines signal processing techniques for cognitive radios. The book is divided into three parts: Part I, is an introduction to cognitive radios and presents a history of the cognitive radio (CR), and introduce their architecture, functionalities, ideal aspects, hardware platforms, and state-of-the-art developments. Dr.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part I Introduction to Cognitive Radios 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Signal Processing and Cognitive Radios 4 1.3 Software-Defined Radios 6 1.3.1 Software-Defined Radio Platforms 14 1.3.2 Software-Defined Radio Systems 15 1.4 From Software-Defined Radios to Cognitive Radios 19 1.4.1 The Spectrum Scarcity Problem 19 1.4.2 Emergence of CRs 21 1.5 What this Book is About 22 1.6 Summary 26 2 The Cognitive Radio 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 A Functional Model of a Cognitive Radio 30 2.2.1 Spectrum Knowledge Acquisition (Spectrum Awareness) 30 2.2.2 Communications Decision-Making 33 2.2.3 Learning in Cognitive Radios 33 2.3 The Cognitive Radio Architecture 35 2.3.1 Spectrum Sensing Region of a Cognitive Engine 36 2.3.2 Radio Reconfiguration Region of a Cognitive Engine 36 2.3.3 Learning Region of a Cognitive Engine 37 2.3.4 Memory Region of a Cognitive Engine 37 2.4 The Ideal Cognitive Radio 38 2.5 Signal Processing Challenges in Cognitive Radios 39 2.6 Summary 40 3 Cognitive Radios and Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 42 3.1 Introduction 42 3.2 Interference and Spectrum Opportunities 46 3.3 Dynamic Spectrum Access 50 3.4 Dynamic Spectrum Leasing 54 3.5 Challenges in DSS Cognitive Radios 55 3.6 Cognitive Radios and Future of Wireless Communications 60 3.7 Summary 61 Part II theoretical foundations 65 4 Introduction to Detection Theory 67 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Optimality Criteria: Bayesian versus Non-Bayesian 71 4.2.1 The Bayesian Approach 72 4.2.2 A Non-Bayesian Approach: Neyman–Pearson Optimality Criterion 73 4.3 Parametric Signal Detection Theory 75 4.3.1 Bayesian Optimal Detection 76 4.3.2 Neyman–Pearson Optimal Detection 82 4.3.3 Another Non-Bayesian Alternative: The Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test 99 4.3.4 Parametric Signal Detection in Additive Noise 103 4.4 Nonparametric Signal Detection Theory 122 4.4.1 Signal Detection in Additive Zero-Median Noise: The Sign Test 124 4.4.2 Signal Detection in Additive Symmetric Noise: The Rank Test 125 4.4.3 Signal Detection in Additive Zero Median, Zero Mean, Finite-Variance Noise: The t-Test 126 4.5 Summary 127 5 Introduction to Estimation Theory 132 5.1 Introduction 132 5.2 Random Parameter Estimation: Bayesian Estimation 134 5.2.1 Minimum Mean-Squared Error Estimation 134 5.2.2 MMSE Estimation of Vector Parameters 135 5.2.3 Linear Minimum Mean-Squared Error Estimation 138 5.2.4 Maximum A Posteriori Probability Estimation 139 5.3 Nonrandom Parameter Estimation 140 5.3.1 Theory of Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimation 142 5.3.2 Best Linear Unbiased Estimator 147 5.3.3 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 152 5.3.4 Performance Bounds: Cramer-Rao Lower Bound 154 5.4 Summary 158 6 Power Spectrum Estimation 164 6.1 Introduction 164 6.2 PSD Estimation of a Stationary Discrete-Time Signal 168 6.2.1 Correlogram Method 168 6.2.2 Periodogram Method 170 6.2.3 Performance of the Periodogram PSD Estimate 172 6.3 Blackman–Tukey Estimator of the Power Spectrum 177 6.4 Other PSD Estimators Based on Modified Periodograms 181 6.4.1 Bartlett PSD Estimator 181 6.4.2 Welch PSD Estimator 183 6.5 PSD Estimation of Nonstationary Discrete-Time Signals 186 6.5.1 Temporally Windowed Observations 188 6.5.2 Temporal and Spectral Smoothing of PSD Estimates of Nonstationary Discrete-Time Signals 189 6.5.3 DFT-Based PSD Computation 191 6.6 Spectral Correlation of Cyclostationary Signals 192 6.6.1 Spectral Correlation and Spectral Autocoherence 196 6.6.2 Time-Averaged Spectral Correlation 197 6.6.3 Estimation of Spectral Correlation 198 6.7 Summary 200 7 Markov Decision Processes 207 7.1 Introduction 207 7.2 Markov Decission Processes 209 7.3 Finite-Horizon MDPs 212 7.3.1 Definitions 212 7.3.2 Optimal Policies for MDPs 216 7.4 Infinite-Horizon MDPs 222 7.4.1 Stationary Optimal Policies for Infinite-Horizon MDPs 224 7.4.2 Bellman-Optimality Equations 227 7.5 Partially Observable Markov Decision Processes 232 7.5.1 Definitions 233 7.5.2 Policy Evaluation for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 238 7.5.3 Optimality Equations for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 241 7.5.4 Optimal Policy Computation for a Finite-Horizon POMDP 242 7.5.5 Infinite-Horizon POMDPs 257 7.6 Summary 259 8 Bayesian Nonparametric Classification 269 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 K-Means Classification Algorithm 274 8.3 X-Means Classification Algorithm 276 8.4 Dirichlet Process Mixture Model 278 8.4.1 Dirichlet Process 278 8.4.2 Construction of the Dirichlet Process 279 8.4.3 DPMM 282 8.5 Bayesian Nonparametric Classification Based on the DPMM and the Gibbs Sampling 283 8.5.1 DPMM-Based Classification of Scalar Observations 287 8.5.2 DPMM-Based Classification of Multidimensional Gaussian Observations 298 8.5.3 DPMM-Based Classification of Possibly Non-Gaussian Multidimensional Observations 308 8.6 Summary 315 Part III signal processing in cognitive radios 321 9 Wideband Spectrum Sensing 323 9.1 Introduction 323 9.2 Wideband Spectrum Sensing Problem 325 9.3 Wideband Spectrum Scanning Problem 326 9.4 Spectrum Segmentation and Subbanding 328 9.5 Wideband Spectrum Sensing Receiver 330 9.5.1 Homodyne Receiver Configuration 332 9.5.2 Super Heterodyne Digital Receiver Configuration 334 9.5.3 A/D Conversion and the Discrete-Time Received Signal Model 335 9.6 Subband Selection Problem in Wideband Spectrum Sensing 336 9.6.1 Subband Dynamics 338 9.6.2 A POMDP Model for Subband Selection 340 9.6.3 An Optimal Subband Selection Policy for Spectrum Sensing 347 9.6.4 A Reduced-Complexity Optimal Sensing Decision-Making Algorithm with Independent Channels 350 9.6.5 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Sensing Decision-Making Algorithm with Independent Subbands 354 9.6.6 Optimal Myopic Sensing Decision Policies 354 9.7 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Subband Selection Framework with an Alternative Reward Function 355 9.7.1 A New Model for Subband Dynamics 357 9.7.2 A Simplified Reward Function and a Reduced-Complexity Optimal Policy 359 9.7.3 A Reduced Complexity Optimal Policy for Independent Subbands 362 9.7.4 Optimal Myopic Policies with Reduced Dimensional Subband State Vectors 363 9.8 Machine-Learning Aided Subband Selection Policies 364 9.8.1 Q-Learning 365 9.8.2 Q-Learning in a POMDP: A Q-Learning Algorithm for Subband Selection 368 9.9 Summary 372 10 Spectral Activity Detection in Wideband Cognitive Radios 377 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Optimal Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 379 10.3 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 386 10.4 Wavelet Transform-Based Wideband Spectral Activity Detection 392 10.4.1 Wavelet Transform 394 10.4.2 Edge Detection with Wavelet Transform 395 10.4.3 Spectral Activity Detection Based on Edge Detection 397 10.5 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection in Non-Gaussian Noise 398 10.5.1 Arbitrary but Known Noise Distribution 399 10.5.2 Robust Spectral Activity Detection 406 10.6 Wideband Spectral Activity Detection with Compressive Sampling 413 10.6.1 Compressive Sampling 415 10.6.2 Compressive Sensing of Wideband Spectrum 419 10.7 Summary 421 11 Signal Classification in Wideband Cognitive Radios 429 11.1 Introduction 429 11.2 Signal Classification Problem in a Wideband Cognitive Radio 431 11.3 Feature Extraction for Signal Classification 435 11.3.1 Carrier/Center Frequency 435 11.3.2 Cyclostationary Features 436 11.3.3 Modulation Type and Order Features 441 11.4 A Signal Classification Architecture for a Wideband Cognitive Radio 445 11.5 Bayesian Nonparametric Signal Classification 447 11.6 Sequential Bayesian Nonparametric Signal Classification 462 11.7 Summary 469 12 Primary Signal Detection in DSA Cognitive Networks 472 12.1 Introduction 472 12.2 Spectrum Sensing Problem in Dynamic Spectrum Sharing CR Networks 475 12.3 Autonomous Spectrum Sensing for Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 479 12.3.1 Secondary User Sensing Observations 480 12.3.2 Channel-State (Idle/Busy) Decisions 481 12.4 Limitations of Autonomous Spectrum Sensing 489 12.5 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing for Dynamic Spectrum Sharing 492 12.6 Cooperative Channel-State Detection 495 12.6.1 Local Processing and Sensing Reports from Secondary Users 498 12.6.2 Final Channel-State Decisions at the SSDC: Decision Fusion 502 12.7 Summary 516 13 Spectrum Decision-Making in DSA Cognitive Networks 519 13.1 Introduction 519 13.2 Primary Channel Dynamic Model 520 13.3 Sensing Decisions in DSS Networks with Autonomous Cognitive Radios 522 13.3.1 Optimal Sensing Policy Determination 525 13.3.2 Optimal Myopic Sensing Policy Determination 530 13.4 Sensing Decisions in Cooperative DSS Networks 533 13.4.1 Optimal SSDC Decisions for Independent Channel Dynamics 537 13.4.2 Optimal Myopic Sensing Decisions at the SSDC with Independent Channel Dynamics 541 13.5 Summary 550 14 Dynamic Spectrum Leasing in Cognitive Radio Networks 553 14.1 Introduction 553 14.2 DSL with Direct Rewards to Primary Users 555 14.2.1 Interference at the Primary Receiver 560 14.2.2 A Game Model for Dynamic Spectrum Leasing 565 14.2.3 Nash Equilibria in Noncooperative Games 570 14.2.4 Existence of a Nash Equilibrium in the DSL Game 573 14.3 DSL Based on Asymmetric Cooperation with Primary Users 587 14.3.1 A Primary–Secondary Coexistence Model 588 14.3.2 Asymmetric Cooperative Communications-Based DSL between Primary Users and a Centralized Secondary Network 591 14.3.3 Asymmetric Cooperative Communications-Based DSL between Primary Users and Autonomous Cognitive Secondary Users 604 14.4 Summary 609 15 Cooperative Cognitive Communications 613 15.1 Introduction 613 15.2 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing 619 15.3 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing and Channel-Access Decisions 621 15.4 Cooperative Communications Strategies in Cognitive Radio Networks 624 15.5 Asymmetric Cooperative Relaying in DSA Cognitive Radios 627 15.5.1 Secondary User Optimal Power Allocation for Asymmetric Cooperative Relaying 629 15.5.2 Centralized Assignment of Cognitive Radios for Cooperation with Primary Users: An Ideal Approach 635 15.5.3 Centralized Assignment of Cognitive Radios for Cooperation with Primary Users: A Realistic Approach 640 15.6 Summary 644 16 Machine Learning in Cognitive Radios 647 16.1 Introduction 647 16.2 Artificial Neural Networks 650 16.2.1 Learning Algorithms for LTUs 651 16.2.2 Layered Neural Networks 655 16.2.3 Learning in Layered Feed-Forward Networks: Back-Propagation Algorithm 656 16.2.4 Neural Networks in Cognitive Radios 662 16.3 Support Vector Machines 664 16.3.1 Statistical Learning Theory 665 16.3.2 Structural Risk Minimization with Support Vector Machines 669 16.3.3 Linear Support Vector Machines 670 16.3.4 Nonlinear Support Vector Machines 674 16.3.5 Kernel Function Implementation of Support Vector Machines 677 16.3.6 SVMs in Cognitive Radios 679 16.4 Reinforcement Learning 681 16.4.1 Temporal Difference Learning 683 16.4.2 Q-Learning in a POMDP: Replicated Q-Learning 684 16.4.3 Reinforcement Learning in Cognitive Radios 686 16.5 Multiagent Learning 688 16.5.1 Game-Theoretic Multiagent Learning 691 16.5.2 Cooperative Multiagent Learning 694 16.5.3 Multiagent Learning in Cognitive Radio Networks 696 16.6 Summary 698 Appendix A Nyquist Sampling Theorem 704 Appendix B A Collection of Useful Probability Distributions 711 B.1 Univariate Distributions 711 B.2 Multivariate Distributions 713 Appendix C Conjugate Priors 716 References 721 Index 740

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe aim of the book is to educate government agencies, operators, vendors and other regulatory institutions how LTE can be deployed to serve public safety market and offer regulatory / public safety features.Table of ContentsForeword xi About the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Introduction xix Terminology xxi 1 Introduction to LTE/SAE 1 1.1 Role of 3GPP 1 1.2 History of LTE 3 1.3 Drivers for LTE 5 1.4 EPS compared to GPRS and UMTS 6 1.5 Spectrum Considerations 7 1.6 Network Architecture 9 1.6.1 Radio Access Network and Core Network 9 1.6.2 Architecture Principles 9 1.6.3 Non-roaming Architecture 10 1.6.4 Roaming Architectures 11 1.6.5 Description of Functional Entities 12 1.6.6 Session Management 17 1.6.7 Policy and Charging Control 19 1.6.8 Interfaces and Protocols in EPS 21 1.6.9 Mobility Management 26 1.6.10 Intra E-UTRAN Handover 30 1.6.11 Security 31 1.6.12 Charging 34 1.7 IP Multimedia Subsystem 38 1.7.1 Summary of Reference Points and Protocols 40 1.8 Voice and SMS in LTE 41 1.8.1 Voice 41 1.8.2 Short Message Service 42 1.9 Interworking with 2G/3G Networks 43 1.9.1 Overview 43 1.9.2 Interworking with Legacy Networks 43 1.9.3 Functional Description 43 1.10 Interworking with Non-3GPP Access Networks 44 1.10.1 Summary of Reference Points and Protocols 47 1.11 Network Sharing 48 1.11.1 UE-Based Network Selection 49 1.11.2 RAN-Based Network Selection 49 1.12 Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service 50 1.12.1 Principles 50 1.12.2 Description of Functional Entities 51 1.12.3 MBMS Enhancements 52 1.12.4 MBSFN and MBMS Radio Channels 53 1.13 Terms and Definitions 54 1.13.1 Roaming 54 1.13.2 Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched Networks 55 1.13.3 Access Stratum and Non-Access Stratum 55 References 56 2 Regulatory Features 59 2.1 Emergency Calls 59 2.1.1 Overview 59 2.1.2 Requirements 59 2.1.3 Emergency Call Architecture 60 2.1.4 PSAP Callback 68 2.1.5 Emergency Numbers 68 2.1.6 Non Voice Emergency Services 69 2.1.7 Automated Emergency Calls 69 2.2 Public Warning System 71 2.3 Lawful Interception 72 2.3.1 Principles 72 2.3.2 Lawful Interception for EPS 74 2.4 Enhanced Multimedia Priority Services 74 References 76 3 LTE for Public Safety Networks 77 3.1 Why LTE for Public Safety Networks? 77 3.2 What are Public Safety Networks? 78 3.3 LTE meets Demands of Public Safety Networks 79 3.4 Wide Range of LTE Devices for Public Safety 80 3.5 Standalone versus Shared Deployments 81 3.6 Interworking 83 3.6.1 Device Aspects 83 3.6.2 Network Aspects 83 References 83 4 Proximity Services 85 4.1 Introduction to Proximity Services 85 4.1.1 Proximity Services Overview 85 4.1.2 ProSe Communication 86 4.1.3 ProSe Discovery 88 4.1.4 ProSe for Public Safety 88 4.2 Proximity Services Architectures 90 4.2.1 Non-roaming Architecture 90 4.2.2 Inter-PLMN Architecture 91 4.2.3 Roaming Architecture 91 4.2.4 Description of Functional Entities 93 4.2.5 Interfaces and Protocols 97 4.3 Synchronization 104 4.3.1 LTE Primary and Secondary Synchronization Signals 106 4.3.2 LTE D2D Synchronization 107 4.4 Service Authorization 108 4.5 ProSe Direct Discovery 109 4.5.1 ProSe Direct Discovery Models 110 4.5.2 ProSe Direct Discovery Modes 110 4.5.3 Direct Discovery Procedure for Model A 111 4.5.4 Radio Aspects and Physical Layer Design 112 4.5.5 Radio Resource Allocation for Direct Discovery 112 4.5.6 Inter-frequency ProSe Discovery 113 4.5.7 Announce Procedure (non-roaming) 114 4.5.8 Announce Procedure (roaming) 115 4.5.9 Monitor Procedure (non-roaming) 117 4.5.10 Monitor Procedure (roaming) 118 4.5.11 Match Procedure (non-roaming) 120 4.5.12 Match Procedure (roaming) 121 4.5.13 Direct Discovery Procedure for Model B 123 4.6 ProSe Direct Communication 123 4.6.1 Radio Aspects and Physical Layer Design 124 4.6.2 Radio Resource Allocation for Direct Communication 125 4.6.3 Inter-frequency ProSe Communication 127 4.6.4 IP Address Allocation 128 4.6.5 One-to-Many Communication (Transmission) 128 4.6.6 One-to-Many Communication (Reception) 130 4.6.7 Direct Communication via ProSe Relay 130 4.7 EPC-Level ProSe Discovery 131 4.7.1 EPC-Level ProSe Discovery Procedure 132 4.7.2 User Equipment Registration 133 4.7.3 Application Registration 134 4.8 Other Essential Functions for Proximity Services 135 4.8.1 Provisioning 135 4.8.2 Subscription Data 136 4.8.3 Security 136 4.8.4 Charging 138 4.8.5 ProSe-Related Identifiers 140 4.8.6 Illustration for Match Event 144 4.9 Deployment Scenarios 146 4.9.1 ProSe Direct Discovery 146 4.9.2 ProSe Direct Communication 147 4.10 Public Safety Use Cases 147 4.10.1 Use Cases for ProSe Communication 148 4.10.2 Use Cases for Network to UE Relay 149 4.10.3 Performance Characteristics 149 4.11 Outlook to Enhanced Proximity Services 150 4.12 Terms and Definitions 151 4.12.1 Home PLMN 151 4.12.2 Equivalent Home PLMN 151 4.12.3 Visited PLMN 151 4.12.4 Registered (Serving) PLMN 152 4.12.5 Local PLMN 152 4.12.6 Hybrid Adaptive Repeat and Request 152 4.12.7 Radio Link Control 152 4.12.8 Logical Channel Prioritization 153 4.12.9 System Information 153 4.12.10 OFDM Symbol 154 4.12.11 Dual-Rx UE 154 References 154 5 Group Communication Over LTE 157 5.1 Introduction to Group Communication Services 157 5.2 Group Communication System Enablers for LTE 158 5.3 Principles of Group Communication over LTE 159 5.4 Functional Entities 162 5.4.1 User Equipment 162 5.4.2 GCS AS 162 5.4.3 BM-SC 163 5.4.4 eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW, PCRF 163 5.5 Interfaces and Protocols 163 5.5.1 MB2 Interface 163 5.5.2 Rx and SGi Interfaces 167 5.6 GCSE Functions 169 5.6.1 Unicast Delivery 169 5.6.2 MBMS Delivery 171 5.6.3 Service Continuity 172 5.6.4 Priority and Preemption 173 5.6.5 MBMS Delivery Status Notification 175 5.7 Establishment of MBMS Delivery 175 5.7.1 Pre-establishment 175 5.7.2 Dynamic Establishment 176 5.8 MBMS Delivery Procedures 179 5.8.1 MBMS Delivery Modification 179 5.8.2 MBMS Delivery Deactivation 181 5.8.3 TMGI Management 182 5.9 Access Control 183 5.10 Mission Critical Push To Talk 185 5.10.1 MCPTT Service Description 186 5.10.2 MCPTT Call Types 187 5.10.3 MCPTT Priorities 187 5.10.4 Shareable MCPTT Devices 188 5.10.5 On and Off Network Mode of Operation 188 5.10.6 Interworking with legacy PTT Systems 189 References 189 6 Summary and Outlook 191 6.1 Role of LTE 191 6.2 Public Safety Features 192 6.3 LTE for Public Safety 193 6.4 Outlook 196 References 196 Appendix A 197 A.1 Call Flows 197 A.1.1 Attach 197 A.1.2 Detach 200 A.1.3 Tracking Area Update 201 A.1.4 Paging 202 A.1.5 Service Request 203 A.1.6 X2-Based Handover 205 A.1.7 S1-Based Handover 206 A.1.8 MBMS Session Start 210 A.1.9 MBMS Session Stop 212 A.1.10 MBMS Session Update 213 A.1.11 UE-requested PDN Connectivity 214 A.1.12 Dedicated Bearer Context Activation 216 A.2 3GPP Reference Points 217 References 221 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisTechnical ideas may be solid or even groundbreaking, but if these ideas cannot be clearly communicated, reviewers of technical documents are likely to reject the argument for advancing these ideas. This book presents a scientific approach to writing that mirrors the sensibilities of scientists and engineers.Table of ContentsA Note from the Series Editor, xiii Acknowledgments, xv Foreword, xvii Preface, xxi 1 Introduction to the Approach 1 PART I Sentences 9 2 Qualifiers Used in Sentences 11 3 Subordinate Clauses Used as Qualifiers 21 4 Explanatory Phrases, Participle Phrases, and Major Prepositional Phrases 31 5 Infinitive Phrases, and the General Rule for Punctuating Qualifiers 45 6 Sentences with Two Qualifiers 55 7 Higher Orders of Punctuation 69 8 Strategies to Improve Sentences with Qualifiers 77 PART II Lists 89 9 Two-Item Lists 91 10 Multiple-Item Lists 103 11 Strategies for Writing Better Lists 111 PART III Word Choice and Placement 119 12 Adjectives and Adverbs 121 13 Precision in Word Usage 135 PART IV Beyond Sentences 149 14 Paragraphs 151 15 Arguments 163 16 Justification of Arguments 173 17 Organization and Presentation 181 References, 193 About the Author, 207 Index, 209

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Table xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Acronyms xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 State of a Dynamic System 1 1.2 State Estimation 1 1.3 Construals of Computing 2 1.4 Statistical Modeling 3 1.5 Vision for the Book 4 2 Observability 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 State-Space Model 7 2.3 The Concept of Observability 9 2.4 Observability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 10 2.4.1 Continuous-Time LTI Systems 10 2.4.2 Discrete-Time LTI Systems 12 2.4.3 Discretization of LTI Systems 14 2.5 Observability of Linear Time-Varying Systems 14 2.5.1 Continuous-Time LTV Systems 14 2.5.2 Discrete-Time LTV Systems 16 2.5.3 Discretization of LTV Systems 17 2.6 Observability of Nonlinear Systems 17 2.6.1 Continuous-Time Nonlinear Systems 18 2.6.2 Discrete-Time Nonlinear Systems 21 2.6.3 Discretization of Nonlinear Systems 22 2.7 Observability of Stochastic Systems 23 2.8 Degree of Observability 25 2.9 Invertibility 26 2.10 Concluding Remarks 27 3 Observers 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Luenberger Observer 30 3.3 Extended Luenberger-Type Observer 31 3.4 Sliding-Mode Observer 33 3.5 Unknown-Input Observer 35 3.6 Concluding Remarks 39 4 Bayesian Paradigm and Optimal Nonlinear Filtering 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Bayes’ Rule 42 4.3 Optimal Nonlinear Filtering 42 4.4 Fisher Information 45 4.5 Posterior Cramér–Rao Lower Bound 46 4.6 Concluding Remarks 47 5 Kalman Filter 49 5.1 Introduction 49 5.2 Kalman Filter 50 5.3 Kalman Smoother 53 5.4 Information Filter 54 5.5 Extended Kalman Filter 54 5.6 Extended Information Filter 54 5.7 Divided-Difference Filter 54 5.8 Unscented Kalman Filter 60 5.9 Cubature Kalman Filter 60 5.10 Generalized PID Filter 64 5.11 Gaussian-Sum Filter 65 5.12 Applications 67 5.12.1 Information Fusion 67 5.12.2 Augmented Reality 67 5.12.3 Urban Traffic Network 67 5.12.4 Cybersecurity of Power Systems 67 5.12.5 Incidence of Influenza 68 5.12.6 COVID-19 Pandemic 68 5.13 Concluding Remarks 70 6 Particle Filter 71 6.1 Introduction 71 6.2 Monte Carlo Method 72 6.3 Importance Sampling 72 6.4 Sequential Importance Sampling 73 6.5 Resampling 75 6.6 Sample Impoverishment 76 6.7 Choosing the Proposal Distribution 77 6.8 Generic Particle Filter 78 6.9 Applications 81 6.9.1 Simultaneous Localization and Mapping 81 6.10 Concluding Remarks 82 7 Smooth Variable-Structure Filter 85 7.1 Introduction 85 7.2 The Switching Gain 86 7.3 Stability Analysis 90 7.4 Smoothing Subspace 93 7.5 Filter Corrective Term for Linear Systems 96 7.6 Filter Corrective Term for Nonlinear Systems 102 7.7 Bias Compensation 105 7.8 The Secondary Performance Indicator 107 7.9 Second-Order Smooth Variable Structure Filter 108 7.10 Optimal Smoothing Boundary Design 108 7.11 Combination of SVSF with Other Filters 110 7.12 Applications 110 7.12.1 Multiple Target Tracking 111 7.12.2 Battery State-of-Charge Estimation 111 7.12.3 Robotics 111 7.13 Concluding Remarks 111 8 Deep Learning 113 8.1 Introduction 113 8.2 Gradient Descent 114 8.3 Stochastic Gradient Descent 115 8.4 Natural Gradient Descent 119 8.5 Neural Networks 120 8.6 Backpropagation 122 8.7 Backpropagation Through Time 122 8.8 Regularization 122 8.9 Initialization 125 8.10 Convolutional Neural Network 125 8.11 Long Short-Term Memory 127 8.12 Hebbian Learning 129 8.13 Gibbs Sampling 131 8.14 Boltzmann Machine 131 8.15 Autoencoder 135 8.16 Generative Adversarial Network 136 8.17 Transformer 137 8.18 Concluding Remarks 139 9 Deep Learning-Based Filters 141 9.1 Introduction 141 9.2 Variational Inference 142 9.3 Amortized Variational Inference 144 9.4 Deep Kalman Filter 144 9.5 Backpropagation Kalman Filter 146 9.6 Differentiable Particle Filter 148 9.7 Deep Rao–Blackwellized Particle Filter 152 9.8 Deep Variational Bayes Filter 158 9.9 Kalman Variational Autoencoder 167 9.10 Deep Variational Information Bottleneck 172 9.11 Wasserstein Distributionally Robust Kalman Filter 176 9.12 Hierarchical Invertible Neural Transport 178 9.13 Applications 182 9.13.1 Prediction of Drug Effect 182 9.13.2 Autonomous Driving 183 9.14 Concluding Remarks 183 10 Expectation Maximization 185 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 Expectation Maximization Algorithm 185 10.3 Particle Expectation Maximization 188 10.4 Expectation Maximization for Gaussian Mixture Models 190 10.5 Neural Expectation Maximization 191 10.6 Relational Neural Expectation Maximization 194 10.7 Variational Filtering Expectation Maximization 196 10.8 Amortized Variational Filtering Expectation Maximization 198 10.9 Applications 199 10.9.1 Stochastic Volatility 199 10.9.2 Physical Reasoning 200 10.9.3 Speech, Music, and Video Modeling 200 10.10 Concluding Remarks 201 11 Reinforcement Learning-Based Filter 203 11.1 Introduction 203 11.2 Reinforcement Learning 204 11.3 Variational Inference as Reinforcement Learning 207 11.4 Application 210 11.4.1 Battery State-of-Charge Estimation 210 11.5 Concluding Remarks 210 12 Nonparametric Bayesian Models 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 Parametric vs Nonparametric Models 213 12.3 Measure-Theoretic Probability 214 12.4 Exchangeability 219 12.5 Kolmogorov Extension Theorem 221 12.6 Extension of Bayesian Models 223 12.7 Conjugacy 224 12.8 Construction of Nonparametric Bayesian Models 226 12.9 Posterior Computability 227 12.10 Algorithmic Sufficiency 228 12.11 Applications 232 12.11.1 Multiple Object Tracking 233 12.11.2 Data-Driven Probabilistic Optimal Power Flow 233 12.11.3 Analyzing Single-Molecule Tracks 233 12.12 Concluding Remarks 233 References 235 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisUses real world case studies to present the key technologies of design and application of the synchronous generator excitation system This book systematically introduces the important technologies of design and application of the synchronous generator excitation system, including the three-phase bridge rectifier circuit, diode rectifier for separate excitation, brushless excitation system and the static self-stimulation excitation system. It fuses discussions on specific topics and basic theories, providing a detailed description of the theories essential for synchronous generators in the analysis of excitation systems. Design and Application of Modern Synchronous Generator Excitation Systemsprovides a cutting-edge examination of excitation system, addressing conventional hydro-turbines, pumped storage units, steam turbines, and nuclear power units. It looks at the features and performance of the excitation system of the 700MW hydro-turbine deployed at the Three Gorges Hydropower PlTable of ContentsAbout the Author xxi Foreword xxiii Preface xxvii Introduction xxix Acknowledgement xxxi 1 Evolution and Development of Excitation Control 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Evolution of Excitation Control 1 1.3 Linear Multivariable Total Controller 11 1.4 Nonlinear Multivariable Excitation Controller 20 1.5 Power System Voltage Regulator (PSVR) 25 2 Characteristics of Synchronous Generator 35 2.1 Electromotive Force Phasor Diagram of Synchronous Generator 35 2.2 Electromagnetic Power and Power Angle Characteristic of Synchronous Generator 38 2.3 Operating Capacity Characteristic Curve of Synchronous Generator 41 2.4 Influence of External Reactance on Operating Capacity Characteristic Curve 45 2.5 Operating Characteristic Curves of Generator 50 2.6 Transient Characteristics of Synchronous Generator 54 3 Effect of Excitation Regulation on Power System Stability 67 3.1 Definition and Classification of Power System Stability 67 3.2 Criterion of Stability Level 68 3.3 Effects of Excitation Regulation on Power System Stability 68 4 Static and Transient State Characteristics of Excitation Systems 77 4.1 Static Characteristics of Excitation System 77 4.2 Ratio and Coefficient of Generator Voltage to Reactive Current of Generator 81 4.3 Transient State Characteristics of Excitation System 87 4.4 Stability Analysis of Excitation System 94 5 Control Law and Mathematical Model of Excitation System 97 5.1 Basic Control Law of Excitation System 97 5.2 Mathematical Model of the Excitation System 108 5.3 Mathematical Model of Excitation Control Unit 118 5.4 Parameter Setting of Excitation System 124 6 Basic Characteristics of Three-Phase Bridge Rectifier Circuit 137 6.1 Overview 137 6.2 Operating Principle of Three-Phase Bridge Rectifier 137 6.3 Type I Commutation State 139 6.4 Commutation Angle 144 6.5 Average Rectified Voltage 144 6.6 Instantaneous Rectified Voltage Value 147 6.7 Effective Element Current Value 147 6.8 Fundamental Wave and Harmonic Value for Alternating Current 152 6.9 Power Factor of Rectifying Device 156 6.10 Type III Commutation State 161 6.11 Type II Commutation State 167 6.12 External Characteristic Curve for Rectifier 168 6.13 Operating Principle of Three-Phase Bridge Inverter Circuit 170 7 Excitation System for Separately Excited Static Diode Rectifier 175 7.1 Harmonic Analysis for Alternating Current 175 7.2 Non-distortion Sinusoidal Potential and Equivalent Commutating Reactance 177 7.3 Expression for Commutation Angle γ, Load Resistance rf, and Commutating Reactance Xγ 182 7.4 Rectified Voltage Ratio 𝛽u and Rectified Current Ratio 𝛽i 184 7.5 Steady-State Calculations for AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 186 7.6 General External Characteristics of Exciter 189 7.7 Transient State Process of AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 191 7.8 Simplified Transient Mathematical Model of AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 193 7.9 Transient State Process of Excitation System in Case of Small Deviation Change in Generator Excitation Current 196 7.10 Influence of Diode Rectifier on Time Constant of Generator Excitation Loop 200 7.11 Excitation Voltage Response for AC Exciter with Rectifier Load 201 7.12 Short-Circuit Current Calculations for AC Exciter 205 7.13 Calculations for AC Rated Parameters and Forced Excitation Parameters 211 8 Brushless Excitation System 215 8.1 Evolution of Brushless Excitation System 215 8.2 Technical Specifications for Brushless Excitation System 219 8.3 Composition of Brushless Excitation System 221 8.4 Voltage Response Characteristics of AC Exciter 224 8.5 Control Characteristics of Brushless Excitation System 227 8.6 Mathematical Models for Brushless Excitation System 232 8.7 AC2 Model 243 8.8 Generator Excitation Parameter Detection and Fault Alarm 246 9 Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 255 9.1 Overview 255 9.2 Characteristics of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 255 9.3 Influence of Harmonic Current Load on Electromagnetic Characteristics of Auxiliary Generator 260 9.4 Parameterization of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 268 9.5 Separately Excited SCR Excitation System with High-/Low-Voltage Bridge Rectifier 272 9.6 Parameterization of High-/Low-Voltage Bridge Rectifier 276 9.7 Transient Process of Separately Excited SCR Excitation System 281 10 Static Self-Excitation System 285 10.1 Overview 285 10.2 Characteristics of Static Self-Excitation System 288 10.3 Shaft Voltage of Static Self-Excitation System 307 10.4 Coordination between Low Excitation Restriction and Loss-of-Excitation Protection 311 10.5 Electric Braking of Steam Turbine 321 10.6 Electric Braking Application Example at Pumped-Storage Power Station 326 11 Automatic Excitation Regulator 329 11.1 Overview 329 11.2 Theoretical Basis of Digital Control 330 11.3 Digital Sampling and Signal Conversion 337 11.4 Control Operation 340 11.5 Per-Unit Value Setting 345 11.6 Digital Phase Shift Trigger 346 11.7 External Characteristics of Three-Phase Fully Controlled Bridge Rectifier Circuit 348 11.8 Characteristics of Digital Excitation Systems 351 12 Excitation Transformer 365 12.1 Overview 365 12.2 Structural Characteristics of Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 367 12.3 Application Characteristics of Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 369 12.4 Specification for Resin Cast Dry-Type Excitation Transformer 369 12.5 Harmonic Current Analysis 389 13 Power Rectifier 395 13.1 Specification and Essential Parameters for Thyristor Rectifier Elements 395 13.2 Parameterization of Power Rectifier 400 13.3 Cooling of Large-Capacity Power Rectifier 407 13.4 Current Sharing of Power Rectifier 413 13.5 Protection of Power Rectifier 416 13.6 Thyristor Damage and Failure 429 13.7 Capacity of Power Rectifiers Operating in Parallel 433 13.8 Uncertainty of Parallel Operation of Double-Bridge Power Rectifiers 437 13.9 Five-Pole Disconnector of Power Rectifier 439 14 De-excitation and Rotor Overvoltage Protection of Synchronous Generator 441 14.1 Overview 441 14.2 Evaluation of Performance of De-excitation System 443 14.3 De-excitation System Classification 447 14.4 Influence of Saturation on De-excitation 463 14.5 Influence of Damping Winding Circuit on De-excitation 465 14.6 Field Circuit Breaker 467 14.7 Performance Characteristics of Nonlinear De-excitation Resistor 477 15 Excitation System Performance Characteristics of Hydropower Generator Set 485 15.1 Overview 485 15.2 Static Self-Excitation System of Xiangjiaba Hydro Power Station 485 16 Functional Characteristics of Excitation Control and Starting System of Reversible Pumped Storage Unit 521 16.1 Overview 521 16.2 Operation Mode and Excitation Control of Pumped Storage Unit 521 16.3 Application Example of Excitation System of Pumped Storage Unit 525 16.4 Working Principle of SFC 542 16.5 SFC Current and Speed Dual Closed-Loop Control System 560 16.6 Influence of SFC Start Current Harmonic Components on Power Station and Power System 562 16.7 Local Control Unit (LCU) Control Procedure for Pumped Storage Unit 566 16.8 Pumped Storage Unit Operating as Synchronous Condenser 568 16.9 De-excitation System of Pumped Storage Unit 569 16.10 Electric Braking of Pumped Storage Unit 572 16.11 Shaft Current Protection of Pumped Storage Unit 574 16.12 Application Characteristics of PSS of Pumped Storage Unit 577 17 Performance Characteristics of Excitation System of 1000 MW Turbine Generator Unit 579 17.1 Introduction of Excitation System of Turbine Generator of Malaysian Manjung 4 Thermal Power Station 579 17.2 Key Parameters of Turbine Generator Unit and Excitation System 581 17.3 Parameter Calculation of Main Components of Excitation System 585 17.4 Block Diagram of Automatically Regulated Excitation System 592 18 Performance Characteristics of 1000 MW Nuclear Power Steam Turbine Excitation System 601 18.1 Performance Characteristics of Steam Turbine Generator Brushless Excitation System of Fuqing Nuclear Power Station 601 18.2 Structural Characteristics of Brushless Excitation System 608 18.3 Analysis of Working State of Multi-Phase Brushless Exciter 612 18.4 Calculation of Excitation System Parameters of Fuqing Nuclear Power Station 618 18.5 Static Excitation System of Sanmen Nuclear Power Station 624 References 639 Index 643

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis second edition of the highly acclaimed RF Power Amplifiers has been thoroughly revised and expanded to reflect the latest challenges associated with power transmitters used in communications systems. With more rigorous treatment of many concepts, the new edition includes a unique combination of class-tested analysis and industry-proven design techniques. Radio frequency (RF) power amplifiers are the fundamental building blocks used in a vast variety of wireless communication circuits, radio and TV broadcasting transmitters, radars, wireless energy transfer, and industrial processes. Through a combination of theory and practice, RF Power Amplifiers, Second Edition provides a solid understanding of the key concepts, the principle of operation, synthesis, analysis, and design of RF power amplifiers. This extensive update boasts: up to date end of chapter summaries; review questions and problems; an expansion on key concepts; new examples related to real-world Table of ContentsPreface xvi About the Author xix List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Radio Transmitters 1 1.2 Batteries for Portable Electronics 2 1.3 Block Diagram of RF Power Amplifiers 3 1.4 Classes of Operation of RF Power Amplifiers 6 1.5 Waveforms of RF Power Amplifiers 8 1.6 Parameters of RF Power Amplifiers 9 1.7 Transmitter Noise 15 1.8 Conditions for 100% Efficiency of Power Amplifiers 16 1.9 Conditions for Nonzero Output Power at 100% Efficiency of Power Amplifiers 20 1.10 Output Power of Class E ZVS Amplifiers 23 1.11 Class E ZCS Amplifiers 26 1.12 Antennas 28 1.13 Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves 31 1.14 Frequency Spectrum 33 1.15 Duplexing 35 1.16 Multiple-Access Techniques 36 1.17 Nonlinear Distortion in Transmitters 38 1.18 Harmonics of Carrier Frequency 39 1.19 Intermodulation Distortion 42 1.20 AM/AM Compression and AM/PM Conversion 48 1.21 Dynamic Range of Power Amplifiers 48 1.22 Analog Modulation 50 1.23 Digital Modulation 70 1.24 Radars 73 1.25 Radio-Frequency Identification 75 1.26 Summary 76 1.27 References 79 1.28 Review Questions 81 1.29 Problems 83 2 Class A RF Power Amplifier 85 2.1 Introduction 85 2.2 Power MOSFET Characteristics 85 2.3 Short-Channel Effects 91 2.4 Circuit of Class A RF Power Amplifier 102 2.5 Waveforms in Class A RF Amplifier 105 2.6 Energy Parameters of Class A RF Power Amplifier 115 2.7 Parallel-Resonant Circuit 126 2.8 Power Losses and Efficiency of Parallel Resonant Circuit 129 2.9 Class A RF Power Amplifier with Current Mirror 132 2.10 Impedance Matching Circuits 138 2.11 Class A RF Linear Amplifier 142 2.12 Summary 146 2.13 References 148 2.14 Review Questions 149 2.15 Problems 150 3 Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers 153 3.1 Introduction 153 3.2 Class B RF Power Amplifier 153 3.3 Class AB and C RF Power Amplifiers 172 3.4 Push-Pull Complementary Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers 190 3.5 Transformer-Coupled Class B Push-Pull RF Power Amplifier 199 3.6 Class AB, B, and C RF Power Amplifiers with Variable-Envelope Signals 205 3.7 Summary 208 3.8 References 210 3.9 Review Questions 211 3.10 Problems 212 4 Class D RF Power Amplifiers 213 4.1 Introduction 213 4.2 MOSFET as a Switch 214 4.3 Circuit Description of Class D RF Power Amplifier 216 4.4 Principle of Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier 220 4.5 Topologies of Class D Voltage-Source RF Power Amplifiers 228 4.6 Analysis 230 4.7 Bandwidth of Class D RF Power Amplifier 240 4.8 Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier at Resonance 243 4.9 Class D RF Power Amplifier with Amplitude Modulation 250 4.10 Operation of Class D RF Power Amplifier Outside Resonance 252 4.11 Efficiency of Half-Bridge Class D Power Amplifier 260 4.12 Design Example 269 4.13 Transformer-Coupled Push-Pull Class D Voltage-Switching RF Power Amplifier 272 4.14 Class D Full-Bridge RF Power Amplifier 278 4.15 Phase Control of Full-Bridge Class D Power Amplifier 284 4.16 Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 287 4.17 Transformer-Coupled Push-pull Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 292 4.18 Bridge Class D Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 300 4.19 Summary 305 4.20 References 307 4.21 Review Questions 309 4.22 Problems 310 5 Class E Zero-Voltage-Switching RF Power Amplifiers 313 5.1 Introduction 313 5.2 Circuit Description 314 5.3 Circuit Operation 316 5.4 ZVS and ZDS Operation of Class E Amplifier 319 5.5 Suboptimum Operation 320 5.6 Analysis 321 5.7 Drain Efficiency of Ideal Class E Amplifier 329 5.8 RF Choke Inductance 329 5.9 Maximum Operating Frequency of Class-E Amplifier 330 5.10 Summary of Parameters at D = 0.5 331 5.11 Efficiency 332 5.12 Design of Basic Class E Amplifier 336 5.13 Impedance Matching Resonant Circuits 340 5.14 Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier with Only Nonlinear Shunt Capacitance360 5.15 Push-Pull Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier 365 5.16 Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier with Finite DC-Feed Inductance 367 5.17 Class E ZVS Amplifier with Parallel-Series Resonant Circuit 371 5.18 Class E ZVS Amplifier with Nonsinusoidal Output Voltage 374 5.19 Class E ZVS Power Amplifier with Parallel Resonant Circuit 380 5.20 Amplitude Modulation of Class E ZVS RF Power Amplifier 386 5.21 Summary 389 5.22 References 390 5.23 Review Questions 400 5.24 Problems 401 6 Class E Zero-Current-Switching RF Power Amplifier 403 6.1 Introduction 403 6.2 Circuit Description 403 6.3 Principle of Operation 404 6.4 Analysis 408 6.5 Power Relationships 413 6.6 Element Values of Load Network 413 6.7 Design Example 414 6.8 Summary 416 6.9 References 416 6.10 Review Questions 417 6.11 Problems 418 7 Class DE RF Power Amplifier 419 7.1 Introduction 419 7.2 Analysis of Class DE RF Power Amplifier 419 7.3 Components 427 7.4 Device Stresses 431 7.5 Design Equations 431 7.6 Maximum Operating Frequency 431 7.7 Class DE Amplifier with Only One Shunt Capacitor 433 7.8 Output Power 438 7.9 Cancellation of Nonlinearities of Transistor Output Capacitances 438 7.10 Amplitude Modulation of Class DE RF Power Amplifier 439 7.11 Summary 439 7.12 References 440 7.13 Review Questions 442 7.14 Problems 443 8 Class F RF Power Amplifiers 445 8.1 Introduction 445 8.2 Class F RF Power Amplifier with Third Harmonic 449 8.3 Class F35 RF Power Amplifier with Third and Fifth Harmonics 471 8.4 Class F357 RF Power Amplifier with Third, Fifth, and Seventh Harmonics 483 8.5 Class FT RF Power Amplifier with Parallel-Resonant Circuit and Quarter-Wavelength Transmission Line 484 8.6 Class F2 RF Power Amplifier with Second Harmonic 492 8.7 Class F24 RF Power Amplifier with Second and Fourth Harmonics 508 8.8 Class F246 RF Power Amplifier with Second, Fourth, and Sixth Harmonics 519 8.9 Class FK RF Power Amplifier with Series-Resonant Circuit and Quarter-Wavelength Transmission Line 520 8.10 Summary 526 8.11 References 527 8.12 Review Questions 529 8.13 Problems 9 Linearization and Efficiency Improvements of RF Power Amplifiers 533 9.1 Introduction 533 9.2 Predistortion 535 9.3 Feedforward Linearization Technique 537 9.4 Negative Feedback Linearization Technique 540 9.5 Envelope Elimination and Restoration 545 9.6 Envelope Tracking 547 9.7 The Doherty Amplifier 550 9.8 Outphasing Power Amplifier 557 9.9 Summary 561 9.10 References 562 9.11 Review Questions 571 9.12 Problems 572 10 Integrated Inductors 573 10.1 Introduction 573 10.2 Skin Effect 574 10.3 Resistance of Rectangular Trace 576 10.4 Inductance of Straight Rectangular Trace 579 10.5 Meander Inductors 581 10.6 Inductance of Straight Round Conductor 585 10.7 Inductance of Circular Round Wire Loop 588 10.8 Inductance of Two-Parallel Wire Loop 588 10.9 Inductance of Rectangle of Round Wire 589 10.10 Inductance of Polygon Round Wire Loop 589 10.11 Bondwire Inductors 590 10.12 Single-Turn Planar Inductor 592 10.13 Inductance of Planar Square Loop 595 10.14 Planar Spiral Inductors 595 10.15 Multi-Metal Spiral Inductors 613 10.16 Planar Transformers 614 10.17 MEMS Inductors 616 10.18 Inductance of Coaxial Cable 618 10.19 Inductance ofTwo-Wire Transmission Line 618 10.20 Eddy Currents in Integrated Inductors 618 10.21 Model of RF Integrated Inductors 620 10.22 PCB Inductors 622 10.23 Summary 625 10.24 References 626 10.25 Review Questions 632 10.26 Problems 633 11 RF Power Amplifiers with Dynamic Power Supply 635 11.1 Introduction 635 11.2 Dynamic Power Supply 635 11.3 Amplitude Modulator 636 11.4 DC Analysis of PWM Buck Converter Operating in CCM 637 11.5 Synchronous Buck Converter as Amplitude Modulator 679 11.6 Multiphase Buck Converter 686 11.7 Layout 688 11.8 Summary 690 11.9 References 693 11.10 Review Questions 699 11.11 Problems 700 12 Oscillators 701 12.1 Introduction 701 12.2 Classification of Oscillators 702 12.3 General Conditions for Oscillations 703 12.4 Topologies of LC Oscillators with Inverting Amplifier 718 12.5 Op-Amp Colpitts Oscillator 722 12.6 Single-Transistor Colpitts Oscillator 724 12.7 Common-Source Colpitts Oscillator 726 12.8 Common-Gate Colpitts Oscillator 737 12.9 Common-Drain Colpitts Oscillator 751 12.10 Clapp Oscillator 761 12.11 Crystal Oscillators 763 12.12 CMOS Oscillator 770 12.13 Hartley Oscillator 771 12.14 Armstrong Oscillator 774 12.15 LC Oscillators with Noninverting Amplifier 777 12.16 Cross-Coupled LC Oscillators 783 12.17 Wien-Bridge RC Oscillator 790 12.18 Oscillators with Negative Resistance 796 12.19 Voltage-Controlled Oscillators 801 12.20 Noise in Oscillators 802 12.21 Summary 813 12.22 References 815 12.23 Review Questions 821 12.24 Problems 822 13 Appendices 823 13.1 Appendix A SPICE Model of Power MOSFETs 823 13.2 Appendix B Introduction to SPICE 827 13.3 Appendix C Introduction to MATLAB R 830 13.4 Appendix D Trigonometric Fourier Series 834 13.5 Appendix E Circuit Theorems 838 13.6 Appendix F SABER Circuit Simulator 842 Answers to Problems 69

Read more less

Book SynopsisCloud Services, Networking and Management provides a comprehensive overview of the cloud infrastructure and services, as well as their underlying management mechanisms, including data center virtualization and networking, cloud security and reliability, big data analytics, scientific and commercial applications.Trade ReviewEach chapter of the book is a separate self-contained part. The length of each chapter is adequately selected, while the balance between an introduction for beginners and details for advanced readers is excellently preserved. For a majority of the covered topics, a comprehensive survey and thoughtful taxonomy are provided. The presented issues are followed by the exemplary solutions, which are not only conceptual, but very often describe practical deployments. Furthermore, the reference lists are complete, while indicated directions for further studies are relevant and valuable.......Summarizing, I recommend this book as a source of very relevant and valuable information about popular and emerging cloud-related topics. An additional advantage is that security and energy efficiency are also addressed. - (IEEE Communication Magazine- Nov 2016)Table of ContentsPreface xiii Contributors xvii Part I Basic Concepts and Enabling Technologies 1 1 Cloud Architectures, Networks, Services, and Management 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Part I: Introduction to Cloud Computing 4 1.3 Part II: Research Challenges—The Chapters in This Book 14 1.4 Conclusion 21 References 21 2 Virtualization in the Cloud 23 2.1 The Need for Virtualization Management in the Cloud 23 2.2 Basic Concepts 25 2.3 Virtualized Elements 26 2.4 Virtualization Operations 29 2.5 Interfaces for Virtualization Management 30 2.6 Tools and Systems 34 2.7 Challenges 40 References 44 3 Virtual Machine Migration 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 VM Migration 51 3.3 Virtual Network Migration without Packet Loss 59 3.4 Security of Virtual Environments 61 3.5 Future Directions 66 3.6 Conclusion 68 References 68 Part II Cloud Networking and Communications 73 4 Datacenter Networks and Relevant Standards 75 4.1 Overview 75 4.2 Topologies 76 4.3 Network Expansion 82 4.4 Traffic 85 4.5 Routing 89 4.6 Addressing 93 4.7 Research Challenges 96 4.8 Summary 98 References 99 5 Inter-Data-Center Networks with Minimum Operational Costs 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Inter-Data-Center Network Virtualization 108 5.3 IDC Network Design with Minimum Electric Bills 115 5.4 Inter-Data-Center Network Design with Minimum Downtime Penalties 120 5.5 Overcoming Energy versus Resilience Trade-Off 123 5.6 Summary and Discussions 124 References 126 6 Openflow and SDN for Clouds 129 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 SDN, Cloud Computing, and Virtualization Challenges 130 6.3 Software-Defined Networking 132 6.4 Overview of Cloud Computing and OpenStack 138 6.5 SDN for Cloud Computing 142 6.6 Combining OpenFlow and OpenStack with OpenDaylight 145 6.7 Software-Defined Infrastructures 149 6.8 Research Trends and Challenges 150 6.9 Concluding Remarks 151 References 151 7 Mobile Cloud Computing 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Mobile Cloud Computing 155 7.3 Risks in MCC 163 7.4 Risk Management for MCC 177 7.5 Conclusions 184 References 186 Part III Cloud Management 191 8 Energy Consumption Optimization in Cloud Data Centers 193 8.1 Introduction 193 8.2 Energy Consumption in Data Centers: Components and Models 195 8.3 Energy Efficient System-Level Optimization of Data Centers 198 8.4 Conclusions and Open Challenges 210 References 211 9 Performance Management and Monitoring 217 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 Background Concepts 219 9.3 Related Work 221 9.4 X-Cloud Application Management Platform 222 9.5 Implementation 229 9.6 Experiments and a Case Study 232 9.7 Challenges in Management on Heterogeneous Clouds 238 9.8 Conclusion 239 References 240 10 Resource Management and Scheduling 243 10.1 Introduction 243 10.2 Basic Concepts 244 10.3 Applications 248 10.4 Problem Definition 249 10.5 Resource Management and Scheduling in Clouds 254 10.6 Challenges and Perspectives 262 10.7 Conclusion 264 References 264 11 Cloud Security 269 11.1 Introduction 270 11.2 Technical Background 273 11.3 Existing Solutions 274 11.4 Transforming to the New IDPS Cloud Security Solutions 278 11.5 FlowIPS: Design and Implementation 279 11.6 FlowIPS vs Snort/Iptables IPS 282 11.7 Network Reconfiguration 284 11.8 Performance Comparison 288 11.9 Open Issues and Future Work 290 11.10 Conclusion 291 References 291 12 Survivability and Fault Tolerance in the Cloud 295 12.1 Introduction 295 12.2 Background 296 12.3 Failure Characterization in Cloud Environments 298 12.4 Availability-Aware Resource Allocation Schemes 299 12.5 Conclusion 307 References 307 Part IV Cloud Applications and Services 309 13 Scientific Applications on Clouds 311 13.1 Introduction 311 13.2 Background Information 313 13.3 Related Work 313 13.4 IWIR Workflow Model 314 13.5 Amazon SWF Background 315 13.6 RainCloud Workflow 317 13.7 IWIR-to-SWF Conversion 319 13.8 Experiments 324 13.9 Open Challenges 328 13.10 Conclusion 329 References 330 14 Interactive Multimedia Applications on Clouds 333 14.1 Introduction 333 14.2 Delivery Models for Interactive Multimedia Services 335 14.3 Cloud Gaming 339 14.4 UGC Live Streaming 345 14.5 Time-Shifting Video Streaming 351 14.6 Open Challenges 353 14.7 Conclusion 354 References 355 15 Big Data on Clouds (BDOC) 361 15.1 Introduction 361 15.2 Historical Perspective and State of the Art 362 15.3 Clouds—Supply and Demand of Big Data 364 15.4 Emerging Business Applications 365 15.5 Cloud and Service Availability 368 15.6 BDOC Security Issues 372 15.7 BDOC Legal Issues 379 15.8 Enabling Future Success—Stem Cultivation and Outreach 384 15.9 Open Challenges and Future Directions 385 15.10 Conclusions 388 References 388 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis comprehensive reference guides the reader through all HVDC technologies, including LCC (Line Commutated Converter), 2-level VSC and VSC HVDC based on modular multilevel converters (MMC) for an in-depth understanding of converters, system level design, operating principles and modeling. Written in a tutorial style, the book also describes the key principles of design, control, protection and operation of DC transmission grids, which will be substantially different from the practice with AC transmission grids. The first dedicated reference to the latest HVDC technologies and DC grid developments; this is an essential resource for graduate students and researchers as well as engineers and professionals working on the design, modeling and operation of DC grids and HVDC. Key features: Provides comprehensive coverage of LCC, VSC and (half and full bridge) MMC-based VSC technologies and DC transmission grids. Presents phasor and dynamic analytical models fTable of ContentsContents Preface xi Part I HVDC with Current Source Converters 1 1 Introduction to Line-Commutated HVDC 3 1.1 HVDC Applications 3 1.2 Line-Commutated HVDC Components 5 1.3 DC Cables and Overhead Lines 6 1.4 LCC HVDC Topologies 7 1.5 Losses in LCC HVDC Systems 9 1.6 Conversion of AC Lines to DC 10 1.7 Ultra-High Voltage HVDC 10 2 Thyristors 12 2.1 Operating Characteristics 12 2.2 Switching Characteristic 13 2.3 Losses in HVDC Thyristors 17 2.4 Valve Structure and Thyristor Snubbers 20 2.5 Thyristor Rating Selection and Overload Capability 22 3 Six-Pulse Diode and Thyristor Converter 23 3.1 Three-Phase Uncontrolled Bridge 23 3.2 Three-Phase Thyristor Rectifier 25 3.3 Analysis of Commutation Overlap in a Thyristor Converter 26 3.4 Active and Reactive Power in a Three-Phase Thyristor Converter 30 3.5 Inverter Operation 31 4 HVDC Rectifier Station Modelling, Control and Synchronization with AC Systems 35 4.1 HVDC Rectifier Controller 35 4.2 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) 36 5 HVDC Inverter Station Modelling and Control 40 5.1 Inverter Controller 40 5.2 Commutation Failure 42 6 HVDC System V-I Diagrams and Operating Modes 45 6.1 HVDC-Equivalent Circuit 45 6.2 HVDC V-I Operating Diagram 45 6.3 HVDC Power Reversal 48 7 HVDC Analytical Modelling and Stability 53 7.1 Introduction to Converters and HVDC Modelling 53 7.2 HVDC Analytical Model 54 7.3 CIGRE HVDC Benchmark Model 56 7.4 Converter Modelling, Linearization and Gain Scheduling 56 7.5 AC System Modelling for HVDC Stability Studies 58 7.6 LCC Converter Transformer Model 62 7.7 DC System Model 63 7.8 HVDC-HVAC System Model 65 7.9 Analytical Dynamic Model Verification 65 7.10 Basic HVDC Dynamic Analysis 66 7.11 HVDC Second Harmonic Instability 70 7.12 Oscillations of 100 Hz on the DC Side 71 8 HVDC Phasor Modelling and Interactions with AC System 72 8.1 Converter and DC System Phasor Model 72 8.2 Phasor AC System Model and Interaction with the DC System 73 8.3 Inverter AC Voltage and Power Profile as DC Current is Increasing 75 8.4 Influence of Converter Extinction Angle 76 8.5 Influence of Shunt Reactive Power Compensation 78 8.6 Influence of Load at the Converter Terminals 78 8.7 Influence of Operating Mode (DC Voltage Control Mode) 78 8.8 Rectifier Operating Mode 80 9 HVDC Operation with Weak AC Systems 82 9.1 Introduction 82 9.2 Short-Circuit Ratio and Equivalent Short-Circuit Ratio 82 9.3 Power Transfer between Two AC Systems 85 9.4 Phasor Study of Converter Interactions with Weak AC Systems 89 9.5 System Dynamics (Small Signal Stability) with Low SCR 90 9.6 Control and Main Circuit Solutions for Weak AC Grids 90 9.7 LCC HVDC with SVC (Static VAR Compensator) 91 9.8 Capacitor-Commutated Converters for HVDC 93 9.9 AC System with Low Inertia 93 10 Fault Management and HVDC System Protection 98 10.1 Introduction 98 10.2 DC Line Faults 98 10.3 AC System Faults 101 10.4 System Reconfiguration for Permanent DC Faults 103 10.5 Overvoltage Protection 106 11 LCC HVDC System Harmonics 107 11.1 Harmonic Performance Criteria 107 11.2 Harmonic Limits 108 11.3 Thyristor Converter Harmonics 109 11.4 Harmonic Filters 110 11.5 Noncharacteristic Harmonic Reduction Using HVDC Controls 118 Bibliography Part I Line Commutated Converter HVDC 119 Part II HVDC with Voltage Source Converters 121 12 VSC HVDC Applications and Topologies, Performance and Cost Comparison with LCC HVDC 123 12.1 Voltage Source Converters (VSC) 123 12.2 Comparison with Line-Commutated Converter (LCC) HVDC 125 12.3 Overhead and Subsea/Underground VSC HVDC Transmission 126 12.4 DC Cable Types with VSC HVDC 129 12.5 Monopolar and Bipolar VSC HVDC Systems 129 12.6 VSC HVDC Converter Topologies 130 12.7 VSC HVDC Station Components 135 12.8 AC Reactors 139 12.9 DC Reactors 139 13 IGBT Switches and VSC Converter Losses 141 13.1 Introduction to IGBT and IGCT 141 13.2 General VSC Converter Switch Requirements 142 13.3 IGBT Technology 142 13.4 Development of High Power IGBT Devices 147 13.5 IEGT Technology 148 13.6 Losses Calculation 148 13.7 Balancing Challenges in Series IGBT Chains 154 13.8 Snubbers Circuits 155 14 Single-Phase and Three-Phase Two-Level VSC Converters 156 14.1 Introduction 156 14.2 Single-Phase Voltage Source Converter 156 14.3 Three-Phase Voltage Source Converter 159 14.4 Square-Wave, Six-Pulse Operation 159 15 Two-Level PWM VSC Converters 167 15.1 Introduction 167 15.2 PWM Modulation 167 15.3 Sinusoidal Pulse-Width Modulation (SPWM) 168 15.4 Third Harmonic Injection (THI) 171 15.5 Selective Harmonic Elimination Modulation (SHE) 172 15.6 Converter Losses for Two-Level SPWM VSC 173 15.7 Harmonics with Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) 175 15.8 Comparison of PWM Modulation Techniques 178 16 Multilevel VSC Converters 180 16.1 Introduction 180 16.2 Modulation Techniques for Multilevel Converters 182 16.3 Neutral Point Clamped Multilevel Converter 183 16.4 Flying Capacitor Multilevel Converter 185 16.5 H-Bridge Cascaded Converter 186 16.6 Half Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter (MMC) 187 16.7 MMC Based on Full Bridge Topology 200 16.8 Comparison of Multilevel Topologies 208 17 Two-Level PWM VSC HVDC Modelling, Control and Dynamics 209 17.1 PWM Two-Level Converter Average Model 209 17.2 Two-Level PWM Converter Model in DQ Frame 210 17.3 VSC Converter Transformer Model 212 17.4 Two-Level VSC Converter and AC Grid Model in ABC Frame 213 17.5 Two-Level VSC Converter and AC Grid Model in DQ Rotating Coordinate Frame 213 17.6 VSC Converter Control Principles 214 17.7 The Inner Current Controller Design 215 17.8 Outer Controller Design 218 17.9 Complete VSC Converter Controller 221 17.10 Small-Signal Linearized VSC HVDC Model 224 17.11 Small-Signal Dynamic Studies 224 18 Two-Level VSC HVDC Phasor-Domain Interaction with AC Systems and PQ Operating Diagrams 226 18.1 Power Exchange between Two AC Voltage Sources 226 18.2 Converter Phasor Model and Power Exchange with an AC System 230 18.3 Phasor Study of VSC Converter Interaction with AC System 232 18.4 Operating Limits 234 18.5 Design Point Selection 236 18.6 Influence of AC System Strength 239 18.7 Influence of Transformer Reactance 243 18.8 Operation with Very Weak AC Systems 247 19 Half Bridge MMC Converter: Modelling, Control and Operating PQ Diagrams 254 19.1 Half Bridge MMC Converter Average Model in ABC Frame 254 19.2 Half-Bridge MMC Converter-Static DQ Frame and Phasor Model 257 19.3 Differential Current at Second Harmonic 262 19.4 Complete MMC Converter DQ Model in Matrix Form 263 19.5 Second Harmonic Circulating Current Suppression Controller 264 19.6 DQ Frame Model of MMC with Circulating Current Controller 267 19.7 Phasor Model of MMC with Circulating Current Suppression Controller 269 19.8 Dynamic MMC Model Using Equivalent Series Capacitor CMMC 270 19.9 Full Dynamic Analytical MMC Model 273 19.10 MMC Converter Controller 275 19.11 MMC Total Series Reactance in the Phasor Model 275 19.12 MMC VSC Interaction with AC System and PQ Operating Diagrams 277 20 VSC HVDC under AC and DC Fault Conditions 280 20.1 Introduction 280 20.2 Faults on the AC System 280 20.3 DC Faults with Two-Level VSC 281 20.4 Influence of DC Capacitors 286 20.5 VSC Converter Modelling under DC Faults and VSC Diode Bridge 287 20.6 Converter-Mode Transitions as DC Voltage Reduces 294 20.7 DC Faults with Half-Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter 294 20.8 DC Faults with Full-Bridge Modular Multilevel Converter 298 21 VSC HVDC Application for AC Grid Support and Operation with Passive AC Systems 302 21.1 VSC HVDC High-Level Controls and AC Grid Support 302 21.2 HVDC Embedded inside an AC Grid 303 21.3 HVDC Connecting Two Separate AC Grids 304 21.4 HVDC in Parallel with AC 304 21.5 Operation with a Passive AC System and Black Start Capability 305 21.6 VSC HVDC Operation with Offshore Wind Farms 305 21.7 VSC HVDC Supplying Power Offshore and Driving a MW-Size Variable-Speed Motor 307 Bibliography Part II Voltage Source Converter HVDC 309 Part III DC Transmission Grids 311 22 Introduction to DC Grids 313 22.1 DC versus AC Transmission 313 22.2 Terminology 314 22.3 DC Grid Planning, Topology and Power-Transfer Security 314 22.4 Technical Challenges 315 22.5 DC Grid Building by Multiple Manufacturers 316 22.6 Economic Aspects 316 23 DC Grids with Line-Commutated Converters 317 23.1 Multiterminal HVDC 317 23.2 Italy–Corsica–Sardinia Multiterminal HVDC Link 318 23.3 Connecting LCC Converter to a DC Grid 319 23.4 Control of LCC Converters in DC Grids 321 23.5 Control of LCC DC Grids through DC Voltage Droop Feedback 321 23.6 Managing LCC DC Grid Faults 323 23.7 Reactive Power Issues 325 23.8 Large LCC Rectifier Stations in DC Grids 325 24 DC Grids with Voltage Source Converters and Power-Flow Model 326 24.1 Connecting a VSC Converter to a DC Grid 326 24.2 DC Grid Power Flow Model 327 24.3 DC Grid Power Flow under DC Faults 331 25 DC Grid Control 334 25.1 Introduction 334 25.2 Fast Local VSC Converter Control in DC Grids 334 25.3 DC Grid Dispatcher with Remote Communication 336 25.4 Primary, Secondary and Tertiary DC Grid Control 337 25.5 DC Voltage Droop Control for VSC Converters in DC Grids 338 25.6 Three-Level Control for VSC Converters with Dispatcher Droop 339 25.7 Power Flow Algorithm When DC Powers are Regulated 340 25.8 Power Flow and Control Study of CIGRE DC Grid-Test System 344 26 DC Grid Fault Management and DC Circuit Breakers 349 26.1 Introduction 349 26.2 Fault Current Components in DC Grids 350 26.3 DC System Protection Coordination with AC System Protection 352 26.4 Mechanical DC Circuit Breaker 352 26.5 Semiconductor Based DC Circuit Breaker 355 26.6 Hybrid DC Circuit Breaker 359 26.7 DC Grid-Protection System Development 361 26.8 DC Grid Selective Protection System Based on Current Derivative or Travelling Wave Identification 362 26.9 Differential DC Grid Protection Strategy 363 26.10 DC Grid Selective Protection System Based on Local Signals 364 26.11 DC Grids with DC Fault-Tolerant VSC Converters 365 27 High Power DC/DC Converters and DC Power-Flow Controlling Devices 372 27.1 Introduction 372 27.2 Power Flow Control Using Series Resistors 373 27.3 Low Stepping-Ratio DC/DC Converters 376 27.4 High Stepping Ratio Isolated DC/DC Converter 383 27.5 High Stepping Ratio LCL DC/DC Converter 383 27.6 Building DC Grids with DC/DC Converters 385 27.7 DC Hubs 387 27.8 Developing DC Grids Using DC Hubs 390 27.9 North Sea DC Grid Topologies 390 Bibliography Part III DC Transmission Grids 394 Appendix A Variable Notations 396 Appendix B Analytical Background for Rotating DQ Frame 398 Appendix C System Modelling Using Complex Numbers and Phasors 409 Appendix D Simulink Examples 411 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction to Reflectarray Antennas 1 1.1 Reflectarray Concept 1 1.2 Reflectarray Developments 2 1.3 Overview of this Book 5 References 7 2 Analysis and Design of Reflectarray Elements 9 2.1 Phase‐Shift Distribution on the Reflectarray Aperture 9 2.2 Phase Tuning Approaches for Reflectarray Elements 13 2.2.1 Elements with Phase/Time‐Delay Lines 14 2.2.2 Elements with Variable Sizes 15 2.2.3 Elements with Variable Rotation Angles 16 2.3 Element Analysis Methods 18 2.3.1 Periodic Boundary Conditions and Floquet Port Excitation 19 2.3.2 Metallic Waveguide Simulators 19 2.3.3 Analytical Circuit Models 21 2.3.4 Comparison of Element Analysis Techniques 22 2.3.4.1 Comparison between PBC and Metallic Waveguides 23 2.3.4.2 Comparison between PBC and the Circuit Model 24 2.4 Examples of Classic Reflectarray Elements 26 2.4.1 Rectangular Patch with Phase‐Delay Lines 26 2.4.2 Variable Size Square Patch 30 2.4.3 Single Slot Ring Elements 33 2.5 Reflectarray Element Characteristics and Design Considerations 37 2.5.1 Frequency Behavior of Element Reflection Coefficients 37 2.5.2 Effects of Oblique Incidence Angles on Element Reflection Coefficients 37 2.5.3 Sources of Phase Error in Reflectarray Element Design 41 2.6 Reflectarray Element Measurements 43 References 46 3 System Design and Aperture Efficiency Analysis 49 3.1 A General Feed Model 49 3.1.1 Models of Linearly Polarized and Circularly Polarized Feeds 50 3.1.2 Balanced Feed Models 51 3.2 Aperture Efficiency 53 3.2.1 Spillover Efficiency 53 3.2.2 Illumination Efficiency 54 3.2.3 Effects of Aperture Shape on Efficiency 55 3.2.4 Effects of Feed Location on Efficiency 59 3.3 Aperture Blockage and Edge Diffraction 60 3.3.1 Aperture Blockage and Offset Systems 60 3.3.2 Edge Taper and Edge Diffraction 63 3.4 The Analogy between a Reflectarray and a Parabolic Reflector 70 3.4.1 The Offset System Configurations 71 3.4.2 Analogous Offset Reflector 72 3.4.2.1 Transformation from Reflector to Reflectarray System 72 3.4.2.2 Transformation from Reflectarray to Reflector System 75 3.4.3 Example of Analogous Offset Systems 76 References 77 4 Radiation Analysis Techniques 79 4.1 Array Theory Approach: The Robust Analysis Technique 80 4.1.1 Idealized Feed and Element Patterns 80 4.1.2 Element Excitations and Reflectarray Radiation Pattern 81 4.2 Aperture Field Approach: The Classical Analysis Technique 82 4.2.1 Complex Feed Patterns 82 4.2.2 Field Transformations from Feed to Aperture and Equivalent Surface Current 83 4.2.3 Near‐Field to Far‐Field Transforms and Reflectarray Radiation Pattern 85 4.3 Important Topics in Reflectarray Radiation Analysis 87 4.3.1 Principal Radiation Planes 87 4.3.2 Co‐ and Cross‐Polarized Patterns 89 4.3.3 Antenna Directivity 90 4.3.4 Antenna Efficiency and Gain 91 4.3.5 Spectral Transforms and Computational Speedup 94 4.4 Full‐Wave Simulation Approaches 96 4.4.1 Constructed Aperture Currents Under Local‐Periodicity Approximation 96 4.4.2 Complete Reflectarray Models 96 4.5 Numerical Examples 98 4.5.1 Comparison of the Array Theory and Aperture Field Analysis Techniques 98 4.5.1.1 Example 1: Reflectarray Antenna with a Broadside Beam 99 4.5.1.2 Example 2: Reflectarray Antenna with an Off‐Broadside Beam 100 4.5.1.3 Comparison of Calculated Directivity versus Frequency 103 4.5.2 Consideration in the Array Theory Technique: Element Pattern Effect 105 4.5.3 Consideration in the Aperture Field Technique: Variations of Equivalence Principle 106 4.5.4 Comparisons with Full‐Wave Technique 107 References 110 5 Bandwidth of Reflectarray Antennas 113 5.1 Bandwidth Constraints in Reflectarray Antennas 113 5.1.1 Frequency Behavior of Element Phase Error 113 5.1.2 Frequency Behavior of Spatial Phase Delay 115 5.1.3 Aperture Phase Error and Reflectarray Bandwidth Limitations 118 5.2 Reflectarray Element Bandwidth 121 5.2.1 Physics of Element Bandwidth Constraints 121 5.2.2 Parametric Studies on Element Bandwidth 122 5.3 Reflectarray System Bandwidth 135 5.3.1 Effect of Aperture Size on Reflectarray Bandwidth 135 5.3.2 Effects of Element on Reflectarray Bandwidth 140 References 144 6 Reflectarray Design Examples 147 6.1 A Ku‐band Reflectarray Antenna: A Step‐by‐Step Design Example 147 6.1.1 Feed Antenna Characteristics 147 6.1.2 Reflectarray System Design 150 6.1.3 Reflectarray Element Design 153 6.1.4 Radiation Analysis 156 6.1.5 Fabrication and Measurements 159 6.2 A Circularly Polarized Reflectarray Antenna using an Element Rotation Technique 165 6.3 Bandwidth Comparison of Reflectarray Designs using Different Elements 169 References 176 7 Broadband and Multiband Reflectarray Antennas 179 7.1 Broadband Reflectarray Design Topologies 179 7.1.1 Multilayer Multi‐Resonance Elements 179 7.1.2 Single‐Layer Multi‐Resonance Elements 181 7.1.3 Sub‐Wavelength Elements 184 7.1.4 Reflectarrays Employing Single‐Layer and Double‐Layer Sub‐Wavelength Elements 188 7.1.5 Broadband Design Methods for Large Reflectarrays 197 7.2 Phase Synthesis for Broadband Operation 197 7.2.1 A Phase Synthesized Broadband Reflectarray 200 7.2.2 A Dual‐Frequency Broadband Reflectarray 203 7.3 Multiband Reflectarray Designs 206 7.3.1 A Single‐Layer Dual‐Band Circularly Polarized Reflectarray 210 7.3.2 A Single-Layer Tri-Band Reflectarray 213 References 221 8 Terahertz, Infrared, and Optical Reflectarray Antennas 227 8.1 Above Microwave Frequencies 227 8.2 Material Characteristics at Terahertz and Infrared Frequencies 228 8.2.1 Optical Measurements and Electromagnetic Parameters 228 8.2.2 Measured Properties of Conductors and Dielectric Materials 229 8.2.3 Calculating Drude Model Parameters for Conductors 229 8.3 Element Losses at Infrared Frequencies 234 8.3.1 Conductor Losses 234 8.3.1.1 Effect of Conductor Thickness 234 8.3.1.2 Effect of Complex Conductivity 237 8.3.2 Dielectric Losses 240 8.3.3 Effect of Losses on Reflection Properties of Elements 241 8.3.4 Circuit‐Model Analysis 242 8.3.4.1 Circuit Theory and Loss Study 242 8.3.4.2 Zero‐Pole Analysis of Element Performance 243 8.4 Reflectarray Design Methodologies and Enabling Technologies 245 8.4.1 Reflectarrays with Patch Elements 245 8.4.2 Dielectric Resonator Reflectarrays 248 8.4.3 Dielectric Reflectarrays 251 8.4.3.1 Dielectric Property and 3D Printing Technique 251 8.4.3.2 Dielectric Reflectarray Design 253 8.4.3.3 Dielectric Reflectarray Prototypes and Measurements 259 8.5 Future Trends 261 References 264 9 Multi‐Beam and Shaped‐Beam Reflectarray Antennas 267 9.1 Direct Design Approaches for Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 268 9.1.1 Geometrical Aperture Division 268 9.1.2 Superposition of Aperture Fields 271 9.1.3 Comparison of Direct Design Approaches 272 9.2 Synthesis Design Approaches for Shaped‐ and Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 275 9.2.1 Basics of Synthesis Techniques 275 9.2.2 Local‐Search Techniques 276 9.2.3 Global‐Search Techniques 279 9.2.4 Full‐Wave Optimization Design Approaches 280 9.3 Practical Reflectarray Designs 281 9.3.1 Single‐Feed Reflectarray with Multiple Symmetric Beams 281 9.3.2 Feed Reflectarrays with Multiple Asymmetric Beams 286 9.3.3 Shaped‐Beam Reflectarrays 294 9.3.4 Multi‐Feed Multi‐Beam Reflectarrays 297 References 300 10 Beam‐Scanning Reflectarray Antennas 303 10.1 Beam‐Scanning Approaches for Reflectarray Antennas 304 10.1.1 Design Methodologies 304 10.1.2 Classifications Based on Reflector Type 306 10.2 Feed‐Tuning Techniques 307 10.2.1 Fully Illuminated Single‐Reflector Configurations 307 10.2.1.1 Parabolic‐Phase Apertures 307 10.2.1.2 Non‐Parabolic‐Phase Apertures 313 10.2.2 Partially Illuminated Single‐Reflector Configurations 324 10.2.2.1 Parabolic Cylindrical‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (pcpra) 324 10.2.2.2 Parabolic Torus‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (PTPRA) 329 10.2.2.3 Spherical‐Phase Reflectarray Antennas (SPRA) 331 10.2.3 Dual‐Reflector Configurations 334 10.2.3.1 Parabolic Reflector/Reflectarray Antennas 334 10.2.3.2 Non‐Parabolic Reflector/Reflectarray Antennas 336 10.2.4 Summary of Feed‐Tuning Techniques 337 10.3 Aperture Phase‐Tuning Techniques 339 10.3.1 Basics of Aperture Phase Tuning 339 10.3.2 Enabling Technologies 341 10.3.2.1 Mechanical Actuators/Motors 341 10.3.2.2 Electronic Devices 343 10.3.2.3 Functional Materials 352 10.4 Frontiers in Beam‐Scanning Reflectarray Research 355 10.4.1 Active Reflectarrays 355 10.4.2 Comparison Between Analog and Digital Phase Control 355 10.4.3 Sub‐Array Techniques 358 10.4.4 Hybrid Configurations 359 References 359 11 Reflectarray Engineering and Emerging Applications 367 11.1 Advanced Reflectarray Geometries 367 11.1.1 Conformal Reflectarrays 367 11.1.1.1 Analysis of Conformal Reflectarrays 367 11.1.1.2 Radiation Characteristics of Conformal Reflectarrays on Cylindrical Surfaces 369 11.1.2 Dual‐Reflectarrays 375 11.2 Reflectarrays for Satellite Applications 379 11.2.1 An L‐Band Reflectarray for the Beidou Satellite System 381 11.2.2 Reflectarrays Integrated with Solar Cells 384 11.3 Power Combining and Amplifying Reflectarrays 388 11.4 A Perspective on Reflectarray Antennas 393 11.4.1 Large‐Aperture Planar Reflectarray Antennas 393 11.4.2 Reflectarray Antennas with Broad Bandwidth, Beam‐Scanning Capability, and Low Cost 396 11.4.3 From Reflectarray Antennas to Transmitarray Antennas 396 References 397 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisDesign, Control and Application of Modular Multilevel Converters for HVDC Transmission Systemsis a comprehensive guide to semiconductor technologies applicable for MMC design, component sizing control, modulation, and application of the MMC technology for HVDC transmission. Separated into three distinct parts, the first offers an overview of MMC technology, including information on converter component sizing, Control and Communication, Protection and Fault Management, and Generic Modelling and Simulation. The second covers the applications of MMC in offshore WPP, including planning, technical and economic requirements and optimization options, fault management, dynamic and transient stability. Finally, the third chapter explores the applications of MMC in HVDC transmission and Multi Terminal configurations, including Supergrids. Key features: Unique coverage of the offshore application and optimization of MMC-HVDC schemes for the export of offshore Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv About the Companion Website xvii Nomenclature xix Introduction 1 1 Introduction to Modular Multilevel Converters 7 1.1 Introduction 7 1.2 The Two-Level Voltage Source Converter 9 1.2.1 Topology and Basic Function 9 1.2.2 Steady-State Operation 12 1.3 Benefits of Multilevel Converters 15 1.4 Early Multilevel Converters 17 1.4.1 Diode Clamped Converters 17 1.4.2 Flying Capacitor Converters 20 1.5 Cascaded Multilevel Converters 23 1.5.1 Submodules and Submodule Strings 23 1.5.2 Modular Multilevel Converter with Half-Bridge Submodules 28 1.5.3 Other Cascaded Converter Topologies 43 1.6 Summary 57 2 Main-Circuit Design 60 2.1 Introduction 60 2.2 Properties and Design Choices of Power Semiconductor Devices for High-Power Applications 61 2.2.1 Historical Overview of the Development Toward Modern Power Semiconductors 61 2.2.2 Basic Conduction Properties of Power Semiconductor Devices 64 2.2.3 P–N Junctions for Blocking 65 2.2.4 Conduction Properties and the Need for Carrier Injection 67 2.2.5 Switching Properties 72 2.2.6 Packaging 73 2.2.7 Reliability of Power Semiconductor Devices 80 2.2.8 Silicon Carbide Power Devices 84 2.3 Medium-Voltage Capacitors for Submodules 92 2.3.1 Design and Fabrication 93 2.3.2 Self-Healing and Reliability 95 2.4 Arm Inductors 96 2.5 Submodule Configurations 98 2.5.1 Existing Half-Bridge Submodule Realizations 99 2.5.2 Clamped Single-Submodule 104 2.5.3 Clamped Double-Submodule 105 2.5.4 Unipolar-Voltage Full-Bridge Submodule 106 2.5.5 Five-Level Cross-Connected Submodule 107 2.5.6 Three-Level Cross-Connected Submodule 107 2.5.7 Double Submodule 108 2.5.8 Semi-Full-Bridge Submodule 109 2.5.9 Soft-Switching Submodules 110 2.6 Choice of Main-Circuit Parameters 112 2.6.1 Main Input Data 112 2.6.2 Choice of Power Semiconductor Devices 114 2.6.3 Choice of the Number of Submodules 115 2.6.4 Choice of Submodule Capacitance 117 2.6.5 Choice of Arm Inductance 117 2.7 Handling of Redundant and Faulty Submodules 118 2.7.1 Method 1 118 2.7.2 Method 2 119 2.7.3 Comparison of Method 1 and Method 2 120 2.7.4 Handling of Redundancy Using IGBT Stacks 121 2.8 Auxiliary Power Supplies for Submodules 121 2.8.1 Using the Submodule Capacitor as Power Source 121 2.8.2 Power Supplies with High-Voltage Inputs 123 2.8.3 The Tapped-Inductor Buck Converter 125 2.9 Start-Up Procedures 126 2.10 Summary 126 3 Dynamics and Control 133 3.1 Introduction 133 3.2 Fundamentals 134 3.2.1 Arms 135 3.2.2 Submodules 135 3.2.3 AC Bus 136 3.2.4 DC Bus 136 3.2.5 Currents 136 3.3 Converter Operating Principle and Averaged Dynamic Model 137 3.3.1 Dynamic Relations for the Currents 137 3.3.2 Selection of the Mean Sum Capacitor Voltages 137 3.3.3 Averaging Principle 138 3.3.4 Ideal Selection of the Insertion Indices 140 3.3.5 Sum-Capacitor-Voltage Ripples 141 3.3.6 Maximum Output Voltage 144 3.3.7 DC-Bus Dynamics 146 3.3.8 Time Delays 148 3.4 Per-Phase Output-Current Control 148 3.4.1 Tracking of a Sinusoidal Reference Using a PI Controller 149 3.4.2 Resonant Filters and Generalized Integrators 150 3.4.3 Tracking of a Sinusoidal Reference Using a PR Controller 152 3.4.4 Parameter Selection for a PR Current Controller 153 3.4.5 Output-Current Controller Design 157 3.5 Arm-Balancing (Internal) Control 161 3.5.1 Circulating-Current Control 163 3.5.2 Direct Voltage Control 163 3.5.3 Closed-Loop Voltage Control 166 3.5.4 Open-Loop Voltage Control 168 3.5.5 Hybrid Voltage Control 172 3.6 Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.1 Balanced Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.2 Imbalanced Three-Phase Systems 175 3.6.3 Instantaneous Active Power 176 3.6.4 Wye (Y) and Delta (Δ) Connections 177 3.6.5 Harmonics 177 3.6.6 Space Vectors 178 3.6.7 Instantaneous Power 182 3.6.8 Selection of the Space-Vector Scaling Constant 184 3.7 Vector Output-Current Control 184 3.7.1 PR (PI) Controller 186 3.7.2 Reference-Vector Saturation 188 3.7.3 Transformations 188 3.7.4 Zero-Sequence Injection 190 3.8 Higher-Level Control 192 3.8.1 Phase-Locked Loop 193 3.8.2 Open-Loop Active- and Reactive-Power Control 197 3.8.3 DC-Bus-Voltage Control 198 3.8.4 Power-Synchronization Control 200 3.9 Control Architectures 207 3.9.1 Communication Network 209 3.9.2 Fault-Tolerant Communication Networks 211 3.10 Summary 212 4 Control under Unbalanced Grid Conditions 214 4.1 Introduction 214 4.2 Grid Requirements 214 4.3 Shortcomings of Conventional Vector Control 215 4.3.1 PLL with Notch Filter 216 4.4 Positive/Negative-Sequence Extraction 219 4.4.1 DDSRF-PNSE 219 4.4.2 DSOGI-PNSE 221 4.5 Injection Reference Strategy 223 4.5.1 PSI with PSI-LVRT Compliance 225 4.5.2 MSI-LVRT Mixed Positive- and Negative-Sequence Injection with both PSI-LVRT and NSI-LVRT Compliance 226 4.6 Component-Based Vector Output-Current Control 226 4.6.1 DDSRF-PNSE-Based Control 226 4.6.2 DSOGI-PNSE-Based Control 227 4.7 Summary 228 5 Modulation and Submodule Energy Balancing 232 5.1 Introduction 232 5.2 Fundamentals of Pulse-Width Modulation 233 5.2.1 Basic Concepts 233 5.2.2 Performance of Modulation Methods 234 5.2.3 Reference Third-Harmonic Injection in Three-Phase Systems 235 5.3 Carrier-Based Modulation Methods 236 5.3.1 Two-Level Carrier-Based Modulation 236 5.3.2 Analysis by Fourier Series Expansion 237 5.3.3 Polyphase Systems 242 5.4 Multilevel Carrier-Based Modulation 243 5.4.1 Phase-Shifted Carriers 243 5.4.2 Level-Shifted Carriers 250 5.5 Nearest-Level Control 252 5.6 Submodule Energy Balancing Methods 256 5.6.1 Submodule Sorting 256 5.6.2 Predictive Sorting 259 5.6.3 Tolerance Band Methods 263 5.6.4 Individual Submodule-Capacitor-Voltage Control 269 5.7 Summary 270 6 Modeling and Simulation 272 6.1 Introduction 272 6.2 Leg-Level Averaged (LLA) Model 274 6.3 Arm-Level Averaged (ALA) Model 275 6.3.1 Arm-Level Averaged Model with Blocking Capability (ALA-BLK) 276 6.4 Submodule-Level Averaged (SLA) Model 278 6.4.1 Vectorized Simulation Models 279 6.5 Submodule-Level Switched (SLS) Model 280 6.5.1 Multiple Phase-Shifted Carrier (PSC) Simulation 281 6.6 Summary 281 7 Design and Optimization of MMC-HVDC Schemes for Offshore Wind-Power Plant Application 283 7.1 Introduction 283 7.2 The Influence of Regulatory Frameworks on the Development Strategies for Offshore HVDC Schemes 284 7.2.1 UK's Regulatory Framework for Offshore Transmission Assets 285 7.2.2 Germany’s Regulatory Framework for Offshore Transmission Assets 286 7.3 Impact of Regulatory Frameworks on the Functional Requirements and Design of Offshore HVDC Terminals 286 7.4 Components of an Offshore MMC-HVDC Converter 287 7.4.1 Offshore HVDC Converter Transformer 289 7.4.2 Phase Reactors and DC Pole Reactors 290 7.4.3 Converter Valve Hall 292 7.4.4 Control and Protection Systems 293 7.4.5 AC and DC Switchyards 293 7.4.6 Auxiliary Systems 293 7.5 Offshore Platform Concepts 294 7.5.1 Accommodation Offshore 295 7.6 Onshore HVDC Converter 295 7.6.1 Onshore DC Choppers/Dynamic Brakers 296 7.6.2 Inrush Current Limiter Resistors 297 7.7 Recommended System Studies for the Development and Integration of an Offshore HVDC Link to a WPP 298 7.7.1 Conceptual and Feasibility Studies with Steady-State Load Flow 299 7.7.2 Short-Circuit Analysis 301 7.7.3 Dynamic System Performance Analysis 301 7.7.4 Transient Stability Analysis 301 7.7.5 Harmonic Analysis 302 7.7.6 Ferroresonance 302 7.8 Summary 303 8 MMC-HVDC Standards and Commissioning Procedures 305 8.1 Introduction 305 8.2 CIGRE and IEC Activities for the Standardization of MMC-HVDC Technology 306 8.2.1 Hierarchy of Available and Applicable Codes, Standards and Best Practice Recommendations for MMC-HVDC Projects 309 8.3 MMC-HVDC Commissioning and Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 309 8.3.1 Pre-Commissioning 311 8.3.2 Offsite Commissioning Tests or Factory Acceptance Tests 312 8.3.3 Onsite Testing and Site Acceptance Tests 313 8.3.4 Onsite Energizing Tests 314 8.4 Summary 317 9 Control and Protection of MMC-HVDC under AC and DC Network Fault Contingencies 318 9.1 Introduction 318 9.2 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under Unbalanced AC Network Contingency 319 9.2.1 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under DC Fault Contingency 321 9.3 MMC-HVDC Fault Characteristics under Unbalanced AC Network Contingency 322 9.3.1 Internal AC Bus Fault Conditions at the Secondary Side of the Converter Transformer 323 9.4 DC Pole-to-Ground Short-Circuit Fault Characteristics of the Half-Bridge MMC-HVDC 325 9.4.1 DC Pole-to-Pole Short-Circuit Fault Characteristics of the Half-Bridge MMC-HVDC 325 9.5 MMC-HVDC Component Failures 327 9.5.1 Submodule Semiconductor Failures 327 9.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Failure 328 9.5.3 Phase Reactor Failure 329 9.5.4 Converter Transformer Failure 329 9.6 MMC-HVDC Protection Systems 329 9.6.1 AC-Side Protections 331 9.6.2 DC-Side Protections 331 9.6.3 DC-Bus Undervoltage, Overvoltage Protection 331 9.6.4 DC-Bus Voltage Unbalance Protection 332 9.6.5 DC-Bus Overcurrent Protection 332 9.6.6 DC Bus Differential Protection 332 9.6.7 Valve and Submodule Protection 332 9.6.8 Transformer Protection 333 9.6.9 Primary Converter AC Breaker Failure Protection 333 9.7 Summary 333 10 MMC-HVDC Transmission Technology and MTDC Networks 336 10.1 Introduction 336 10.2 LCC-HVDC Transmission Technology 336 10.3 Two-Level VSC-HVDC Transmission Technology 338 10.3.1 Comparison of VSC-HVDC vs. LCC-HVDC Technology 338 10.4 Modular Multilevel HVDC Transmission Technology 339 10.4.1 Monopolar Asymmetric MMC-HVDC Scheme Configuration 340 10.4.2 Symmetrical Monopole MMC-HVDC Scheme Configuration 340 10.4.3 Bipolar HVDC Scheme Configuration 341 10.4.4 Homopolar HVDC Scheme Configuration 342 10.4.5 Back-to-Back HVDC Scheme Configuration 342 10.5 The European HVDC Projects and MTDC Network Perspectives 343 10.5.1 The North Sea Countries Offshore Grid Initiative (NSCOGI) 343 10.5.2 Large Integration of Offshore Wind Farms and Creation of the Offshore DC Grid 344 10.6 Multi-Terminal HVDC Configurations 345 10.6.1 Series-Connected MTDC Network 346 10.6.2 Parallel-Connected MTDC Network 346 10.6.3 Meshed MTDC Networks 347 10.7 DC Load Flow Control in MTDC Networks 348 10.8 DC Grid Control Strategies 349 10.8.1 Dynamic Voltage Control and Power Balancing in MTDC Networks 350 10.8.2 Power and Voltage Droop Control Strategy 351 10.8.3 Voltage Margin Control Method 352 10.8.4 Dead-Band Droop Control 352 10.8.5 Centralized and Distributed Voltage Control Strategies 354 10.9 DC Fault Detection and Protection in MTDC Networks 355 10.10 Fault-Detection Methods in MTDC 357 10.10.1 Overcurrent and Voltage Detection Methods 357 10.10.2 Distance Relay Protection 359 10.10.3 Differential Line Protection 359 10.10.4 Voltage Derivative Detection 359 10.10.5 Traveling Wave Based Detection 360 10.10.6 Frequency Domain Based Detection 361 10.10.7 Wavelet Based Fault Detection 361 10.11 DC Circuit Breaker Technologies 362 10.11.1 DC Circuit Breaker with MOVs in Series with the DC Line 364 10.11.2 DC Breakers with MOVs in Parallel with the DC Line 366 10.12 Fault-Current Limiters 367 10.12.1 Fault Current Limiting Reactors 367 10.12.2 Solid-State Fault-Current Limiters 368 10.12.3 Superconducting Fault-Current Limiters 369 10.13 The Influence of Grounding Strategy on Fault Currents 369 10.14 DC Supergrids of the Future 370 10.15 Summary 371 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents cocreational perspectives on current international practices and theories relevant to strategic communication The Handbook of Strategic Communication brings together work from leading scholars and practitioners in the field to explore the many practical, national and cultural differences in modern approaches to strategic communication. Designed to provide a coherent understanding of strategic communication across various subfields, this authoritative volume familiarizes practitioners, researchers, and advanced students with an inclusive range of international practices, current theories, and contemporary debates and issues in this dynamic, multidisciplinary field. This Handbook covers an expansive range of strategic communication models, theories, and applications, comprising two dozen in-depth chapters written by international scholars and practitioners. In-depth essays discuss the three core areas of strategic communicationpublic relatioTable of ContentsIntroduction and Authors 1 1 Strategic Communication: Field, Concepts, and the Cocreational Model 6Carl H. Botan Part I Strategic Communication Around the World 15 2 Dialogic Strategic Communication: A Key for Effective, Sustainable, and Ethical Social Conflict Management in Guatemala 17Karina J. Garcia-Ruano 3 Strategic Rhetoric, Dialogue, and the Long Now: A Case Study of Long-Term Thinking 31Michael L. Kent and Petra Theunissen 4 Strategic Communication in Turkish Public Sector: Through the Lens of Public Relations 45B. Pınar Özdemir and Melike Aktaş Other chapters addressing strategic communication around the world: Chapters 6 & 8 (Part II), Chapter 12 (Part III), Chapter 18 (Part V), Chapter 21 (Part VI) Part II Cocreational Perspective in Strategic Communication 59 5 A Cocreational Approach to Social-Mediated Crisis Communication: Communicating Health Crises Strategically on Social Media 61Yan Jin and Lucinda Austin 6 The Cocreational View of Character Assassination 76Sergei A. Samoilenko 7 Cocreational Perspectives on Strategic Communication in Counterterrorism 91Damion Waymer 8 Communicating Safety in Norwegian Road Tunnels: A Cocreational Perspective of Strategic Communication 102Sverre Kjetil Rød and Daniel Nilsson Other chapters addressing the cocreational perspective: Chapter 1, Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapter 9 (Part III), Chapter 17 (Part V), Chapter 21 (Part VI) Part III Strategic Communication in Business, Government, and Military 111 9 Strategic Communication in the Military: An Air Force Perspective 113Ronaldo Martinez Jr., Katrina J. Cheesman, Nicholas J. Mercurio, and Cara A. Bousie 10 Strategic Communication in the Defense Industry: Grand Strategy, Key Publics, and Tactics 129Michael F. Doble and David P. MacNeil 11 President Obama, the Affordable Care Act, and the Challenges of Strategic Political Communication 147Stephen J. Farnsworth 12 Strategic Communication for Civil Society and Nation Building: Communication for Societal Effectiveness 165Maureen Taylor and Erich J. Sommerfeldt Other chapters addressing business, government, or military: Chapter 4 (Part I), Chapters 6, 7, & 8 (Part II), Chapter 17 (Part V), Chapter 22 (Part VI) Part IV Crisis and Emergency Strategic Communication 179 13 Crisis Communication through the Lens of Strategic Communication 181W. Timothy Coombs 14 Emergency Preparation and Response for Human-Generated Disasters 194Emily Helsel, Timothy L. Sellnow, and Deanna D. Sellnow 15 Emergency Preparedness, Response, and Strategic Communication for Natural Disasters 208Matthew W. Seeger, Khairul Islam, and Henry S. Seeger Other chapters addressing crisis and emergency communication: Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapters 5 & 8 (Part II) Part V Social, Climate, and Environmental Strategic Communication 223 16 Overcome the Deficit Model by Applying the CAUSE Model to Climate Change Communication 225Katherine E. Rowan, Allison Engblom, Julia Hathaway, Rebecca Lloyd, Ian Vorster, Erin Z. Anderson, and Karen L. Akerlof 17 Organizations and Participation of Environmental Publics: A Cocreational Perspective Case Study 262Janey G. Trowbridge 18 Strategic Communication in Religious and Belief Communities: Lessons from Holocaust Re-education 273Denise Edwards-Neff 19 Gender in US Strategic Communication Research and Practice: Confronting the Master Narratives 292Linda Aldoory, Elizabeth L. Toth, and Liang Ma Other chapters addressing social and environmental issues: Chapter 2 (Part I), Chapter 7 (Part II), Chapter 22 (Part VI) Part VI Strategic Communication and Health 307 20 Strategic Communication Campaigns in Health 309Satveer Kaur-Gill and Mohan J. Dutta 21 Cocreating in the Wonderland: Communication and Patient-Oriented Healthcare in Russia 320Alexandra Endaltseva, Nelli Bachurina, and Maria Mordvinova 22 Bridging Tobacco Control Advocacy and Strategic Communication Scholarship: Tackling the Tobacco Industry’s Extrinsic Corporate Social Responsibility with Strategic Networking 336Jungmi Jun, Chang-Won Choi, and Joonkyoung Kim 23 Research and Evaluation in Strategic Communication 360Yi Grace Ji, Zifei Fay Chen, Zongchao Cathy Li, and Don W. Stacks Other chapters addressing strategic communication and health: Chapter 5 (Part II), Chapters 11 & 12 (Part III), Chapter 14 (Part IV) Index 374

Read more less

Book SynopsisOptimization of Power System Operation, 2nd Edition, offers a practical, hands-on guide to theoretical developments and to the application of advanced optimization methods to realistic electric power engineering problems. The book includes: New chapter on Application of Renewable Energy, and a new chapter on Operation of Smart Grid New topics include wheeling model, multi-area wheeling, and the total transfer capability computation in multiple areas Continues to provide engineers and academics with a complete picture of the optimization of techniques used in modern power system operation Table of ContentsPREFACE xvii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xix ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xxi AUTHOR BIOGRAPHY xxiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Power System Basics 2 1.2 Conventional Methods 7 1.3 Intelligent Search Methods 9 1.4 Application of The Fuzzy Set Theory 10 References 10 CHAPTER 2 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 13 2.1 Mathematical Model of Power Flow 13 2.2 Newton-Raphson Method 15 2.3 Gauss-Seidel Method 31 2.4 P-Q Decoupling Method 33 2.5 DC Power Flow 43 2.6 State Estimation 44 Problems and Exercises 48 References 49 CHAPTER 3 SENSITIVITY CALCULATION 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Loss Sensitivity Calculation 52 3.3 Calculation of Constrained Shift Sensitivity Factors 56 3.4 Perturbation Method for Sensitivity Analysis 68 3.5 Voltage Sensitivity Analysis 71 3.6 Real-Time Application of the Sensitivity Factors 73 3.7 Simulation Results 74 3.8 Conclusion 86 Problems and Exercises 88 References 88 CHAPTER 4 CLASSIC ECONOMIC DISPATCH 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Input–Output Characteristics of Generator Units 91 4.3 Thermal System Economic Dispatch Neglecting Network Losses 97 4.4 Calculation of Incremental Power Losses 105 4.5 Thermal System Economic Dispatch with Network Losses 107 4.6 Hydrothermal System Economic Dispatch 109 4.7 Economic Dispatch by Gradient Method 116 4.8 Classic Economic Dispatch by Genetic Algorithm 123 4.9 Classic Economic Dispatch by Hopfield Neural Network 128 Appendix A: Optimization Methods Used in Economic Operation 132 A.1 Gradient Method 132 A.2 Line Search 135 A.3 Newton-Raphson Optimization 135 A.4 Trust-Region Optimization 136 A.5 Newton–Raphson Optimization with Line Search 137 A.6 Quasi-Newton Optimization 137 A.7 Double Dogleg Optimization 139 A.8 Conjugate Gradient Optimization 139 A.9 Lagrange Multipliers Method 140 A.10 Kuhn–Tucker Conditions 141 Problems and Exercises 142 References 143 CHAPTER 5 SECURITY-CONSTRAINED ECONOMIC DISPATCH 145 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Linear Programming Method 145 5.3 Quadratic Programming Method 157 5.4 Network Flow Programming Method 162 5.5 Nonlinear Convex Network Flow Programming Method 183 5.6 Two-Stage Economic Dispatch Approach 197 5.7 Security Constrained Economic Dispatch by Genetic Algorithms 201 Appendix A: Network Flow Programming 202 A.1 The Transportation Problem 203 A.2 Dijkstra Label-Setting Algorithm 209 Problems and Exercises 210 References 212 CHAPTER 6 MULTIAREAS SYSTEM ECONOMIC DISPATCH 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Economy of Multiareas Interconnection 215 6.3 Wheeling 220 6.4 Multiarea Wheeling 225 6.5 Maed Solved by Nonlinear Convex Network Flow Programming 226 6.6 Nonlinear Optimization Neural Network Approach 235 6.7 Total Transfer Capability Computation in Multiareas 244 Appendix A: Comparison of Two Optimization Neural Network Models 248 A.1 For Proposed Neural Network M-9 248 A.2 For Neural Network M-10 in Reference [27] 249 Problems and Exercises 250 References 251 CHAPTER 7 UNIT COMMITMENT 253 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Priority Method 253 7.3 Dynamic Programming Method 256 7.4 Lagrange Relaxation Method 259 7.5 Evolutionary Programming-Based Tabu Search Method 263 7.6 Particle Swarm Optimization for Unit Commitment 269 7.7 Analytic Hierarchy Process 273 Problems and Exercises 293 References 295 CHAPTER 8 OPTIMAL POWER FLOW 297 8.1 Introduction 297 8.2 Newton Method 298 8.3 Gradient Method 307 8.4 Linear Programming OPF 312 8.5 Modified Interior Point OPF 314 8.6 OPF with Phase Shifter 328 8.7 Multiple Objectives OPF 337 8.8 Particle Swarm Optimization For OPF 346 Problems and Exercises 359 References 359 CHAPTER 9 STEADY-STATE SECURITY REGIONS 365 9.1 Introduction 365 9.2 Security Corridors 366 9.3 Traditional Expansion Method 371 9.4 Enhanced Expansion Method 374 9.5 Fuzzy Set and Linear Programming 385 Appendix A: Linear Programming 391 A.1 Standard Form of LP 391 A.2 Duality 394 A.3 The Simplex Method 397 Problems and Exercises 403 References 405 CHAPTER 10 APPLICATION OF RENEWABLE ENERGY 407 10.1 Introduction 407 10.2 Renewable Energy Resources 407 10.3 Operation of Grid-Connected PV System 409 10.4 Voltage Calculation of Distribution Network 414 10.5 Frequency Impact of PV Plant in Distribution Network 417 10.6 Operation of Wind Energy [1,10–16] 420 10.7 Voltage Analysis in Power System with Wind Energy 426 Problems and Exercises 432 References 434 CHAPTER 11 OPTIMAL LOAD SHEDDING 437 11.1 Introduction 437 11.2 Conventional Load Shedding 438 11.3 Intelligent Load Shedding 440 11.4 Formulation of Optimal Load Shedding 443 11.5 Optimal Load Shedding with Network Constraints 444 11.6 Optimal Load Shedding without Network Constraints 451 11.7 Distributed Interruptible Load Shedding (DILS) 460 11.8 Undervoltage Load Shedding 467 11.9 Congestion Management 473 Problems and Exercises 480 References 481 CHAPTER 12 OPTIMAL RECONFIGURATION OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORK 483 12.1 Introduction 483 12.2 Mathematical Model of DNRC 484 12.3 Heuristic Methods 486 12.4 Rule-Based Comprehensive Approach 488 12.5 Mixed-Integer Linear-Programming Approach 492 12.6 Application of GA to DNRC 504 12.7 Multiobjective Evolution Programming to DNRC 510 12.8 Genetic Algorithm Based on Matroid Theory 515 Appendix A: Evolutionary Algorithm of Multiobjective Optimization 521 Problems and Exercises 524 References 526 CHAPTER 13 UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS IN POWER SYSTEMS 529 13.1 Introduction 529 13.2 Definition of Uncertainty 530 13.3 Uncertainty Load Analysis 530 13.4 Uncertainty Power Flow Analysis 542 13.5 Economic Dispatch with Uncertainties 545 13.6 Hydrothermal System Operation with Uncertainty 555 13.7 Unit Commitment with Uncertainties 555 13.8 VAR Optimization with Uncertain Reactive Load 561 13.9 Probabilistic Optimal Power Flow 563 13.10 Comparison of Deterministic and Probabilistic Methods 574 Problems and Exercises 575 References 576 CHAPTER 14 OPERATION OF SMART GRID 579 14.1 Introduction 579 14.2 Definition of Smart Grid 580 14.3 Smart Grid Technologies 580 14.4 Smart Grid Operation 581 14.5 Two-Stage Approach for Smart Grid Dispatch 597 14.6 Operation of Virtual Power Plants 603 14.7 Smart Distribution Grid 605 14.8 Microgrid Operation 608 14.9 A New Phase Angle Measurement Algorithm 616 Problems and Exercises 623 References 626 INDEX 629

Read more less

Book SynopsisCollege teaches you to be a good engineer. But it''s likely that your college engineering courses didn''t have time to teach you how to effectively contribute your ideas or how to transition to management or leadership. This book provides you with those missing tools. Identify patterns of behavior that don''t serve you (or your organization) well and change them Create a plan of action that will allow for personal change that will impact your professional work Hone the ways that your technical work can be seen positively inside your organization Promote the talents and skills of the team players around you Become a flexible, supportive, and positive asset Table of ContentsForeword xi A Note from the Series Editor xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 What You Learned in College is Limiting Your Growth As a Technology Professional 1 This Book is Your Safety Net 3 2 Why Should You Read a Book by Me? Or…Why is This Book Important Now? 5 A Few Words in Praise of Steven T. Cerri’s Work 7 3 If You are an Engineering or Technical Manager, Read This 11 4 Is Free Will Truly “Free”? 13 Do You Choose What You Eat? 13 A Hypothetical Situation That is Very Real 14 Personal Behavioral Subroutines 16 Limiting Beliefs and Personal Behavioral Subroutines 17 Just for Managers 17 Personal Subroutines Can Help as Well as Hinder Functionality 17 Turning Limiting Beliefs into Successes Using Gems of Wisdom 18 5 The Way You Change 19 Engineering is Easy. It is the People That are Difficult 19 Humans are Just Satellites on Earth 20 The Model of Human Behavior: The Four Stages to Action 21 What Makes an Inspiring Speech? 26 Close the Loop 27 A Real-World Example 27 Changing Behavior Requires That You Push the Right “Button” 29 How Difficult is it to Loose Weight? 30 6 The Origin of the 15 Limiting Beliefs and the 15 Gems of Wisdom 33 7 How to Use This Book and the Structure of Chapters 9 Through 23 35 Example: Chapter 9 35 Add Gem of Wisdom #1 to Your Current Map of the World 37 8 How to Add Any Gem of Wisdom to Your Map of the World 41 Steps to Add a Gem of Wisdom to Your Current Map of the World 41 9 Ideas as Identity: Career-Limiting Belief #1 45 Add Gem of Wisdom #1 to Your Current Map of the World 49 10 Being Right: Career-Limiting Belief #2 55 Add Gem of Wisdom #2 to Your Current Map of the World 59 11 What versus How: Career-Limiting Belief #3 63 Add Gem of Wisdom #3 to Your Current Map of the World 66 References 70 12 Avoiding Shoptalk: Career-Limiting Belief #4 71 Add Gem of Wisdom #4 to Your Current Map of the World 74 13 I’ll Do My Own Work: Career-Limiting Belief #5 79 Add Gem of Wisdom #5 to Your Current Map of the World 83 14 Ducking Delegation: Career-Limiting Belief #6 87 Add Gem of Wisdom #6 to Your Current Map of the World 90 15 I’ll Do What I Like: Career-Limiting Belief #7 95 Add Gem of Wisdom #7 to Your Current Map of the World 98 16 Inconsiderate Communication: Career-Limiting Belief #8 103 Add Gem of Wisdom #8 to Your Current Map of the World 106 17 Limited Visionary: Career-Limiting Belief #9 111 Add Gem of Wisdom #9 to Your Current Map of the World 114 18 Being Persistently Consistent: Career-Limiting Belief #10 119 Add Gem of Wisdom #10 to Your Current Map of the World 122 19 Pursuing Perfection: Career-Limiting Belief #11 127 Add Gem of Wisdom #11 to Your Current Map of the World 130 20 You are Not the Teacher: Career-Limiting Belief #12 135 Add Gem of Wisdom #12 to Your Current Map of the World 139 21 Withholding Expertise: Career-Limiting Belief #13 145 Add Gem of Wisdom #13 to Your Current Map of the World 149 22 Bluntness as a Virtue: Career-Limiting Belief #14 155 Add Gem of Wisdom #14 to Your Current Map of the World 159 23 The Fixer: Career-Limiting Belief #15 165 Add Gem of Wisdom #15 to Your Current Map of the World 168 24 A Parting Letter From Steven 173 Further Reading 177 Biography of Steven T. Cerri 179 Index 181

Read more less

Book SynopsisFeatures inexpensive ARM Cortex-M4 microcontroller development systems available from Texas Instruments and STMicroelectronics. This book presents a hands-on approach to teaching Digital Signal Processing (DSP) with real-time examples using the ARM Cortex-M4 32-bit microprocessor. Real-time examples using analog input and output signals are provided, giving visible (using an oscilloscope) and audible (using a speaker or headphones) results. Signal generators and/or audio sources, e.g. iPods, can be used to provide experimental input signals. The text also covers the fundamental concepts of digital signal processing such as analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion, FIR and IIR filtering, Fourier transforms, and adaptive filtering. Digital Signal Processing Using the ARM Cortex-M4: Uses a large number of simple example programs illustrating DSP concepts in real-time, in an electrical engineering laboratory setting Includes exTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 ARM® CORTEX® - M4 Development Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Audio Interfaces 2 1.1.2 Texas Instruments TM4C123 LaunchPad and STM32F407 Discovery Development Kits 2 1.1.3 Hardware and Software Tools 6 Reference 7 2 Analog Input and Output 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.1.1 Sampling, Reconstruction, and Aliasing 9 2.2 TLV320AIC3104 (AIC3104) Stereo Codec for Audio Input and Output 10 2.3 WM5102 Audio Hub Codec for Audio Input and Output 12 2.4 Programming Examples 12 2.5 Real-Time Input and Output Using Polling, Interrupts, and Direct Memory Access (DMA) 12 2.5.1 I2S Emulation on the TM4C123 15 2.5.2 Program Operation 15 2.5.3 Running the Program 16 2.5.4 Changing the Input Connection to LINE IN 16 2.5.5 Changing the Sampling Frequency 16 2.5.6 Using the Digital MEMS Microphone on the Wolfson Audio Card 20 2.5.7 Running the Program 21 2.5.8 Running the Program 23 2.5.9 DMA in the TM4C123 Processor 26 2.5.10 Running the Program 30 2.5.11 Monitoring Program Execution 30 2.5.12 Measuring the Delay Introduced by DMA-Based I/O 30 2.5.13 DMA in the STM32F407 Processor 34 2.5.14 Running the Program 35 2.5.15 Measuring the Delay Introduced by DMA-Based I/O 35 2.5.16 Running the Program 46 2.6 Real-Time Waveform Generation 46 2.6.1 Running the Program 49 2.6.2 Out-of-Band Noise in the Output of the AIC3104 Codec (tm4c123_sine48_intr.c). 49 2.6.3 Running the Program 53 2.6.4 Running the Program 62 2.6.5 Running the Program 69 2.7 Identifying the Frequency Response of the DAC Using Pseudorandom Noise 70 2.7.1 Programmable De-Emphasis in the AIC3104 Codec 72 2.7.2 Programmable Digital Effects Filters in the AIC3104 Codec 72 2.8 Aliasing 78 2.8.1 Running the Program 83 2.9 Identifying the Frequency Response of the DAC Using An Adaptive Filter 83 2.9.1 Running the Program 84 2.10 Analog Output Using the STM32F407’S 12-BIT DAC 91 References 96 3 Finite Impulse Response Filters 97 3.1 Introduction to Digital Filters 97 3.1.1 The FIR Filter 97 3.1.2 Introduction to the z-Transform 99 3.1.3 Definition of the z-Transform 100 3.1.4 Properties of the z-Transform 108 3.1.5 z-Transfer Functions 111 3.1.6 Mapping from the s-Plane to the z-Plane 111 3.1.7 Difference Equations 112 3.1.8 Frequency Response and the z-Transform 113 3.1.9 The Inverse z-Transform 114 3.2 Ideal Filter Response Classifications: LP, HP, BP, BS 114 3.2.1 Window Method of FIR Filter Design 114 3.2.2 Window Functions 116 3.2.3 Design of Ideal High-Pass Band-Pass and Band-Stop FIR Filters Using the Window Method 120 3.3 Programming Examples 123 3.3.1 Altering the Coefficients of the Moving Average Filter 132 3.3.2 Generating FIR Filter Coefficient Header Files Using MATLAB 137 4 Infinite Impulse Response Filters 163 4.1 Introduction 163 4.2 IIR Filter Structures 164 4.2.1 Direct Form I Structure 164 4.2.2 Direct Form II Structure 165 4.2.3 Direct Form II Transpose 166 4.2.4 Cascade Structure 168 4.2.5 Parallel Form Structure 169 4.3 Impulse Invariance 171 4.4 Bilinear Transformation 171 4.4.1 Bilinear Transform Design Procedure 172 4.5 Programming Examples 173 4.5.1 Design of a Simple IIR Low-Pass Filter 173 Reference 216 5 Fast Fourier Transform 217 5.1 Introduction 217 5.2 Development of the FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 218 5.3 Decimation-in-Frequency FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 219 5.4 Decimation-in-Time FFT Algorithm with RADIX-2 222 5.4.1 Reordered Sequences in the Radix-2 FFT and Bit-Reversed Addressing 224 5.5 Decimation-in-Frequency FFT Algorithm with RADIX-4 226 5.6 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform 227 5.7 Programming Examples 228 5.7.1 Twiddle Factors 233 5.8 Frame- or Block-Based Programming 239 5.8.1 Running the Program 242 5.8.2 Spectral Leakage 244 5.9 Fast Convolution 252 5.9.1 Running the Program 256 5.9.2 Execution Time of Fast Convolution Method of FIR Filter Implementation 256 Reference 261 6 Adaptive Filters 263 6.1 Introduction 263 6.2 Adaptive Filter Configurations 264 6.2.1 Adaptive Prediction 264 6.2.2 System Identification or Direct Modeling 265 6.2.3 Noise Cancellation 265 6.2.4 Equalization 266 6.3 Performance Function 267 6.3.1 Visualizing the Performance Function 269 6.4 Searching for the Minimum 270 6.5 Least Mean Squares Algorithm 270 6.5.1 LMS Variants 272 6.5.2 Normalized LMS Algorithm 272 6.6 Programming Examples 273 6.6.1 Using CMSIS DSP Function arm_lms_f32() 280 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs new technologies are created and advances are made with the ongoing research efforts, power system harmonics has become a subject of great interest. The author presents these nuances with real-life case studies, comprehensive models of power system components for harmonics, and EMTP simulations.Trade Review“Students and professionals will definitely find this book an essential resource that will be referenced for many years.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 January 2016) Table of ContentsFOREWORD xv PREFACE xix ABOUT THE AUTHOR xxi CHAPTER 1 POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS 1 1.1 Nonlinear Loads 2 1.2 Increases in Nonlinear Loads 3 1.3 Effects of Harmonics 4 1.4 Distorted Waveforms 4 1.5 Harmonics and Sequence Components 7 1.6 Harmonic Indices 9 1.7 Power Factor, Distortion Factor, and Total Power Factor 11 1.8 Power Theories 13 1.9 Amplification and Attenuation of Harmonics 27 References 28 CHAPTER 2 FOURIER ANALYSIS 31 2.1 Periodic Functions 31 2.2 Orthogonal Functions 31 2.3 Fourier Series and Coefficients 33 2.4 Odd Symmetry 35 2.5 Even Symmetry 36 2.6 Half-Wave Symmetry 37 2.7 Harmonic Spectrum 41 2.8 Complex form of Fourier Series 41 2.9 Fourier Transform 43 2.10 Dirichlet Conditions 52 2.11 Power Spectrum of a Function 54 2.12 Convolution 56 2.13 Sampled Waveform: Discrete Fourier Transform 57 2.14 Fast Fourier Transform 64 References 69 CHAPTER 3 HARMONIC GENERATION-1 71 3.1 Harmonics in Transformers 71 3.2 Energization of a Transformer 79 3.3 Delta Windings of Three-Phase Transformers 82 3.4 Harmonics in Rotating Machine Windings 92 3.5 Cogging and Crawling of Induction Motors 97 3.6 Synchronous Generators 102 3.7 Saturation of Current Transformers 104 3.8 Ferroresonance 105 3.9 Power Capacitors 111 3.10 Transmission Lines 112 References 112 CHAPTER 4 HARMONIC GENERATION-II 115 4.1 Static Power Converters 115 4.2 Single-Phase Bridge Circuit 115 4.3 Reactive Power Requirements of Converters 122 4.4 Three-Phase Bridge Circuit 124 4.5 Harmonics on Output (DC) Side 133 4.6 Inverter Operation 135 4.7 Diode Bridge Converters 139 4.8 Switch-Mode Power (SMP) Supplies 142 4.9 Home Appliances 143 4.10 Arc Furnaces 144 4.11 Cycloconverters 147 4.12 Thyristor-Controlled Reactor 150 4.13 Pulse Width Modulation 154 4.14 Voltage Source Converters 158 4.15 Wind Power Generation 162 4.16 Fluorescent Lighting 165 4.17 Adjustable Speed Drives 167 4.18 Pulse Burst Modulation 174 4.19 Chopper Circuits and Electric Traction 175 4.20 Slip Frequency Recovery Schemes 177 4.21 Power Semiconductor Devices 178 References 181 CHAPTER 5 INTERHARMONICS AND FLICKER 183 5.1 Interharmonics 183 5.2 Sources of Interharmonics 183 5.3 Arc Furnaces 192 5.4 Effects of Interharmonics 196 5.5 Reduction of Interharmonics 198 5.6 Flicker 198 5.7 Flicker Testing 202 5.8 Control of Flicker 205 5.9 Tracing Methods of Flicker and Interharmonics 208 5.10 Torsional Analysis 210 5.11 Subsynchronous Resonance 217 References 225 CHAPTER 6 HARMONIC REDUCTION AT THE SOURCE 229 6.1 Phase Multiplication 230 6.2 Varying Topologies 230 6.3 Harmonic Cancellation: Commercial Loads 232 6.4 Input Reactors to the PWM ASDs 235 6.5 Active Filters 237 6.6 Active Current Shaping 248 6.7 Hybrid Connections of Active and Passive Filters 251 6.8 Impedance Source Inverters 255 6.9 Matrix Converters 259 6.10 Mutilevel Inverters 262 6.11 Switching Algorithms for Harmonic Control 270 6.12 Theory of Resultants of Polynomials 271 References 277 CHAPTER 7 ESTIMATION AND MEASUREMENTS OF HARMONICS 281 7.1 Waveform without Ripple Content 282 7.2 Waveform with Ripple Content 288 7.3 Phase Angle of Harmonics 298 7.4 Measurements of Harmonics 304 7.5 Measuring Equipment 309 7.6 Transducers for Harmonic Measurements 312 7.7 Characterizing Measured Data 314 7.8 Probabilistic Concepts 316 7.9 Summation of Harmonic Vectors with Random Angles 323 7.10 Central Limit Theorem 326 7.11 Kalman Filtering 326 References 329 CHAPTER 8 EFFECTS OF HARMONICS 331 8.1 Rotating Machines 332 8.2 Effect of Negative Sequence Currents on Synchronous Generators 335 8.3 Insulation Stresses 337 8.4 Transformers 345 8.5 Cables 359 8.6 Capacitors 361 8.7 Voltage Notching 362 8.8 EMI (Electromagnetic Interference) 363 8.9 Overloading of Neutral 367 8.10 Protective Relays and Meters 369 8.11 Circuit Breakers and Fuses 372 8.12 Telephone Influence Factor 372 References 377 CHAPTER 9 HARMONIC RESONANCE 379 9.1 Two-Port Networks 379 9.2 Resonance in Series and Parallel RLC Circuits 383 9.3 Practical LC Tank Circuit 391 9.4 Reactance Curves 396 9.5 Foster's Networks 397 9.6 Harmonic Resonance 400 9.7 Harmonic Resonance in a Distribution System 404 9.8 Elusiveness of Resonance Problems 405 9.9 Resonance Due to Single-Tuned Filters 408 9.10 Switched Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement 410 9.11 Secondary Resonance 411 9.12 Multiple Resonances in a Distribution Feeder 415 9.13 Part-Winding Resonance in Transformer Windings 416 9.14 Composite Resonance 419 9.15 Resonance in Transmission Lines 421 9.16 Zero Sequence Resonance 421 9.17 Factors Affecting Harmonic Resonance 423 References 424 CHAPTER 10 HARMONIC DISTORTION LIMITS ACCORDING TO STANDARDS 427 10.1 Standards for Limitation of Harmonics 427 10.2 IEEE 519 Harmonic Current and Voltage Limits 429 10.3 Point of Common Coupling (PCC) 432 10.4 Applying IEEE 519 Harmonic Distortion Limits 433 10.5 Time Varying Characteristics of Harmonics 435 10.6 IEC Harmonic Current Emission Limits 436 10.7 Voltage Quality 440 10.8 Commutation Notches 444 10.9 Applying Limits to Practical Power Systems 449 References 450 CHAPTER 11 APPLICATION OF SHUNT CAPACITOR BANKS 453 11.1 Shunt Capacitor Banks 453 11.2 Location of Shunt Capacitors 458 11.3 Ratings of Capacitors 459 11.4 Shunt Capacitor Bank Arrangements 465 11.5 Fusing 468 11.6 Connections of Banks 476 11.7 Unbalance Detection 479 11.8 Destabilizing Effect of Capacitor Banks 481 11.9 Switching Transients of Capacitor Banks 483 11.10 Control of Switching Transients 486 11.11 Switching Capacitors with Motors 489 11.12 Switching Devices 490 11.13 Switching Controls 498 References 501 CHAPTER 12 MODELING OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR HARMONIC ANALYSIS 503 12.1 Transmission Lines 503 12.2 Cables 532 12.3 Zero Sequence Impedance of OH Lines and Cables 538 12.4 Filter Reactors 539 12.5 Transformers 540 12.6 Induction Motors 554 12.7 Synchronous Generators 556 12.8 Load Models 557 12.9 System Impedance 559 12.10 Three-Phase Models 561 12.11 Uncharacteristic Harmonics 563 12.12 Converters 564 References 566 CHAPTER 13 HARMONIC MODELING OF SYSTEMS 569 13.1 Electrical Power Systems 569 13.2 Extent of Network Modeling 572 13.3 Impact of Loads and Generation 573 13.4 Short-Circuit and Fundamental Frequency Load Flow Calculations 574 13.5 Industrial Systems 578 13.6 Distribution Systems 582 13.7 Transmission Systems 589 13.8 Compensation of Transmission Lines 593 13.9 Commercial Buildings 598 13.10 Residential Loads 599 13.11 HVDC Transmission 599 References 605 CHAPTER 14 HARMONIC PROPAGATION 607 14.1 Harmonic Analysis Methods 608 14.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 608 14.3 Frequency Scan 610 14.4 Voltage Scan 611 14.5 Harmonic Analysis Methods 612 14.6 Time Domain Analysis 620 14.7 Sensitivity Methods 620 14.8 Unbalanced AC System and HVDC Link 622 14.9 Hybrid Frequency and Time Domain Concept 623 14.10 Probabilistic Concepts 626 14.11 Computer-Based Programs 631 14.12 Harmonic Analyses of a Large Industrial System 632 14.13 Long Transmission Line 653 14.14 34.5 kV UG Cable 673 14.15 5-Bus Transmission System 673 References 682 CHAPTER 15 PASSIVE FILTERS 685 15.1 Filter Types 685 15.2 Single-Tuned Filters 690 15.3 Harmonic Filter Detuning and Unbalance 699 15.4 Relations in an ST Filter 699 15.5 Selection of Q Factor 701 15.6 Double-Tuned Filter 702 15.7 Bandpass Filters 704 15.8 Damped Filters 705 15.9 Type C Filter 710 15.10 Zero Sequence Traps 716 15.11 Series-Type Low-Pass Filter 717 15.12 Transfer Function Approach for Filter Designs 718 15.13 Optimization Techniques of Filter Designs 723 15.14 Genetic Algorithms for Filter Designs 728 15.15 HVDC-DC Filters 731 15.16 Limitations of Passive Filters 734 15.17 Flowchart for Design of Filters 735 15.18 Filter Components 735 15.19 Failure of Harmonic Filters 741 References 741 CHAPTER 16 PRACTICAL PASSIVE FILTER DESIGNS 745 16.1 Study 1: Small Distribution System with Major Six-Pulse Loads 745 16.2 Study 2: Filters for Arc Furnance Loads 756 16.3 Study 3: Filters for Two 8000-Hp ID Fan Drives 770 16.4 Study 4: Double-Tuned filter on a Three-Winding Transformer 782 16.5 Study 5: PV Solar Generation Plant 785 16.6 Study 6: Impact of Harmonics at a Distance 799 16.7 Study 7: Wind Generation Farm 804 INDEX 829

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xvi 1 Body Sensor Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Background 1 1.3 Typical m‐Health System Architecture 4 1.4 Hardware Architecture of a Sensor Node 6 1.5 Communication Medium 7 1.6 Power Consumption Considerations 7 1.7 Communication Standards 8 1.8 Network Topologies 10 1.9 Commercial Sensor Node Platforms 13 1.10 Biophysiological Signals and Sensors 16 1.11 BSN Application Domains 17 1.12 Summary 20 References 20 2 BSN Programming Frameworks 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Developing BSN Applications 25 2.2.1 Application‐ and Platform‐Specific Programming 26 2.2.2 Automatic Code Generation 28 2.2.3 Middleware‐Based Programming 28 2.2.4 Programming Approaches Comparison 30 2.3 Programming Abstractions 31 2.4 Requirements for BSN Frameworks 34 2.5 BSN Programming Frameworks 37 2.5.1 Titan 38 2.5.2 CodeBlue 38 2.5.3 RehabSPOT 38 2.5.4 SPINE 39 2.5.5 SPINE2 39 2.5.6 C‐SPINE 39 2.5.7 MAPS 40 2.5.8 DexterNet 40 2.6 Summary 40 References 41 3 Signal Processing In‐Node Environment 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Background 46 3.3 Motivations and Challenges 46 3.4 The SPINE Framework 46 3.4.1 Architecture 47 3.4.2 Programming Perspective 51 3.4.3 Optional SPINE Modules 51 3.4.4 High‐Level Data Processing 52 3.4.5 Multiplatform Support 55 3.5 Summary 56 References 57 4 Task‐Oriented Programming in BSNs 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Background 60 4.3 Motivations and Challenges 60 4.3.1 Need for a Platform‐Independent Middleware 60 4.3.2 Challenges in Designing a Task‐Oriented Framework 61 4.4 SPINE2 Overview 62 4.5 Task‐Oriented Programming in SPINE2 63 4.6 SPINE2 Node‐Side Middleware 66 4.7 SPINE2 Coordinator 68 4.8 SPINE2 Communication Protocol 68 4.9 Developing Application in SPINE2 70 4.10 Summary 71 References 72 5 Autonomic Body Sensor Networks 73 5.1 Introduction 73 5.2 Background 73 5.3 Motivations and Challenges 74 5.4 State‐of‐the‐Art 75 5.5 SPINE‐*: Task‐Based Autonomic Architecture 76 5.6 Autonomic Physical Activity Recognition 81 5.7 Summary 84 References 85 6 Agent‐Oriented Body Sensor Networks 89 6.1 Introduction 89 6.2 Background 89 6.2.1 Agent‐Oriented Computing and Wireless Sensor Networks 89 6.2.2 Mobile Agent Platform for Sun SPOT (MAPS) 91 6.3 Motivations and Challenges 94 6.4 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 95 6.5 Agent‐Based Modeling and Implementation of BSNs 98 6.6 Engineering Agent‐Based BSN Applications: A Case Study 98 6.7 Summary 101 References 103 7 Collaborative Body Sensor Networks 107 7.1 Introduction 107 7.2 Background 108 7.3 Motivations and Challenges 109 7.4 State‐of‐the‐Art 110 7.5 A Reference Architecture for Collaborative BSNs 111 7.6 C‐SPINE: A CBSN Architecture 114 7.6.1 Inter‐BSN Communication 116 7.6.2 BSN Proximity Detection 117 7.6.3 BSN Service Discovery 118 7.6.4 BSN Service Selection and Activation 118 7.7 Summary 119 References 119 8 Integration of Body Sensor Networks and Building Networks 121 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 Background 121 8.2.1 Building Sensor Networks and Systems 121 8.2.2 Building Management Framework 124 8.3 Motivations and Challenges 125 8.4 Integration Layers 127 8.5 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 129 8.6 An Agent‐Oriented Integration Gateway 130 8.7 Application Scenarios 133 8.7.1 In‐Building Physical Activity Monitoring 133 8.8 Summary 135 References 135 9 Integration of Wearable and Cloud Computing 139 9.1 Introduction 139 9.2 Background 140 9.2.1 Cloud Computing 140 9.2.2 Architectures for Sensor Stream Management 140 9.3 Motivations and Challenges 142 9.3.1 BSN Challenges 143 9.3.2 BSN/Cloud Computing Integration Challenges 144 9.4 Reference Architecture for Cloud‐Assisted BSNs 145 9.4.1 Sensor Data Collection 145 9.4.2 Sensor Data Management 147 9.4.3 Scalable Processing Framework 147 9.4.4 Persistent Storage 148 9.4.5 Decision‐Making Process 149 9.4.6 Open Standards and Advanced Visualization 149 9.4.7 Security 150 9.5 State‐of‐the‐Art: Description and Comparison 151 9.5.1 Integration of WSNs and Cloud Computing 151 9.5.2 Integration of BSNs and Cloud Computing 152 9.5.3 A Comparison 153 9.6 BodyCloud: A Cloud‐based Platform for Community BSN Applications 156 9.7 Engineering BodyCloud Applications 159 9.7.1 ECGaaS: Cardiac Monitoring 160 9.7.2 FEARaaS: Basic Fear Detection 162 9.7.3 REHABaaS: Remote Rehabilitation 165 9.7.4 ACTIVITYaaS: Community Activity Monitoring 166 9.8 Summary 171 References 171 10 Development Methodology for BSN Systems 177 10.1 Introduction 177 10.2 Background 177 10.3 Motivations and Challenges 180 10.4 SPINE‐Based Design Methodology 180 10.4.1 A Pattern‐Driven Application‐Level Design 181 10.4.2 System Parameters 183 10.4.3 Process Schema 184 10.5 Summary 186 References 186 11 SPINE‐Based Body Sensor Network Applications 187 11.1 Introduction 187 11.2 Background 187 11.3 Physical Activity Recognition 187 11.3.1 Related Work 188 11.3.2 A SPINE‐Based Activity Recognition System 189 11.4 Step Counter 191 11.4.1 Related Work 191 11.4.2 A SPINE‐Based Step Counter 192 11.5 Emotion Recognition 194 11.5.1 Stress Detection 194 11.5.1.1 Related Work 194 11.5.1.2 SPINE‐HRV: A Wearable System for Real‐Time Stress Detection 195 11.5.2 Fear Detection 197 11.5.2.1 Related Work 197 11.5.2.2 A SPINE‐Based Startle Reflex Detection System 198 11.6 Handshake Detection 200 11.6.1 Related Work 201 11.6.2 A SPINE‐Based Handshake Detection System 202 11.7 Physical Rehabilitation 205 11.7.1 Related Work 205 11.7.2 SPINE Motor Rehabilitation Assistant 206 11.8 Summary 208 References 208 12 SPINE at Work 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 SPINE 1.x 213 12.2.1 How to Install SPINE 1.x 216 12.2.2 How to Use SPINE 217 12.2.3 How to Run a Simple Desktop Application Using SPINE1.3 220 12.2.4 SPINE Logging Capabilities 225 12.3 SPINE2 225 12.3.1 How to Install SPINE2 228 12.3.2 How to Use the SPINE2 API 230 12.3.3 How to Run a Simple Application Using SPINE2 232 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn communication acoustics, the communication channel consists of a sound source, a channel (acoustic and/or electric) and finally the receiver: the human auditory system, a complex and intricate system that shapes the way sound is heard. Thus, when developing techniques in communication acoustics, such as in speech, audio and aided hearing, it is important to understand the timefrequencyspace resolution of hearing. This book facilitates the reader's understanding and development of speech and audio techniques based on our knowledge of the auditory perceptual mechanisms by introducing the physical, signal-processing and psychophysical background to communication acoustics. It then provides a detailed explanation of sound technologies where a human listener is involved, including audio and speech techniques, sound quality measurement, hearing aids and audiology. Key features: Explains perceptually-based audio: the authors take a detailed but accessible engineeringTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xix Preface xxi Preface to the Unfinished Manuscript of the Book xxiii Introduction 1 1 How to Study and Develop Communication Acoustics 7 1.1 Domains of Knowledge 7 1.2 Methodology of Research and Development 8 1.3 Systems Approach to Modelling 10 1.4 About the Rest of this Book 12 1.5 Focus of the Book 12 1.6 Intended Audience 13 References 14 2 Physics of Sound 15 2.1 Vibration and Wave Behaviour of Sound 15 2.1.1 From Vibration to Waves 16 2.1.2 A Simple Vibrating System 16 2.1.3 Resonance 18 2.1.4 Complex Mass–Spring Systems 19 2.1.5 Modal Behaviour 20 2.1.6 Waves 21 2.2 Acoustic Measures and Quantities 23 2.2.1 Sound and Voice as Signals 23 2.2.2 Sound Pressure 24 2.2.3 Sound Pressure Level 24 2.2.4 Sound Power 25 2.2.5 Sound Intensity 25 2.2.6 Computation with Amplitude and Level Quantities 25 2.3 Wave Phenomena 26 2.3.1 Spherical Waves 26 2.3.2 Plane Waves and the Wave Field in a Tube 27 2.3.3 Wave Propagation in Solid Materials 29 2.3.4 Reflection, Absorption, and Refraction 31 2.3.5 Scattering and Diffraction 32 2.3.6 Doppler Effect 33 2.4 Sound in Closed Spaces: Acoustics of Rooms and Halls 34 2.4.1 Sound Field in a Room 34 2.4.2 Reverberation 36 2.4.3 Sound Pressure Level in a Room 37 2.4.4 Modal Behaviour of Sound in a Room 38 2.4.5 Computational Modelling of Closed Space Acoustics 39 Summary 41 Further Reading 41 References 41 3 Signal Processing and Signals 43 3.1 Signals 43 3.1.1 Sounds as Signals 43 3.1.2 Typical Signals 45 3.2 Fundamental Concepts of Signal Processing 46 3.2.1 Linear and Time-Invariant Systems 46 3.2.2 Convolution 47 3.2.3 Signal Transforms 48 3.2.4 Fourier Analysis and Synthesis 49 3.2.5 Spectrum Analysis 50 3.2.6 Time–Frequency Representations 53 3.2.7 Filter Banks 54 3.2.8 Auto- and Cross-Correlation 55 3.2.9 Cepstrum 56 3.3 Digital Signal Processing (DSP) 56 3.3.1 Sampling and Signal Conversion 56 3.3.2 Z Transform 57 3.3.3 Filters as LTI Systems 58 3.3.4 Digital Filtering 58 3.3.5 Linear Prediction 59 3.3.6 Adaptive Filtering 62 3.4 Hidden Markov Models 62 3.5 Concepts of Intelligent and Learning Systems 63 Summary 64 Further Reading 64 References 64 4 Electroacoustics and Responses of Audio Systems 67 4.1 Electroacoustics 67 4.1.1 Loudspeakers 67 4.1.2 Microphones 70 4.2 Audio System Responses 71 4.2.1 Measurement of System Response 71 4.2.2 Ideal Reproduction of Sound 72 4.2.3 Impulse Response and Magnitude Response 72 4.2.4 Phase Response 74 4.2.5 Non-Linear Distortion 75 4.2.6 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 76 4.3 Response Equalization 76 Summary 77 Further Reading 78 References 78 5 Human Voice 79 5.1 Speech Production 79 5.1.1 Speech Production Mechanism 80 5.1.2 Vocal Folds and Phonation 80 5.1.3 Vocal and Nasal Tract and Articulation 82 5.1.4 Lip Radiation Measurements 84 5.2 Units and Notation of Speech used in Phonetics 84 5.2.1 Vowels 86 5.2.2 Consonants 86 5.2.3 Prosody and Suprasegmental Features 88 5.3 Modelling of Speech Production 90 5.3.1 Glottal Modelling 92 5.3.2 Vocal Tract Modelling 92 5.3.3 Articulatory Synthesis 94 5.3.4 Formant Synthesis 95 5.4 Singing Voice 96 Summary 96 Further Reading 97 References 97 6 Musical Instruments and Sound Synthesis 99 6.1 Acoustic Instruments 99 6.1.1 Types of Musical Instruments 99 6.1.2 Resonators in Instruments 100 6.1.3 Sources of Excitation 102 6.1.4 Controlling the Frequency of Vibration 103 6.1.5 Combining the Excitation and Resonant Structures 104 6.2 Sound Synthesis in Music 104 6.2.1 Envelope of Sounds 105 6.2.2 Synthesis Methods 106 6.2.3 Synthesis of Plucked String Instruments with a One-Dimensional Physical Model 107 Summary 108 Further Reading 108 References 108 7 Physiology and Anatomy of Hearing 111 7.1 Global Structure of the Ear 111 7.2 External Ear 112 7.3 Middle Ear 113 7.4 Inner Ear 115 7.4.1 Structure of the Cochlea 115 7.4.2 Passive Cochlear Processing 117 7.4.3 Active Function of the Cochlea 119 7.4.4 The Inner Hair Cells 122 7.4.5 Cochlear Non-Linearities 122 7.5 Otoacoustic Emissions 123 7.6 Auditory Nerve 123 7.6.1 Information Transmission using the Firing Rate 124 7.6.2 Phase Locking 126 7.7 Auditory Nervous System 127 7.7.1 Structure of the Auditory Pathway 127 7.7.2 Studying Brain Function 129 7.8 Motivation for Building Computational Models of Hearing 130 Summary 131 Further Reading 131 References 131 8 The Approach and Methodology of Psychoacoustics 133 8.1 Sound Events versus Auditory Events 133 8.2 Psychophysical Functions 135 8.3 Generation of Sound Events 135 8.3.1 Synthesis of Sound Signals 136 8.3.2 Listening Set-up and Conditions 137 8.3.3 Steering Attention to Certain Details of An Auditory Event 137 8.4 Selection of Subjects for Listening Tests 138 8.5 What are We Measuring? 138 8.5.1 Thresholds 138 8.5.2 Scales and Categorization of Percepts 140 8.5.3 Numbering Scales in Listening Tests 141 8.6 Tasks for Subjects 141 8.7 Basic Psychoacoustic Test Methods 142 8.7.1 Method of Constant Stimuli 143 8.7.2 Method of Limits 143 8.7.3 Method of Adjustment 143 8.7.4 Method of Tracking 144 8.7.5 Direct Scaling Methods 144 8.7.6 Adaptive Staircase Methods 144 8.8 Descriptive Sensory Analysis 145 8.8.1 Verbal Elicitation 147 8.8.2 Non-Verbal Elicitation 148 8.8.3 Indirect Elicitation 148 8.9 Psychoacoustic Tests from the Point of View of Statistics 149 Summary 149 Further Reading 150 References 150 9 Basic Function of Hearing 153 9.1 Effective Hearing Area 153 9.1.1 Equal Loudness Curves 155 9.1.2 Sound Level and its Measurement 156 9.2 Spectral Masking 156 9.2.1 Masking by Noise 157 9.2.2 Masking by Pure Tones 159 9.2.3 Masking by Complex Tones 159 9.2.4 Other Masking Phenomena 161 9.3 Temporal Masking 161 9.4 Frequency Selectivity of Hearing 163 9.4.1 Psychoacoustic Tuning Curves 164 9.4.2 ERB Bandwidths 166 9.4.3 Bark, ERB, and Greenwood Scales 167 Summary 169 Further Reading 169 References 169 10 Basic Psychoacoustic Quantities 171 10.1 Pitch 171 10.1.1 Pitch Strength and Frequency Range 171 10.1.2 JND of Pitch 172 10.1.3 Pitch Perception versus Duration of Sound 173 10.1.4 Mel Scale 174 10.1.5 Logarithmic Pitch Scale and Musical Scale 175 10.1.6 Detection Threshold of Pitch Change and Frequency Modulation 176 10.1.7 Pitch of Coloured Noise 176 10.1.8 Repetition Pitch 177 10.1.9 Virtual Pitch 178 10.1.10 Pitch of Non-Harmonic Complex Sounds 178 10.1.11 Pitch Theories 178 10.1.12 Absolute Pitch 179 10.2 Loudness 179 10.2.1 Loudness Determination Experiments 179 10.2.2 Loudness Level 180 10.2.3 Loudness of a Pure Tone 180 10.2.4 Loudness of Broadband Signals 182 10.2.5 Excitation Pattern, Specific Loudness, and Loudness 183 10.2.6 Difference Threshold of Loudness 185 10.2.7 Loudness versus Duration of Sound 187 10.3 Timbre 188 10.3.1 Timbre of Steady-State Sounds 189 10.3.2 Timbre of Sound Including Modulations 189 10.4 Subjective Duration of Sound 189 Summary 191 Further Reading 191 References 191 11 Further Analysis in Hearing 193 11.1 Sharpness 193 11.2 Detection of Modulation and Sound Onset 195 11.2.1 Fluctuation Strength 195 11.2.2 Impulsiveness 197 11.3 Roughness 198 11.4 Tonality 200 11.5 Discrimination of Changes in Signal Magnitude and Phase Spectra 201 11.5.1 Adaptation to the Magnitude Spectrum 201 11.5.2 Perception of Phase and Time Differences 202 11.6 Psychoacoustic Concepts and Music 206 11.6.1 Sensory Consonance and Dissonance 206 11.6.2 Intervals, Scales, and Tuning in Music 208 11.6.3 Rhythm, Tempo, Bar, and Measure 211 11.7 Perceptual Organization of Sound 212 11.7.1 Segregation of Sound Sources 213 11.7.2 Sound Streaming and Auditory Scene Analysis 214 Summary 216 Further Reading 217 References 217 12 Spatial Hearing 219 12.1 Concepts and Definitions for Spatial Hearing 219 12.1.1 Basic Concepts 219 12.1.2 Coordinate Systems for Spatial Hearing 221 12.2 Head-Related Acoustics 222 12.3 Localization Cues 226 12.3.1 Interaural Time Difference 227 12.3.2 Interaural Level Difference 228 12.3.3 Interaural Coherence 231 12.3.4 Cues to Resolve the Direction on the Cone of Confusion 232 12.3.5 Interaction Between Spatial Hearing and Vision 234 12.4 Localization Accuracy 235 12.4.1 Localization in the Horizontal Plane 235 12.4.2 Localization in the Median Plane 236 12.4.3 3D Localization 237 12.4.4 Perception of the Distribution of a Spatially Extended Source 238 12.5 Directional Hearing in Enclosed Spaces 239 12.5.1 Precedence Effect 239 12.5.2 Adaptation to the Room Effect in Localization 240 12.6 Binaural Advantages in Timbre Perception 241 12.6.1 Binaural Detection and Unmasking 241 12.6.2 Binaural Decolouration 243 12.7 Perception of Source Distance 243 12.7.1 Cues for Distance Perception 244 12.7.2 Accuracy of Distance Perception 245 Summary 246 Further Reading 246 References 246 13 Auditory Modelling 249 13.1 Simple Psychoacoustic Modelling with DFT 250 13.1.1 Computation of the Auditory Spectrum through DFT 250 13.2 Filter Bank Models 255 13.2.1 Modelling the Outer and Middle Ear 255 13.2.2 Gammatone Filter Bank and Auditory Nerve Responses 256 13.2.3 Level-Dependent Filter Banks 256 13.2.4 Envelope Detection and Temporal Dynamics 258 13.3 Cochlear Models 260 13.3.1 Basilar Membrane Models 260 13.3.2 Hair-Cell Models 261 13.4 Modelling of Higher-Level Systemic Properties 263 13.4.1 Analysis of Pitch and Periodicity 263 13.4.2 Modelling of Loudness Perception 265 13.5 Models of Spatial Hearing 265 13.5.1 Delay-Network-Based Models of Binaural Hearing 265 13.5.2 Equalization Cancellation and ILD Models 268 13.5.3 Count-Comparison Models 268 13.5.4 Models of Localization in the Median Plane 270 13.6 Matlab Examples 270 13.6.1 Filter-Bank Model with Autocorrelation-Based Pitch Analysis 270 13.6.2 Binaural Filter-Bank Model with Cross-Correlation-Based ITD Analysis 272 Summary 274 Further Reading 274 References 274 14 Sound Reproduction 277 14.1 Need for Sound Reproduction 277 14.2 Audio Content Production 279 14.3 Listening Set-ups 280 14.3.1 Loudspeaker Set-ups 280 14.3.2 Listening Room Acoustics 282 14.3.3 Audiovisual Systems 283 14.3.4 Auditory-Tactile Systems 284 14.4 Recording Techniques 284 14.4.1 Monophonic Techniques 285 14.4.2 Spot Microphone Technique 285 14.4.3 Coincident Microphone Techniques for Two-Channel Stereophony 286 14.4.4 Spaced Microphone Techniques for Two-Channel Stereophony 286 14.4.5 Spaced Microphone Techniques for Multi-Channel Loudspeaker Systems 287 14.4.6 Coincident Recording for Multi-Channel Set-up with Ambisonics 287 14.4.7 Non-Linear Time–Frequency-domain Reproduction of Spatial Sound 290 14.5 Virtual Source Positioning 293 14.5.1 Amplitude Panning 293 14.5.2 Amplitude Panning in a Stereophonic Set-up 294 14.5.3 Amplitude Panning in Horizontal Multi-Channel Loudspeaker Set-ups 295 14.5.4 3D Amplitude Panning 295 14.5.5 Virtual Source Positioning using Ambisonics 296 14.5.6 Wave Field Synthesis 296 14.5.7 Time Delay Panning 297 14.5.8 Synthesizing the Width of Virtual Sources 298 14.6 Binaural Techniques 298 14.6.1 Listening to Binaural Recordings with Headphones 299 14.6.2 HRTF Processing for Headphone Listening 299 14.6.3 Virtual Listening of Loudspeakers with Headphones 300 14.6.4 Headphone Listening to Two-Channel Stereophonic Content 301 14.6.5 Binaural Techniques with Cross-Talk-Cancelled Loudspeakers 301 14.7 Digital Audio Effects 302 14.8 Reverberators 303 14.8.1 Using Room Impulse Responses in Reverberators 304 14.8.2 DSP Structures for Reverberators 305 Summary 306 Further Reading and Available Toolboxes 306 References 307 15 Time–Frequency-domain Processing and Coding of Audio 311 15.1 Basic Techniques and Concepts for Time–Frequency Processing 311 15.1.1 Frame-Based Processing 311 15.1.2 Downsampled Filter-Bank Processing 313 15.1.3 Modulation with Tone Sequences 315 15.1.4 Aliasing 316 15.2 Time–Frequency Transforms 317 15.2.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) 318 15.2.2 Alias-Free STFT 320 15.2.3 Modified Discrete Cosine Transform (MDCT) 321 15.2.4 Pseudo-Quadrature Mirror Filter (PQMF) Bank 323 15.2.5 Complex QMF 323 15.2.6 Sub-Sub-Band Filtering of the Complex QMF Bands 325 15.2.7 Stochastic Measures of Time–Frequency Signals 325 15.2.8 Decorrelation 327 15.3 Time–Frequency-Domain Audio-Processing Techniques 328 15.3.1 Masking-Based Audio Coding 328 15.3.2 Audio Coding with Spectral Band Replication 328 15.3.3 Parametric Stereo, MPEG Surround, and Spatial Audio Object Coding 329 15.3.4 Stereo Upmixing and Enhancement for Loudspeakers and Headphones 330 Summary 332 Further Reading 332 References 332 16 Speech Technologies 335 16.1 Speech Coding 336 16.2 Text-to-Speech Synthesis 338 16.2.1 Early Knowledge-Based Text-to-Speech (TTS) Synthesis 339 16.2.2 Unit-Selection Synthesis 340 16.2.3 Statistical Parametric Synthesis 342 16.3 Speech Recognition 345 Summary 346 Further Reading 347 References 347 17 Sound Quality 349 17.1 Historical Background of Sound Quality 350 17.2 The Many Facets of Sound Quality 351 17.3 Systemic Framework for Sound Quality 352 17.4 Subjective Sound Quality Measurement 353 17.4.1 Mean Opinion Score 353 17.4.2 MUSHRA 354 17.5 Audio Quality 356 17.5.1 Monaural Quality 356 17.5.2 Perceptual Measures and Models for Monaural Audio Quality 356 17.5.3 Spatial Audio Quality 359 17.6 Quality of Speech Communication 360 17.6.1 Subjective Methods and Measures 361 17.6.2 Objective Methods and Measures 362 17.7 Measuring Speech Understandability with the Modulation Transfer Function 363 17.7.1 Modulation Transfer Function 363 17.7.2 Speech Transmission Index STI 367 17.7.3 STI and Speech Intelligibility 368 17.7.4 Practical Measurement of STI 369 17.8 Objective Speech Quality Measurement for Telecommunication 370 17.8.1 General Speech Quality Measurement Techniques 371 17.8.2 Measurement of the Perceptual Effect of Background Noise 372 17.8.3 Measurement of the Perceptual Effect of Echoes 373 17.9 Sound Quality in Auditoria and Concert Halls 374 17.9.1 Subjective Measures 374 17.9.2 Objective Measures 375 17.9.3 Percentage of Consonant Loss 377 17.10 Noise Quality 377 17.11 Product Sound Quality 378 Summary 380 Further Reading 380 References 380 18 Other Audio Applications 383 18.1 Virtual Reality and Game Audio Engines 383 18.2 Sonic Interaction Design 386 18.3 Computational Auditory Scene Analysis, CASA 387 18.4 Music Information Retrieval 387 18.5 Miscellaneous Applications 389 Summary 390 Further Reading 390 References 390 19 Technical Audiology 393 19.1 Hearing Impairments and Disabilities 393 19.1.1 Key Terminology 394 19.1.2 Classification of Hearing Impairments 395 19.1.3 Causes for Hearing Impairments 396 19.2 Symptoms and Consequences of Hearing Impairments 396 19.2.1 Hearing Threshold Shift 397 19.2.2 Distortion and Decrease in Discrimination 398 19.2.3 Speech Communication Problems 400 19.2.4 Tinnitus 400 19.3 The Effect of Noise on Hearing 401 19.3.1 Noise 401 19.3.2 Formation of Noise-Induced Hearing Loss 402 19.3.3 Temporary Threshold Shift 402 19.3.4 Hearing Protection 404 19.4 Audiometry 405 19.4.1 Pure-Tone Audiometry 405 19.4.2 Bone-Conduction Audiometry 406 19.4.3 Speech Audiometry 406 19.4.4 Sound-Field Audiometry 407 19.4.5 Tympanometry 407 19.4.6 Otoacoustic Emissions 408 19.4.7 Neural Responses 409 19.5 Hearing Aids 409 19.5.1 Types of Hearing Aids 409 19.5.2 Signal Processing in Hearing Aids 410 19.5.3 Transmission Systems and Assistive Listening Devices 414 19.6 Implantable Hearing Solutions 414 19.6.1 Cochlear Implants 414 19.6.2 Electric-Acoustic Stimulation 416 19.6.3 Bone-Anchored Hearing Aids 416 19.6.4 Middle-Ear Implants 416 Summary 416 Further Reading 417 References 417 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisEverything you need to know to take amazing photographs using your new DSLR The Nikon D5300 Digital Field Guide is filled with everything you need to know to take fantastic photos with your new Nikon.Table of ContentsIntroduction xiii About the Digital Field Guide xiv CHAPTER 1 Exploring the Nikon D5300 1 Key Components of the D5300 2 The top of the camera 2 The back of the camera 4 The front of the camera 7 The left side of the camera 8 The Viewfinder Display 10 The Information Display 14 CHAPTER 2 Nikon D5300 Essentials 21 Exposure Modes 22 Automatic modes 22 Programmed auto mode 23 Aperture-priority auto mode 24 Shutter-priority auto mode 25 Manual mode 26 Scene modes 27 Special Effects Modes 33 Night Vision 33 Color Sketch 34 Toy Camera effect 34 Miniature Effect 35 Selective Color 37 Silhouette 38 High Key 38 Low Key 38 HDR Painting 39 Metering Modes 40 Matrix metering mode 40 Center-weighted metering mode 41 Spot metering mode 42 Autofocus 42 Phase detection 42 Contrast detection 43 Focus Modes 43 Auto Servo AF mode 44 Continuous Servo AF mode 44 Single Servo AF mode 44 Manual focus mode 45 Autofocus Area Modes 45 Auto-area AF mode 46 Single-point AF mode 46 Dynamic-area AF mode 47 Release Modes 48 ISO Sensitivity 50 Auto ISO 50 Noise reduction 51 White Balance 53 The Kelvin scale 53 White balance settings 53 Picture Controls 55 File Formats, Size, and Compression 62 NEF (RAW) 63 JPEG 63 Image size 65 Image quality 66 Wi-Fi 67 GPS 69 CHAPTER 3 Setting up the Nikon D5300 71 The Playback Menu 72 Delete 72 Playback folder 73 Playback display options 74 Image review 75 Rotate tall 75 Slide show 75 DPOF print order 76 Rating 77 Select to send to smart device 77 The Shooting Menu 78 Reset shooting menu 78 Storage folder 78 Image quality 79 Image size 80 NEF (RAW) recording 80 White balance 82 Set Picture Control 84 Manage Picture Control 84 Auto distortion control 86 Color space 86 Active D-Lighting 87 High Dynamic Range 87 Long exposure NR 88 High ISO NR 88 ISO sensitivity settings 89 Release Mode 89 Multiple exposure 89 Interval timer shooting 90 Movie settings 91 The Custom Setting Menu 92 Reset custom settings 92 Custom Setting menu a: Autofocus 92 Custom Setting menu b: Exposure 94 Custom Setting menu c: Timers/AE lock 94 Custom Setting menu d: Shooting/display 96 Custom Setting menu e: Bracketing/fl ash 97 Custom Setting menu f: Controls 98 The Setup Menu 100 Format memory card 100 Monitor brightness 101 Info display format 101 Auto info display 101 Clean image sensor 102 Lock mirror up for cleaning 102 Image Dust Off ref photo 103 Flicker reduction 104 Time zone and date 104 Language 104 Auto image rotation 104 Image comment 104 Location data 105 Video mode 105 HDMI 106 Remote control 106 Wi-Fi 107 Eye-Fi upload 107 Conformity marking 107 Firmware version 107 The Retouch Menu 107 D-Lighting 109 Red-eye correction 109 Trim 110 Monochrome 110 Filter effects 111 Color balance 112 Image overlay 112 NEF (RAW) processing 113 Resize 114 Quick retouch 115 Straighten 115 Distortion control 116 Fisheye 116 Color outline 116 Color sketch 116 Perspective control 116 Miniature effect 117 Selective color 117 Edit movie 118 Recent Settings / My Menu 118 CHAPTER 4 Selecting and Using Lenses with the Nikon D5300 121 Deciphering Nikon Lens Codes 122 Lens Compatibility 123 The DX Crop Factor 125 Third-Party Lenses 127 Types of Lenses 129 Wide-angle lenses 129 Standard zoom lenses 133 Telephoto lenses 135 Close-up/Macro lenses 137 Fisheye lenses 139 CHAPTER 5 Controlling Exposure 141 Defining Exposure 142 ISO 143 Shutter speed 144 Aperture or f-stop 147 Fine-Tuning Your Exposure 150 Exposure compensation 150 Using histograms 151 CHAPTER 6 Working with Light 157 Lighting Essentials 158 The quality of light 158 Lighting direction 160 Natural Light 163 Continuous Light 165 The D5300 Built-in Flash 166 Built-in flash exposure modes 167 Flash sync modes 168 Flash Compensation 171 Light Modifiers 172 CHAPTER 7 Working with the Live View and Video Modes 175 Live View Mode 176 Focus modes 177 AF-area modes 178 Using Live View mode 180 Shooting and Editing Video 184 Frame size and frame rate 187 In-camera video editing 188 CHAPTER 8 Real-World Applications 191 Abstract Photography 192 Equipment 193 Technique 193 Action and Sports Photography 194 Equipment 195 Technique 196 Concert and Live Music Photography 198 Equipment 200 Technique 201 Macro Photography 203 Equipment 204 Technique 206 Nature and Landscape Photography 208 Equipment 209 Technique 210 Night and Low-light Photography 211 Equipment 212 Technique 214 Portrait Photography 216 Equipment 217 Technique 218 Still-life, Product, and Food Photography 220 Equipment 221 Technique 222 Street Photography 225 Equipment 225 Technique 227 CHAPTER 9 After Capture 231 Viewing Your Images 232 Downloading Your Images 234 File Management and Workflow 235 Folder structure 236 Editing 236 Filenames and metadata 237 Tonal Adjustments and Color Corrections 238 Sharing Your Images Using Wi-Fi 242 APPENDIX A General Composition Tips 245 APPENDIX B Accessories 251 Glossary 255 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks provides an overview of the key features of the 5th Generation (5G) mobile networks, discussing the motivation for 5G and the main challenges in developing this new technology.Table of ContentsContributor Biographies xiii Preface xxix Acknowledgements xxxi Introduction xxxiii 1 Drivers for 5G: The ‘Pervasive Connected World’ 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historical Trend of Wireless Communications 2 1.3 Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G 4 1.4 5G Roadmap 5 1.5 10 Pillars of 5G 6 1.5.1 Evolution of Existing RATs 6 1.5.2 Hyperdense Small]Cell Deployment 7 1.5.3 Self]Organising Network 8 1.5.4 Machine Type Communication 8 1.5.5 Developing Millimetre]Wave RATs 8 1.5.6 Redesigning Backhaul Links 9 1.5.7 Energy Efficiency 9 1.5.8 Allocation of New Spectrum for 5G 10 1.5.9 Spectrum Sharing 10 1.5.10 RAN Virtualisation 10 1.6 5G in Europe 11 1.6.1 Horizon 2020 Framework Programme 11 1.6.2 5G Infrastructure PPP 12 1.6.3 METIS Project 13 1.6.4 5G Innovation Centre 14 1.6.5 Visions of Companies 14 1.7 5G in North America 15 1.7.1 Academy Research 15 1.7.2 Company R&D 15 1.8 5G in Asia 16 1.8.1 5G in China 16 1.8.2 5G in South Korea 19 1.8.3 5G in Japan 21 1.9 5G Architecture 23 1.10 Conclusion 24 Acknowledgements 25 References 25 2 The 5G Internet 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Internet of Things and Context]Awareness 32 2.2.1 Internet of Things 33 2.2.2 Context]Awareness 34 2.3 Networking Reconfiguration and Virtualisation Support 35 2.3.1 Software Defined Networking 36 2.3.2 Network Function Virtualisation 38 2.4 Mobility 40 2.4.1 An Evolutionary Approach from the Current Internet 40 2.4.2 A Clean]Slate Approach 45 2.5 Quality of Service Control 47 2.5.1 Network Resource Provisioning 47 2.5.2 Aggregate Resource Provisioning 49 2.6 Emerging Approach for Resource Over]Provisioning 50 2.6.1 Control Information Repository 53 2.6.2 Service Admission Control Policies 53 2.6.3 Network Resource Provisioning 53 2.6.4 Control Enforcement Functions 54 2.6.5 Network Configurations 54 2.6.6 Network Operations 55 2.7 Summary 57 Acknowledgements 57 References 58 3 Small Cells for 5G Mobile Networks 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 What are Small Cells? 64 3.2.1 WiFi and Femtocells as Candidate Small]Cell Technologies 66 3.2.2 WiFi and Femto Performance – Indoors vs Outdoors 70 3.3 Capacity Limits and Achievable Gains with Densification 73 3.3.1 Gains with Multi]Antenna Techniques 73 3.3.2 Gains with Small Cells 76 3.4 Mobile Data Demand 81 3.4.1 Approach and Methodology 81 3.5 Demand vs Capacity 81 3.6 Small]Cell Challenges 93 3.7 Conclusions and Future Directions 97 References 99 4 Cooperation for Next Generation Wireless Networks 105 4.1 Introduction 105 4.2 Cooperative Diversity and Relaying Strategies 107 4.2.1 Cooperation and Network Coding 107 4.2.2 Cooperative ARQ MAC Protocols 108 4.3 PHY Layer Impact on MAC Protocol Analysis 110 4.3.1 Impact of Fast Fading and Shadowing on Packet Reception for QoS Guarantee 111 4.3.2 Impact of Shadowing Spatial Correlation 112 4.4 Case Study: NCCARQ 113 4.4.1 NCCARQ Overview 113 4.4.2 PHY Layer Impact 114 4.5 Performance Evaluation 116 4.5.1 Simulation Scenario 116 4.5.2 Simulation Results 117 4.6 Conclusion 122 Acknowledgements 122 References 122 5 Mobile Clouds: Technology and Services for Future Communication Platforms 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 The Mobile Cloud 127 5.2.1 User Resources 129 5.2.2 Software Resources 130 5.2.3 Hardware Resources 131 5.2.4 Networking Resources 132 5.3 Mobile Cloud Enablers 133 5.3.1 The Mobile User Domain 133 5.3.2 Wireless Technologies 135 5.3.3 Software and Middleware 139 5.4 Network Coding 140 5.5 Summary 145 References 145 6 Cognitive Radio for 5G Wireless Networks 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Overview of Cognitive Radio Technology in 5G Wireless 150 6.3 Spectrum Optimisation using Cognitive Radio 152 6.4 Relevant Spectrum Optimisation Literature in 5G 152 6.4.1 Dynamic Spectrum Access 152 6.4.2 Spectrum Regulatory Policy 153 6.4.3 Marketing Policy and Model 154 6.5 Cognitive Radio and Carrier Aggregation 154 6.6 Energy]Efficient Cognitive Radio Technology 155 6.7 Key Requirements and Challenges for 5G Cognitive Terminals 156 6.7.1 5G Devices as Cognitive Radio Terminals 157 6.7.2 5G Cognitive Terminal Challenges 159 6.8 Summary 162 References 162 7 The Wireless Spectrum Crunch: White Spaces for 5G? 165 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Background 168 7.2.1 Early Spectrum Management 168 7.2.2 History of TV White Spaces 169 7.2.3 History of Radar White Spaces 171 7.3 TV White Space Technology 171 7.3.1 Standards 172 7.3.2 Approaches to White Space 173 7.4 White Space Spectrum Opportunities and Challenges 175 7.5 TV White Space Applications 178 7.5.1 Fixed Wireless Networking 180 7.5.2 Public Safety Applications 181 7.5.3 Mobile Broadband 182 7.6 International Efforts 185 7.7 Role of WS in 5G 186 7.8 Conclusion 186 References 187 8 Towards a Unified 5G Broadcast]Broadband Architecture 191 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Background 192 8.3 Challenges to Be Addressed 195 8.3.1 The Spectrum Dimension 195 8.3.2 The Risk of Fragmentation of the Terminal Market 196 8.3.3 The Change in TV Consumer Patterns and the Need for a Flexible Approach 197 8.3.4 Business]Related Hurdles 198 8.3.5 Societal Requirement: TV Broadcasting as a Public Service Media in Europe 198 8.4 Candidate Network Architectures for a BC]BB Convergent Solution 199 8.4.1 Solution 1: Cellular Broadcasting in the TV Spectrum 200 8.4.2 Solution 2: Hybrid Network Approach – Using DVB]T2 FEFs for LTE Transmission 201 8.4.3 Solution 3: Next Generation Common Broadcasting System 201 8.5 The BC]BB Study: What Needs to Be Done 204 8.5.1 TV and Video Future Consumption Models in Europe 204 8.5.2 BC]BB Architecture Options 204 8.5.3 Large]Scale Simulation and Assessment of BC]BB Convergent Options 204 8.5.4 Feasibility Study 205 8.6 Conclusion 205 References 206 9 Security for 5G Communications 207 9.1 Introduction 207 9.2 Overview of a Potential 5G Communications System Architecture 208 9.3 Security Issues and Challenges in 5G Communications Systems 209 9.3.1 User Equipment 210 9.3.2 Access Networks 212 9.3.3 Mobile Operator’s Core Network 216 9.3.4 External IP Networks 217 9.4 Summary 218 References 219 10 SON Evolution for 5G Mobile Networks 221 10.1 Introduction 221 10.2 SON in UMTS and LTE 222 10.3 The Need for SON in 5G 231 10.4 Evolution towards Small]Cell Dominant HetNets 236 10.4.1 Towards a New SON Architecture for 5G 237 10.5 Conclusion 239 References 240 11 Green Flexible RF for 5G 241 11.1 Introduction 241 11.2 Radio System Design 242 11.2.1 Antenna Design for 5G 242 11.2.2 Passive Front]End Design Using SIW for 5G Application 254 11.2.3 RF Power Amplifiers 257 11.3 Nonlinear Crosstalk in MIMO Systems 264 11.4 Summary 269 Acknowledgements 269 References 270 12 Conclusion and Future Outlook 273 12.1 Design Drivers for Next]Generation Networks 273 12.2 5G: A Green Inter]networking Experience 274 12.2.1 Emerging Approaches to Allow Drastic Reduction in the Signalling Overhead 278 12.3 A Vision for 5G Mobile 278 12.3.1 Mobile Small Cells the Way Forward? 279 12.4 Final Remarks 282 References 282 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisComputer Vision in Vehicle Technology: Land, Sea & Air Antonio M. Lopez, Universitat Autonoma de Barcelona, Spain Atsushi Imiya, Chiba University, Japan Tomas Pajdla, Czech Technical University, Prague Jose M.Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi Abbreviations and Acronyms xiii 1 Computer Vision in Vehicles 1Reinhard Klette 1.1 Adaptive Computer Vision for Vehicles 1 1.1.1 Applications 1 1.1.2 Traffic Safety and Comfort 2 1.1.3 Strengths of (Computer) Vision 2 1.1.4 Generic and Specific Tasks 3 1.1.5 Multi-module Solutions 4 1.1.6 Accuracy, Precision, and Robustness 5 1.1.7 Comparative Performance Evaluation 5 1.1.8 There Are Many Winners 6 1.2 Notation and Basic Definitions 6 1.2.1 Images and Videos 6 1.2.2 Cameras 8 1.2.3 Optimization 10 1.3 Visual Tasks 12 1.3.1 Distance 12 1.3.2 Motion 16 1.3.3 Object Detection and Tracking 18 1.3.4 Semantic Segmentation 21 1.4 Concluding Remarks 23 Acknowledgments 23 2 Autonomous Driving 24Uwe Franke 2.1 Introduction 24 2.1.1 The Dream 24 2.1.2 Applications 25 2.1.3 Level of Automation 26 2.1.4 Important Research Projects 27 2.1.5 Outdoor Vision Challenges 30 2.2 Autonomous Driving in Cities 31 2.2.1 Localization 33 2.2.2 Stereo Vision-Based Perception in 3D 36 2.2.3 Object Recognition 43 2.3 Challenges 49 2.3.1 Increasing Robustness 49 2.3.2 Scene Labeling 50 2.3.3 Intention Recognition 52 2.4 Summary 52 Acknowledgments 54 3 Computer Vision for MAVs 55Friedrich Fraundorfer 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 System and Sensors 57 3.3 Ego-Motion Estimation 58 3.3.1 State Estimation Using Inertial and Vision Measurements 58 3.3.2 MAV Pose from Monocular Vision 62 3.3.3 MAV Pose from Stereo Vision 63 3.3.4 MAV Pose from Optical Flow Measurements 65 3.4 3D Mapping 67 3.5 Autonomous Navigation 71 3.6 Scene Interpretation 72 3.7 Concluding Remarks 73 4 Exploring the Seafloor with Underwater Robots 75Rafael Garcia, Nuno Gracias, Tudor Nicosevici, Ricard Prados, Natalia Hurtos, Ricard Campos, Javier Escartin, Armagan Elibol, Ramon Hegedus and Laszlo Neumann 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Challenges of Underwater Imaging 77 4.3 Online Computer Vision Techniques 79 4.3.1 Dehazing 79 4.3.2 Visual Odometry 84 4.3.3 SLAM 87 4.3.4 Laser Scanning 91 4.4 Acoustic Imaging Techniques 92 4.4.1 Image Formation 92 4.4.2 Online Techniques for Acoustic Processing 95 4.5 Concluding Remarks 98 Acknowledgments 99 5 Vision-Based Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 100David Gerónimo, David Vázquez and Arturo de la Escalera 5.1 Introduction 100 5.2 Forward Assistance 101 5.2.1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Forward Collision Avoidance (FCA) 101 5.2.2 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) 103 5.2.3 Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) 105 5.2.4 Vulnerable Road User Protection 106 5.2.5 Intelligent Headlamp Control 109 5.2.6 Enhanced Night Vision (Dynamic Light Spot) 110 5.2.7 Intelligent Active Suspension 111 5.3 Lateral Assistance 112 5.3.1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keeping System (LKS) 112 5.3.2 Lane Change Assistance (LCA) 115 5.3.3 Parking Assistance 116 5.4 Inside Assistance 117 5.4.1 Driver Monitoring and Drowsiness Detection 117 5.5 Conclusions and Future Challenges 119 5.5.1 Robustness 119 5.5.2 Cost 121 Acknowledgments 121 6 Application Challenges from a Bird’s-Eye View 122Davide Scaramuzza 6.1 Introduction to Micro Aerial Vehicles (MAVs) 122 6.1.1 Micro Aerial Vehicles (MAVs) 122 6.1.2 Rotorcraft MAVs 123 6.2 GPS-Denied Navigation 124 6.2.1 Autonomous Navigation with Range Sensors 124 6.2.2 Autonomous Navigation with Vision Sensors 125 6.2.3 SFLY: Swarm of Micro Flying Robots 126 6.2.4 SVO, a Visual-Odometry Algorithm for MAVs 126 6.3 Applications and Challenges 127 6.3.1 Applications 127 6.3.2 Safety and Robustness 128 6.4 Conclusions 132 7 Application Challenges of Underwater Vision 133Nuno Gracias, Rafael Garcia, Ricard Campos, Natalia Hurtos, Ricard Prados, ASM Shihavuddin, Tudor Nicosevici, Armagan Elibol, Laszlo Neumann and Javier Escartin 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Offline Computer Vision Techniques for Underwater Mapping and Inspection 134 7.2.1 2D Mosaicing 134 7.2.2 2.5D Mapping 144 7.2.3 3D Mapping 146 7.2.4 Machine Learning for Seafloor Classification 154 7.3 Acoustic Mapping Techniques 157 7.4 Concluding Remarks 159 8 Closing Notes 161Antonio M. López References 164 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive advanced level examination of the transport theory of nanoscale devices Provides advanced level material of electron transport in nanoscale devices from basic principles of quantum mechanics through to advanced theory and various numerical techniques for electron transportCombines several up-to-date theoretical and numerical approaches in a unified manner, such as Wigner-Boltzmann equation, the recent progress of carrier transport research for nanoscale MOS transistors, and quantum correction approximationsThe authors approach the subject in a logical and systematic way, reflecting their extensive teaching and research backgroundsTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1 Emerging Technologies 1 1.1 Moore's Law and the Power Crisis 1 1.2 Novel Device Architectures 2 1.3 High Mobility Channel Materials 5 1.4 Two-Dimensional (2-D) Materials 7 1.5 Atomistic Modeling 8 2 First-principles calculations for Si nanostructures 12 2.1 Band structure calculations 12 2.1.1 Si ultrathin-body structures 12 2.1.2 Si nanowires 17 2.1.3 Strain effects on band structures: From bulk to nanowire 20 2.2 Tunneling current calculations through Si/SiO2/Si structures 31 2.2.1 Atomic models of Si (001)/SiO2 /Si (001) structures 32 2.2.2 Current-voltage characteristics 33 2.2.3 SiO2 thickness dependences 35 3 Quasi-ballistic Transport in Si Nanoscale MOSFETs 41 3.1 A picture of quasi-ballistic transport simulated using quantum-corrected Monte Carlo simulation 41 3.1.1 Device structure and simulation method 42 3.1.2 Scattering rates for 3-D electron gas 44 3.1.3 Ballistic transport limit 46 3.1.4 Quasi-ballistic transport 50 3.1.5 Role of elastic and inelastic phonon scattering 51 3.2 Multi-sub-band Monte Carlo simulation considering quantum confinement in inversion layers 55 3.2.1 Scattering Rates for 2-D Electron Gas 56 3.2.2 Increase in Dac for SOI MOSFETs 58 3.2.3 Simulated electron mobilities in bulk Si and SOI MOSFETs 59 3.2.4 Electrical characteristics of Si DG-MOSFETs 61 3.3 Extraction of quasi-ballistic transport parameters in Si DG-MOSFETs 64 3.3.1 Backscattering coefficient 64 3.3.2 Current drive 66 3.3.3 Gate and drain bias dependences 67 3.4 Quasi-ballistic transport in Si junctionless transistors 69 3.4.1 Device structure and simulation conditions 70 3.4.2 Influence of SR scattering 71 3.4.3 Influence of II scattering 74 3.4.4 Backscattering coefficient 75 3.5 Quasi-ballistic transport in GAA-Si nanowire MOSFETs 76 3.5.1 Device structure and 3DMSB-MC method 76 3.5.2 Scattering rates for 1-D electron gas 77 3.5.3 ID-VG characteristics and backscattering coefficient 79 4 Phonon Transport in Si Nanostructures 85 4.1 Monte Carlo simulation method 87 4.1.1 Phonon dispersion model 87 4.1.2 Particle simulation of phonon transport 88 4.1.3 Free flight and scattering 89 4.2 Simulation of thermal conductivity 91 4.2.1 Thermal conductivity of bulk silicon 91 4.2.2 Thermal conductivity of silicon thin films 94 4.2.3 Thermal conductivity of silicon nanowires 98 4.2.4 Discussion on Boundary scattering effect 100 4.3 Simulation of heat conduction in devices 102 4.3.1 Simulation method 102 4.3.2 Simple 1-D structure 103 4.3.3 FinFET structure 106 5 Carrier Transport in High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1 Quantum-corrected MC Simulation of High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1.1 Device Structure and Band Structures of Materials 112 5.1.2 Band Parameters of Si, Ge, and III-V Semiconductors 114 5.1.3 Polar-optical Phonon (POP) Scattering in III-V Semiconductors 115 5.1.4 Advantage of UTB Structure 116 5.1.5 Drive Current of III-V, Ge and Si n-MOSFETs 119 5.2 Source-drain Direct Tunneling in Ultrascaled MOSFETs 124 5.3 Wigner Monte Carlo (WMC) Method 125 5.3.1 Wigner Transport Formalism 126 5.3.2 Relation with Quantum-corrected MC Method 129 5.3.3 WMC Algorithm 131 5.3.4 Description of Higher-order Quantized Subbands 133 5.3.5 Application to Resonant-tunneling Diode 133 5.4 Quantum Transport Simulation of III-V n-MOSFETs with Multi-subband WMC (MSB-WMC) Method 138 5.4.1 Device Structure 138 5.4.2 POP Scattering Rate for 2-D Electron Gas 139 5.4.3 ID-VG Characteristics for InGaAs DG-MOSFETs 139 5.4.4 Channel Length Dependence of SDT Leakage Current 143 5.4.5 Effective Mass Dependence of Subthreshold Current Properties 144 6 Atomistic Simulations of Si, Ge and III-V Nanowire MOSFETs 151 6.1 Phonon-limited electron mobility in Si nanowires 151 6.1.1 Band structure calculations 152 6.1.2 Electron-phonon interaction 161 6.1.3 Electron mobility 162 6.2 Comparison of phonon-limited electron mobilities between Si and Ge nanowires 168 6.3 Ballistic performances of Si and InAs nanowire MOSFETs 173 6.3.1 Band structures 174 6.3.2 Top-of-the-barrier model 174 6.3.3 ID-VG characteristics 177 6.3.4 Quantum capacitances 178 6.3.5 Power-delay-product 179 6.4 Ballistic performances of InSb, InAs, and GaSb nanowire MOSFETs 181 6.4.1 Band structures 182 6.4.2 ID-VG characteristics 182 6.4.3 Power-delay-product 186 Appendix A: Atomistic Poisson equation 187 Appendix B: Analytical expressions of electron-phonon interaction Hamiltonian matrices 188 7 2-D Materials and Devices 191 7.1 2-D Materials 191 7.1.1 Fundamental Properties of Graphene, Silicene and Germanene 192 7.1.2 Features of 2-D Materials as an FET Channel 197 7.2 Graphene Nanostructures with a Bandgap 198 7.2.1 Armchair-edged Graphene Nanoribbons (A-GNRs) 199 7.2.2 Relaxation Effects of Edge Atoms 203 7.2.3 Electrical Properties of A-GNR-FETs Under Ballistic Transport 205 7.2.4 Bilayer Graphenes (BLGs) 209 7.2.5 Graphene Nanomeshes (GNMs) 214 7.3 Influence of Bandgap Opening on Ballistic Electron Transport in BLG and A-GNR-MOSFETs 215 7.3.1 Small Bandgap Regime 217 7.3.2 Large Bandgap Regime 219 7.4 Silicene, Germanene and Graphene Nanoribbons 221 7.4.1 Bandgap vs Ribbon Width 222 7.4.2 Comparison of Band Structures 222 7.5 Ballistic MOSFETs with Silicene, Germanene and Graphene nanoribbons 223 7.5.1 ID-VG Characteristics 223 7.5.2 Quantum Capacitances 224 7.5.3 Channel Charge Density and Average Electron Velocity 225 7.5.4 Source-drain Direct Tunneling (SDT) 226 7.6 Electron Mobility Calculation for Graphene on Substrates 228 7.6.1 Band Structure 229 7.6.2 Scattering Mechanisms 229 7.6.3 Carrier Degeneracy 231 7.6.4 Electron Mobility Considering Surface Optical Phonon Scattering of Substrates 232 7.6.5 Electron Mobility Considering Charged Impurity Scattering 234 7.7 Germanane MOSFETs 236 7.7.1 Atomic Model for Germanane Nanoribbon Structure 237 7.7.2 Band Structure and Electron Effective Mass 238 7.7.3 Electron Mobility 240 Appendix A: Density-of-states for Carriers in Graphene 242 References 242 Index 247

Read more less